Home

User manual

1. Auto I Parameter Value Description Parameter Value Description Filter Type LPF BPF Type of filter OverdriveSw OFF ON Turns Drive on off LPF The wah effect will be ap Drive 0 127 Degree of distortion plied over a wide frequency Vowel 1 a eio u First vowel Em h eff llb Vowel 2 a e i o u Second vowel ocn sens eck aedis Jd Rate 1 0 05 10 0 Hz Frequency at which the two plied over te fegueticy note vowels will be switched range Polarity DOWN UP When using the volume of the Depth 05127 e RACUM of 0 it will be input signal to control the wah fixed at se 1 effect this setting determines whether the frequency of the fil Trigger Sens 2 60 0 dB LFO me i won d two vowels wi W ter will e moved upward UL 60 0 dB When the specified d d DOWN or ANE RO levelis exceeded the sound will Frequency 1 0 127 Adjusts the frequency at which change to the other vowel at the the wah SHSSEWIN apply frequency speed specified by Peak 0 127 Adjusts the amount of the wah Rate effect that will occur i the range LFO The two vowel sounds will ofthe center frequency alternate at the frequency speci seta higher value tor Q tonar fied by Rate regardless of the row the range to be affected level Trigger Sens 2 0 127 Adjusts the sensitivity with Ps Low Freq 50 4000 Hz Frequency of the low range which the wah effect is con inof
2. MFX SEND CHO SEND REV SEND MFX PRM1 MFX PRM2 MFX PRM3 00 6C 0aaa aaaa Matrix Control 7 Sens 2 1 127 I 63 63 00 6D 0aaa aaaa Matrix Control 8 Source 0 108 l l l OFF CC01 CC31 CC33 CC95 BEND AFT l l PAD X PAD Y PAD X PAD Y TRIP R l l BEAM L BEAM R KNOB1 KNOB2 VELO KEYF 00 6E 0aaa aaaa Matrix Control 8 Dest 1 D FI I I I OFF OSCI PITCH OSCI TIME PW OSC1 FORMA FAT OSCI LVL OSC1 PENV ATK OSC1 PENV DCY OSC1 PENV REL OSCI TENV ATK OSCI TENV DCY OSC1 TENV REL OSC1 FENV ATK OSC1 FENV DCY OSC1 FENV REL OSCI AENV ATK OSCI AENV DCY OSC1 AENV REL OSCI LFO RATE OSCI LFO PCH OSC1 LFO TM PW OSCI LFO FR FT OSCl LFO LVL OSC2 PITCH OSC2 TIME PW OSC2 FORMA FAT OSC2 LVL OSC2 PENV ATK OSC2 PENV DCY OSC2 PENV REL OSC2 TENV ATK OSC2 TENV DCY OSC2 TENV REL OSC2 FENV ATK OSC2 FENV DCY OSC2 FENV REL OSC2 AENV ATK OSC2 AENV DCY OSC2 AENV REL OSC2 LFO RATE OSC2 LFO PCH OSC2 LFO TM PW OSC2 LFO FR FT OSC2 LFO LVL CSM1 PRM1 CSM1 PRM2 CSM1 ENV1 ATK CSM1 ENV1 DCY CSM1 ENV1 REL CSM1 ENV2 ATK CSM1 ENV2 DCY CSM1 ENV2 REL CSM1 LFO RATE CSM1 LFO PRM1 CSMI1 LFO PRM2 C
3. Parameter Value Description Distortion OD DS Selects whether to use overdrive Parameter Value Description Mode OD or distortion DS Input Mode MONO STE Selects either stereo input or Drive 1 0 127 Degree of distortion REO monaural input Amp Sim Sw OFF ON Turns the amp simulator on off Grade 1 5 Sets the grade of the effect Amp Type SMALL Type of guitar amp sound BUILT IN 2 SMALL small amp The higher the value is set the STACK 3 BUILT IN single unit type amp more natural sounding can be STACK 2 STACK large double stack obtained however this increas amp es the delay from the source 3 STACK large triple stack amp sound as well Distortion Level 0 127 Volume of the overdrive or dis Coarse Pitch A 12 12 semi Specifies the pitch shift amount tortion sound B 1 2 tone in semitones for pitch shift A or Mod Mode CHORUS Selects whether to use chorus or B FLANGER flanger Fine Pitch A B 100 100 cent Adjusts the pitch shift amount in Mod Rate 2 0 05 10 0 Hz Adjusts the speed of modulation 2 cent units 1 cent 1 100 of a note for the chorus or flanger semitone for pitch shift A or B Mod Depth 0 127 Adjusts the depth of modulation Pre Delay A B 0 500 ms Adjusts the delay time from the for the chorus or flanger direct sound until the pitch shift Mod Phase 0 180 deg Sets how the chorus or flanger A or B sound is heard sound is spread Level A B 0 127
4. Specifies when you want the metronome to sound Value OFF The metronome will not sound REC The metronome will sound only during sampling ALWAYS The metronome will sound whenever you sample including while you are making settings in preparation for sampling Level Metronome Level Specifies the volume of the metronome Value 0 127 Count In Specifies the number of measures for the count in that will occur before sampling Value OFF A count will not be sounded 1MEASURE A one measure count will be sounded 2MEASURE A two measure count will be sounded note If Trigger Mode is set to other than MANUAL this parameter has no effect Tempo Specifies the tempo of the metronome Value 20 0 250 0 Beat Specifies the time signature of the metronome Value Numerator 1 31 Denominator 2 4 8 16 32 Creating and Editing Samples Sample Mode Naming a Template Template Name Checking Sample Information A template can be given a name of up to eight characters 1 Access the SAMPLE Top screen p 56 1 Access the SAMPLE Top screen and select the sample that 2 Touch lt Info gt you want to name p 56 ot The SAMPLE Information screen appears 2 Touch V in the upper right of the screen A pulldown menu appears SAMPLE Top SAMPLE Infomation 7 1 128 User Sample 15 5KByte SAMPLING Template Encod
5. I 00 29 Oaaa aaaa Part 14 Program Number PC 0 127 3 Parameter Address Map 00 A Oman aca Part 15 Bank Select MSB CON 0 0 129 00 2B Oaaa aaaa Part 15 Bank Select LSB CC 32 0 127 I 00 2C Oaaa aaaa Part 15 Program Number PC 0 127 wA P MAS A 00 2D Oaaa aaaa Part 16 Bank Select MSB CC 0 0 127 Transmission of marked address is divided to some packets For example ABH in 00 2E Oaaa aaaa Part 16 Bank Select LSB CC 32 0 127 l hexadecimal notation will be divided to 0AH and 0BH and is sent received in this 3 OSEE i passages H Parte Program Number Po Os HOAN order 00 30 0000 000a Transpose Switch 0 1 OFF ON 00 31 0000 aaaa Transpose Value 59 70 k 1 V Synth ModellD 00H 53H I 00 32 0000 Oaaa Octave Shift 61 67 E ct I I 3 3 w 00 33 0000 000a Beep Switch 0 1 pes E I I I OFF ON Start I 00 34 0000 aaaa Sampling Template 1 8 Address Description pr D zal i f 00 35 0000 Oaaa Patch Palette Bank 0 7 01 00 00 00 Setup I 00 36 0000 0aaa Patch Palette Number 0 7 02 00 00 00 System 00 00 00 37 Total Size I I gt 10 00 00 00 Temporary Patch Part 1 10 01 00 00 Temporary Patch Part 2 ese ctae OSystem Common 10 OF 00 00 Temporary Patch Part 1
6. Type Cabinet Speaker Microphone SMALL small open back en 10 dynamic closure MIDDLE open back enclosure 12x 1 dynamic JC 120 open back enclosure 12 x 2 dynamic BUILT IN 1 open back enclosure 12x2 dynamic BUILT IN 2 open back enclosure 12x 2 condenser BUILT IN 3 open back enclosure 12x 2 condenser BUILT IN 4 open back enclosure 12x 2 condenser BUILT IN 5 open back enclosure 12x 2 condenser BG STACK 1 sealed enclosure 12x2 condenser BG STACK 2 large sealed enclosure 12 x 2 condenser MS STACK 1 large sealed enclosure 12 x 4 condenser MS STACK 2 large sealed enclosure 12 x 4 condenser METAL STACK large double stack 12x4 condenser Recommended combination of pre amp and speaker Amp type Speaker type BG LEAD BG STACK 1 BG STACK 2 MIDDLE MS1959 II BG STACK 1 2 METAL STACK MS1959 TII BG STACK 1 2 METAL STACK SLDN LEAD BG STACK 1 2 METAL STACK METAL 5150 BG STACK 1 2 METAL STACK METAL LEAD BG STACK 1 2 METAL STACK OD 2 TURBO BUILT IN 1 4 DISTORTION BUILT IN 1 4 FUZZ BUILT IN 1 4 119 RENEE Appendices 07 Auto Wah Wah is an effect that modifies the frequency characteristics of a filter over time producing a unique tone The wah effect can change in relation to the volume of the input signal and or cyclically human voice 08 Humanizer This adds a vowel character to the sound making it similar to a
7. Xover Hi Gain 36 0 dB Specifies how greatly the high range will be attenuated Mod Level 0 127 Volume of the chorus or flanger sound Ps Low Freq 50 4000 Hz Frequency of the low range Ps Low Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the low range Ps Hi Freq 2000 20000 Hz Frequency of the high range Ps Hi Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the high range 132 32 Enh Delay Enhancer Delay This effect connects an Enhancer and a Delay in series amp Enhancer gt Delay Parameter Value Description Enhan Sens 1 0 127 Sensitivity of the enhancer Enhan Frequen 0 127 Sets the lower limit of the fre cy quencies to which the enhance ment effect is added Enhan Mix Lev 0 127 Leveloftheovertones generated el by the enhancer Enhan Level 0 127 Volume of the enhancer sound Delay Time 0 1300 ms note Adjusts the delay time from the direct sound until the delay sound is heard Delay Feedback 98 98 Adjusts the proportion of the de 2 lay sound that is fed back into the effect Negative settings will invert the phase Low Damp Freq 50 4000 Hz Adjusts the frequency below which sound fed back to the ef fect will be cut The Low Damp function damps the low frequency band of the delay sound quicker than other bands which makes for a clearer delay effect Low Damp 36 0 dB Degree of Low Damp Gain Hi Damp Freq 2000 20000 Hz Adj
8. Parameter Value Description NS Sw OFF ON Turns the noise suppressor on off The noise suppressor leaves the original sound unmodified but mutes only the noise during the silent intervals NS Threshold 0 127 Adjusts the level at which the noise suppressor will begin to take effect When the signal drops below the specified level it will be muted NS Release 0 127 Sets the transition time from when the noise suppression starts to the point where the vol ume reaches 0 Amp Type JC 120 CLEAN Type of guitar amp TWIN MATCH DRIVE BG LEAD MS19591 MS1959II MS19591 IL SLDN LEAD METAL 5150 METAL LEAD OD 1 OD 2 TURBO DIS TORTION FUZZ Parameter Value Description Volume 0 127 Volume and degree of distortion of the amp Bass 0 127 Tone of the bass mid treble Middle range Treble Middle cannot be set if MATCH DRIVE is selected for the Amp Type Presence 0 127 Tone for the ultra high frequen cy range Master Volume 0 127 Volume of the entire amp Brightness Sw OFF ON Turning this On will produce a sharper and brighter sound This parameter can be set if the Amp Type is set to JC 120 CLEAN TWIN or BG LEAD Gain Sw LOW MID Degree of amp distortion HIGH Sp Sim Sw OFF ON Turns the Speaker Simulator on off Sp Type see below Type of speaker Mic Setting 1 10 Adjusts the location of the mic that is
9. 2 47 Pulse width 44 Time s 44 em 49 Keyboard sensitivity seriereeks iiie tendens 78 Keyboard velocity Knobil 2 ASSIBti ceret eee tbe ree cid Ku ob 1 2 Eocal SW su euet eee anna earn 80 L LED contrast ii e AR De UR TA dau 15 LCD CONTRAST knob siii recedet iiec 15 Legato Legato Switeh certo te cete nee eere ce reae 37 Length lockz ier n ERU HOT E AE EENI LEVEE Sari tdi eee ree an eerie eee e eR eren Leve la e a HET n reo tee oscillator cud m sues Level Estrada did tados alan De ca eno e DRESS esed Mu De quee dus Level LFO Dp we 45 Deverect RR RENA 81 LFO COSM ea OScIHatOr 7 L uu L eter etian Sau ida TVA ses LFO delay time LFO depth Fata ES y IE e ERE E EET ETHER Q STET ED 44 WHO PIMA TRAE EE DE E ERR 45 Oscillator level z Oscillator pitch A Sm e o a 43 A RR 47 patehrlevell u m u ete 47 P ulsewidtfh u eee nm Sua Sh mu Su ua 231 44 LEO DPBLJ Lili unu SI u mua aD ded 14 LFO DPZ e 14 LFO DP3 14 LFO fade mode 49 LFO fade time 49 LFO key sync switch ioeie r ear R Ea E ra ea rE nS 49 LEO ffs t sinerien i aes 49 LFO RATE 14 LFO rate 49 LFO settings we 49 Link Y assign XY AAA 80 Load Proj ct 5 ES ES 84 Local BW indes STOR oe SS Sead s M Esa 78 Local switch einer treten derent doen needed eruat 78 LOCK LOOP
10. The Time Trip Pad settings are saved with each patch This means that you can create patches that contain Time Trip Pad settings you like Applying an Effect by Passing Your Hand Over the D Beam D Beam Controller The D Beam controller can be used simply by waving your hand over it It can be used to apply various effects depending on the function that is assigned to it You can also create effects in which the sound changes instantaneously in a way that would not be possible by operating a knob or the bender lever 1 Access the PATCH PLAY screen p 21 2 Choose the function that you want to control from the D Beam controller and press the D BEAM button for that function to turn on the D Beam controller D BEAM TIME ASSIGN TRIP TIME PITCH ABLE ON OFF TIME TRIP Apply the Time Trip effect TIME Apply the time control effect PITCH Apply the pitch control effect ASSIGNABLE Apply the effect that is specified by each patch By turning ASSIGNABLE on you can apply the effect that is specified by each patch In this case however unlike the other three functions simply pressing the button to turn it on will not apply an effect You will also need to make matrix control settings Set the matrix control Source to BEAM L or BEAM R and specify the parameter to be controlled in Destination For details on these settings refer to Matrix Ctrl p 38 3
11. slightly different than when it is played normally 4 If you wish to change the save destination re specify the save destination patch by using the VALUE dial 5 Touch lt Execute gt to execute the Save operation Registering a Favorite Patch Patch Palette You can bring together your favorite and most frequently used patches in one place by registering them into the patch palette By using this function you can rapidly select favorite patches from internal memory You can register a total of 64 sounds 8 sounds x 8 banks as favorite sounds u For details on how to select patches that are registered in the patch palette refer to Selecting Favorite Patches Patch Palette p 22 1 Access the PATCH PLAY screen and select the patch that you wish to register p 21 2 Hold down BANK and press a NUMBER 1 8 to select the bank in which you wish to register the sound When you press BANK the indicator of the currently selected bank button NUMBER 1 8 will blink a If you continue pressing PATCH ASSIGN or BANK the PATCH PALETTE window will appear In this window you can view the patches that are registered in the currently selected bank 3 Hold down PATCH ASSIGN and press a NUMBER 1 8 to select the button at which you wish to register the sound When the display indicates Completed registration has been completed 35 MU Creating a Patch Creating a
12. Parameter Value Description Trem PanSw OFF ON Turns the tremolo auto pan ef fect on off Trem Mode TREMOLO Selects whether to use tremolo AUTO PAN or auto pan Trem Wave TRI SAWUP Selects the type of modulation form SAWDN SOR TRI Triangle wave SIN SAWUP SAWDN Sawtooth Wave SOR Square wave SIN Sine wave SAWUP SAWDN Trem Rate 0 05 10 0 Hz Frequency of modulation note Trem Depth 0 127 Depth of modulation 37 Keyboard Multi sound Parameter Value Description Enhan Sw OFF ON Turns the enhancer effect on A ring modulator 3 band equalizer pitch shifter phaser and delay off are connected in series Enhan Sens ie Sensitivity of the enhancer Ring Modulator is an effect which applies ring modulation using an Enhan Frequen 0 127 Sets the lower limit of the fre F F y internal oscillator to the input signal producing bell like sounds cy quencies to which the enhance ment effect is added Enhan Mix Lev 0 127 Level of the overtones generated O el by the enhancer Ia Enhan Level 0 127 Volume of the enhancer sound Ring O ja 35 Phaser Manual 0 127 Specifies the center frequency at uu NM e which the sound is modulated Phaser Rate 0 05 10 0 Hz Specifies the frequency of mod note ulation Phaser Depth 0 127 Specifies the depth of modula tion Phaser Reso 0 127 Specifies the amount of feed nance bac
13. mm ES U LINK Init write TT Pad Local Sw V LINK Time Trip Pad Local Switch Specify whether the Time Trip pad and the internal sound generator will be disconnected in V Link mode OFF or not disconnected ON Value OFF ON X Assign XY V LINK X Assign XY Specify the V Link function that will be controlled when you operate the Time Trip pad in the X horizontal direction in XY mode Value OFF The time trip pad will not be used PLAYBACK SPEED Playback speed DISSOLVE TIME Dissolve time time over which the image switches AUDIO LEVEL Volume during audio playback COLOR CB Color Cb color difference signal COLOR CR Color Cr color difference signal BRIGHTNESS Brightness VFX1 Visual effects 1 VFX2 Visual effects 2 VFX3 Visual effects 3 VFX4 Visual effects 4 OUTPUT FADE Output fade T BAR T bar Y Assign XY Link Y Assign XY Specify the V Link function that will be controlled when you operate the Time Trip pad in the Y vertical direction in XY mode Value OFF The time trip pad will not be used PLAYBACK SPEED Playback speed DISSOLVE TIME Dissolve time time over which the image switches AUDIO LEVEL Volume during audio playback COLOR CB Color Cb color difference signal COLOR CR Color Cr color difference signal BRIGHTNESS Brightness VFX1 Visual effects 1 VFX2 Visual effects 2 VFX3 Visual effects 3 VFX4 Visual effects 4 OUTPUT FADE Output fade T BAR
14. IE 00 14 0000 aaaa I I 0000 dddd MEX Parameter 32 12768 52768 I 0000 bbbb I I I I 20000 20000 l 0000 cccc I I I 0000 dddd MFX Parameter 5 12768 52768 00 00 01 04 Total Size I I I I 20000 20000 14 00 18 0000 aaaa I 0000 bbbb I I 0000 cccc OPatch Chorus I 0000 dddd MEX Parameter 6 12768 52768 I I I 20000 20000 E 14 00 1C 0000 aaaa I Offset I I I 0000 bbbb I I Address Description I I 0000 cccc I 0000 dddd MFX Parameter 7 12768 52768 00 00 0000 aaaa Chorus Type 0 8 I I I 20000 20000 I I I I ES 00 20 0000 aaaa I I 00 01 Oaaa aaaa Chorus Master Level 0 127 I 0000 bbbb I 00 02 Oaaa aaaa Chorus Reverb Send Level 0 127 I 0000 cccc I I 0000 dddd MFX Parameter 8 12768 52768 IE 00 03 0000 aaaa I I I I 20000 20000 I 0000 bbbb I E 00 24 0000 aaaa I I 0000 cccc I I 0000 bbbb I 0000 dddd Chorus Parameter 1 12768 52768 0000 cccc I I I 20000 20000 I 0000 dddd MFX Parameter 9 12768 52768 IE 00 07 0000 aaaa I I I I 20000 20000 I 0000 bbbb I ES 00 28 0000 aaaa I I 0000 cccc I 0000 bbbb I I 0000 dddd Chorus Parameter 2 12768 52768 I 0000 cccc I I I I 20000 20000 0000 dddd MFX Parameter 10 1276
15. 114 Settings p 48 Resonance Reso 2 0 127 Resonance Dyn Env 63 63 Envelope depth for the in put sound R LFO Dp 4 63 63 Amount of LFO applied to resonance For details on envelope settings refer to Making Envelope Settings p 48 LFO For details on LFO settings refer to Making LFO Settings p 49 mame Polyphonic Compressor Flattens out high levels and boosts low levels smoothing out unevenness in volume Parameter Value Description COSM Type Attack 1 0 127 Attack time Sustain 2 0 127 Sustain level Output Level 0 127 Output Level LIMITER at COSM List Lo Fi Processor By changing the bit count and sample rate this effect Polyphonic Limiter Compresses signals that exceed a specified volume level preventing distortion from occurring recreates the Lo Fi Low Fidelity sounds of the early digital samplers and similar machines After the Lo Fi processor a filter to change the tone is arranged in Parameter Value Description COSM Type Thres 0 127 Sets the volume level at which the compression be gins Ratio 2 1 4 1 16 1 100 1 Compression ratio Attack 1 0 127 Attack time Release 2 0 127 Release time Output 0 127 Output Level F SHIFT PP Frequency Shifter By shifting the frequency relationship of the fundamental
16. Parameter Value Description Parameter Value Description Pre Low Freq 50 4000 Hz Frequency of the low range Pre Low Freq 50 4000 Hz Frequency of the low range Pre Low Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the low range Pre Low Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the low range Pre Mid Freq 50 20000 Hz Frequency of the middle Pre Mid Freq 50 20000 Hz Frequency of the middle range range Pre Mid Q 0 5 0 7 1 0 2 0 Gain of the middle range Pre Mid Q 0 5 0 7 1 0 2 0 Gain of the middle range 4 0 8 0 Set a higher value for Q to 4 0 8 0 Set a higher value for Q to narrow the range to be af narrow the range to be af fected fected Pre Mid Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the middle range Pre Mid Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the middle range Pre Hi Freq 2000 20000 Hz Frequency of the high Pre Hi Freq 2000 20000 Hz Frequency of the high range range Pre Hi Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the high range Pre Hi Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the high range Reverb Time 0 06 32 0 sec Duration time of the re Low Rev Time 0 06 64 0 sec Duration time of the re verb verb for the low frequency Pre Dly Time 0 200 0 ms Adjusts the delay time from band the direct sound until the Hi Rev Time 0 06 64 0 sec Duration time of the re delay sound is heard verb for the high frequency Density 0 99 Density of the reverb band Room Size 1 8 Size of the room which is Xover Freq 160 15000 Hz The reverberation specified simulated THRU by the Low Rev Time will Early Ref Level 0 99 Volume level of the initial be
17. Ela When you place your hand over the D Beam controller the L or R level meter in the screen will move upward or downward 2 First specify the location at which the D Beam controller will begin responding i e the minimum value Move your hand toward the D Beam controller and touch lt Min gt at the point where you want the controller to begin responding 3 Next specify the location at which the D Beam controller will reach the peak i e the maximum value Continue moving your hand toward the D Beam controller and touch lt Max gt at the point where you want the peak response to occur 4 While watching the level meter in the screen raise and lower your hand to check the response of the D Beam controller 5 If you are satisfied with the response touch lt OK gt The sensitivity of the D Beam controller will be calibrated Appendices Parameter List Patch Parameters Common Group p 36 Parameter Value General Structure Type TYPE1 TYPE2 TYPE3 Portamento Portamento Switch OFF ON Mode Portamento Mode NORMAL LEGATO Type Portamento Type RATE TIME Time Portamento Time 0 127 Time Velo Sens Portamento Time Velocity Sensitivity 63 63 Mono Poly Mono Poly Legato Legato Switch OFF ON D Beam Bender Octave Shift 3 3 D Beam D Beam Type OF
18. I 0000 dddd I I I I 63 63 I 0000 eeee I I 00 33 00aa aaaa Env 4 Time Keyfollow 44 84 I 0000 ffff I l I I 200 200 0000 gggg I 0000 hhhh osc 2 Start Offset is 00 34 0000 aaaa I I 0000000h FFFFFFFh I 0000 bbbb Env 5 Attack Time 0 144 00 68 Oaaa aaaa OSC 2 Time 1 127 0 127 MUSICAL NOTES I 63 63 l4 00 36 0000 aaaa I 00 69 OOaa aaaa OSC 2 Time Keyfollow 44 84 I 0000 bbbb Env 5 Decay Time 0 144 200 200 0 127 MUSICAL NOTES I 00 6A Oaaa aaaa OSC 2 Time LFO Depth 1 127 00 38 Oaaa aaaa Env 5 Sustine 0 127 l 63 63 it 00 39 0000 aaaa l I 00 6B Oaaa aaaa OSC 2 Time Envelope Depth 127 I 0000 bbbb Env 5 Release Time 0 144 63 63 0 127 MUSICAL NOTES I 00 6C 0000 OOaa OSC 2 Time Offset 0 2 00 3B 0000 Oaaa Env 5 Velocity Curve 0 7 BWD ZERO FWD FIXED 17 l 00 6D Oaaa aaaa OSC 2 Formant 1 127 00 3C Oaaa aaaa Env 5 Velocity Sens 127 I I I 63 63 I I 63 63 I 00 6E 00aa aaaa OSC 2 Formant Keyfollow 44 84 I 00 3D Oaaa aaaa Env 5 Attack Velocity Sens 1 127 I I I 200 200 I I I 563 63 I 00 6F Oaaa aaaa OSC 2 Formant LFO Depth 1 127 I 00 3E Oaaa aaaa Env 5 Decay Veloc
19. OSCI LVL OSC1 PENV ATK OSC1 PENV DCY OSC1 PENV REL OSC1 TENV ATK OSC1 TENV DCY OSC1 TENV REL OSC1 FENV ATK OSC1 FENV DCY OSC1 FENV REL OSC1 AENV ATK OSC1 AENV DCY OSC1 AENV REL OSCI LFO RATE OSCI LFO PCH OSC1 LFO TM PW OSCI LFO FR FT OSC1 LFO LVL OSC2 PITCH OSC2 TIME PW OSC2 FORMA FAT OSC2 LVL OSC2 PENV ATK OSC2 PENV DCY OSC2 PENV REL OSC2 TENV ATK OSC2 TENV DCY OSC2 TENV REL OSC2 FENV ATK OSC2 FENV DCY OSC2 FENV REL OSC2 AENV ATK OSC2 AENV DCY OSC2 AENV REL OSC2 LFO RATE OSC2 LFO PCH OSC2 LFO TM PW OSC2 LFO FR FT OSC2 LFO LVL CSM1 PRM1 CSM1 PRM2 CSM1 ENV1 ATK CSM1 ENV1 DCY CSM1 ENV1 REL CSM1 ENV2 ATK CSM1 ENV2 DCY CSM1 ENV2 REL CSM1 LFO RATE CSM1 LFO PRM1 CSM1 LFO PRM2 CSM2 PRM1 CSM2 PRM2 CSM2 ENV1 ATK CSM2 ENV1 DCY CSM2 ENV1 REL CSM2 ENV2 ATK CSM2 ENV2 DCY CSM2 ENV2 REL CSM2 LFO RATE CSM2 LFO PRM1 CSM2 LFO PRM2 TVA LVL TVA ENV ATK TVA ENV DCY TVA ENV REL TVA LFO RATE TVA LFO LVL TVA LFO PAN MFX SEND CHO SEND REV SEND MFX PRM1 MFX PRM2 MFX PRM3 I 00 56 Oaaa aaaa Matrix Control 3 Sens 1 1 127 63 63 I 00 57 Oaaa aaaa Matrix Control 3 Dest 2 0 77 OFF OSCI PITCH OSCI
20. RxCh MEET rxch 2 LRXEh 3 RXCh 4 Rx Sw E Rx Sw Rx Sw Ea RX Sw FA RX Ch S RxCh 6 RxCh 7 RxCh 8 Parti Part12 Sl o Lore mse Loe meso Ls Rx Ch alah 10PRXCh 11 RXGR 12 Partis Partid Partis Partie Sl wesw Lae accu La oso Lore RxCH 13 RxCh 14 Rxth 15 Rxch 16 Part1 16 Rx Sw Part 1 16 Receive Switch For each part specify whether MIDI messages will be received ON or not OFF If this is ON you can play that part from an external MIDI device Normally you will select ON only for part 1 which you play from the keyboard Value OFF ON Part 1 16 Rx Ch Part 1 16 Receive Channel Specifies the MIDI receive channel for each part Value 1 16 von Performance data directed to the V Synth itself will be transmitted on the channel you specified for part 1 Controller Settings Controller Tx Patch Tx Ch Tx Bank Tx Active Sens mm ESI Init write Patch Tx Ch Patch Transmit Channel Specifies the transmit channel of MIDI messages in Patch mode If you do not want to transmit MIDI messages to external MIDI devices turn this parameter OFF If you want the transmit channel to always match the Patch Receive Channel set this parameter to RX CH Value 1 16 RX CH OFF Tx PC Transmit Program Change Switch Specifies whether Program Change messages will be transmitted ON or not OFF Value OFF ON Tx Bank Transm
21. TMPL TMPL TMPL TMPL gt Comp Limiter Hoisesup Di Sampling Input Pre FX Metro Trigger MONORAL ANALOG OFF Mc oa v9 L3 A BES 5 Touch lt TMPL 1 gt lt TMPL 8 gt to select a sampling template If you want to modify the settings of the selected sampling template perform the following steps 6 8 6 Touch one of the tabs displayed at the bottom of the screen to access the corresponding setting screen lt General gt Setup settings p 60 lt Pre Effect gt Pre effect settings p 61 lt Metronome gt Metronome settings p 62 iS For details on each parameter refer to the page references given 7 In each setting screen touch the touch panel to set the parameters u For details on operations in the touch panel refer to Basic Touch Screen Operation p 19 8 To set the value of a parameter move the cursor to the value box of the parameter that you want to edit Then adjust the value by turning the VALUE dial or by using INC DEC You can also adjust the value by dragging on the touch screen 9 Adjust the sampling level Adjust the volume of the device that is producing the sound When sampling from the INPUT jacks adjust the level by turning the front panel INPUT knob or setting the rear panel GAIN switch If you are sampling from the DIGITAL AUDIO INTERFACE IN connector use the setup Pre gain p 61 or the pre effect Output Level p 62 setting
22. Loop AN Eoop regi n canarias 68 LOW Et eq X 75 Low frequency 75 LOW Gain 75 TEV EOD aes us tette a e te Le ai sa B 47 M MATN OUT j ck diee e ee dd 15 Master seks LEE 74 Master Key Shift 74 Master Level 74 Master Tune 74 Matrix control 1e NS 38 Matrix control destination 1 2 non no nconcnnnnnoos 39 Matrix control sens Matrix control source Y 38 Matri Ctrl 38 aD e e 38 MeTHOTy e ert tht e RI desee eere ines ena ua Edo eo densis 17 Metro Type nee eot eet e n Ende net 62 Metronome 2s Metronome level crt etienne recen eene tet enn aee 62 Metronome typen srasni eeaeee E A ERTE a sau 62 A NOA 14 MEX AAA 50 51 MEX chorus send level peceren iinitan 51 MEX Master Level 2 eerie treten einer edo estet rage 50 MEX On Off SWitch 2 2 ertet ere ed eite te on cinc 50 MEX reverb send level 51 MEX Send 50 MEX send level 50 MFX To CHO iiti e e dre e ee eee ede 51 MEX TO REV sho seve usen er Ree re RE eei 51 MFX Type MID 1 Freq 75 Mid T frequency cto ay t e e hits s 75 MID T Gain eee ee e ret eus 75 MIDA Qe umu Laza d oe Ure tea aa sve ga MID 2 Freq Mid 2 frequency L S a a nisa ass 75 MID 2 Gait aaa aa 75 MID 2Q ZO MIDI Channel 80 MIDI connector 15 MUD Emde seis nete e ERR
23. es 001 MadOrchestra 4 Turn the VALUE dial to specify the save destination patch Creating a Patch By touching lt Compare gt you can check the save destination patch Compare function When you touch List the PATCH List window will appear allowing you to select the save destination patch from the list PRTCH PLRY My Patchi rz e11 PRTCH List Hare Trek 010 Quasimodo Warrer O11zLetThemPray O84 TriP of Time o sides now a tm e1S5 Earth Teme 916 Runnins Away 661 257 256 512 5 Touch lt Execute gt to execute the Save operation Auditioning the Save Destination Patch Compare Before you save a patch you can audition the patch which currently occupies the save destination to make sure that itis one you don t mind overwriting This can help prevent important patches from being accidentally overwritten and lost 1 Follow the procedure in Saving Patches PATCH Write through step 4 to select the save destination 2 Touch lt Compare gt to turn it on Now you can play the patch that is in the currently selected save destination PATCH PLAY My Patch EZ 011 v PATCH Write Source ESA My Patchi Destination cancel Execute 3 Play the keyboard to sound the save destination patch then check whether you really want to overwrite it nore The patch auditioned using the Compare function may sound
24. CSM2 PRM1 CSM2 PRM2 CSM2 ENV1 ATK CSM2 ENV1 DCY CSM2 ENV1 REL CSM2 ENV2 ATK CSM2 ENV2 DCY CSM2 ENV2 REL CSM2 LFO RATE CSM2 LFO PRM1 CSM2 LFO PRM2 TVA LVL TVA ENV ATK TVA ENV DCY TVA ENV REL TVA LFO RATE TVA LFO LVL TVA LFO PAN MFX SEND CHO SEND REV SEND MFX PRM1 MFX PRM2 MFX PRM3 00 71 Oaaa aaaa Matrix Control 8 Sens 2 Il lx 63 63 l _ 00 00 00 72 Total Size _ OPatch MFX p Offset Address Description I 00 00 Oaaa aaaa MFX Type 0 41 00 01 Oaaa aaaa MFX Master Level P 12877 00 02 Oaaa aaaa MFX Chorus Send Level ID e 21275 00 03 Oaaa aaaa MFX Reverb Send Level 0 127 IE 00 04 0000 aaaa 0000 bbbb 0000 cccc 0000 dddd MFX Parameter 1 12768 52768 20000 20000 LE 00 08 0000 aaaa 0000 bbbb 0000 ccce 0000 dddd MFX Parameter 2 12768 52768 20000 20000 IE 00 OC 0000 aaaa 0000 bbbb 0000 cccc 0000 dddd MFX Parameter 3 12768 52768 20000 20000 LE 00 10 0000 aaaa 0000 bbbb 0000 cccc 0000 dddd MFX Parameter 4 12768 52768 20000 20000 I I f I I l I I I I I I I l I I I l l I I I I I I I I 162 MIDI Implementation
25. P To input a tie hold down the key of the note that you want to tie and press B You will advance as many steps as the number of times you press Step input records the strength velocity with which you press the key and this will be reflected in the level or dynamics of the arpeggiated notes Control changes will be input with the value that was in effect when you pressed 9 nore The notes specified pitches and control changes in a single pattern cannot exceed a total maximum of 16 A newly pitched note or a control change that would exceed this total will not be recorded Be aware that if you input another note while still holding down the key for the previously input note these notes will be input as a chord located at the same step gt When you are finished with step input touch lt Stop gt 5 Press ARPEGGIO ON OFF to turn on the arpeggiator and play the keyboard to hear your step recorded pattern 27 Patch Mode ing in aww Play Playing in Patch Mode Applying Various Effects to the Sound The V Synth provides numerous ways in which you can make your performance more expressive such as the Time Trip pad D Beam controller and assignable controllers Applying an Effect by Touching Your Finger to the Pad Time Trip Pad You can apply a variety of effects by touching your fingertip to the Time Trip pad located at the left side of the V S
26. Tont common romer U LINK 4 Touch one of the tabs in the left of the screen to select the desired editing screen E For details on how the parameters are grouped refer to System Parameters p 108 5 In each editing screen touch the touch screen to set the parameters E For details on how to use the touch screen refer to Basic Touch Screen Operation p 19 6 When editing a parameter that requires you to specify a value move the cursor to the value box of that parameter Then modify the value by either turning the VALUE dial or pressing INC or DEC You can also modify a value by dragging over the touch screen 7 Repeat steps 3 6 to make the settings for the System function Saving the System Settings Write Changes you make to the System function settings are only temporary they will be discarded as soon as the power is turned off If you want to keep any changes you ve made in the system settings you must save them in internal memory von When you perform the save procedure the data that previously occupied the save destination will be lost However the factory setting data can be recovered by performing the Initialization procedure 1 After you have edited the settings of the System function touch lt Write gt located in the lower right of the screen Initializing the System Settings Init The current settings of the system functions can be restored to a set of s
27. 127 00 10 0000 000a Mono Poly 0 1 I I I 63 463 MONO POLY 00 4D Oaaa aaaa Matrix Control 1 Dest 2 0 77 00 11 0000 000a Legato Switch 0 1 I OFF OFF ON I I I OSC1 PITCH OSC1 TIME PW OSCI FORMA FAT I 00 12 0000 000a Portamento Switch 0 1 I I I OSC1 LVL OFF ON OSC1 PENV ATK OSCI PENV DCY OSCI PENV REL 00 13 0000 000a Portamento Mode 0 1 I I l OSC1 TENV ATK OSCI TENV DCY OSCI TENV REL I NORMAL LEGATO OSCI FENV ATK OSCI FENV DCY OSCI FENV REL 00 14 0000 000a Portamento Type 0 1 l l OSCI AENV ATK OSCI AENV DCY OSCI AENV REL RATE TIME OSC1 LFO RATE OSCI LFO PCH OSCI LFO IM PW I 00 15 Oaaa aaaa Portamento Time 0 127 I I OSC1 LFO FR FT OSCI LFO LVL 00 16 Oaaa aaaa Portamento Time Velocity Sens l 127 1 OSC2 PITCH OSC2 TIME PW OSC2 FORMA FAT 63 63 I I I OSC2 LVL 14 00 17 0000 aaaa I OSC2 PENV ATK OSC2 PENV DCY OSC2 PENV REL I 0000 bbbb I OSC2 TENV ATK OSC2 TENV DCY OSC2 TENV REL 0000 cccc I OSC2 FENV ATK OSC2 FENV DCY OSC2 FENV REL I 0000 dddd Patch Tempo 200 2500 160 OSC2 AENV ATK OSC2 LFO RATE CSM1 ENV1 ATK CSMI1 ENV2 ATK CSM1 LFO RATE CSM2 ENV1 ATK CSM2 ENV2 ATK CSM2 LFO RATE OSC2 AENV DCY OSC2 AENV REL OSC2 LFO PCH OSC2 LFO IM PW OSC2 LFO
28. 7 Check whether Roland V Synth with an or symbol is displayed below Other Devices Sound Video and Game Controllers or Universal Serial Bus Controller If you find any such indication select it and click Delete 8 Adialog box will ask you to confirm deletion of the device Verify the contents of the dialog box and then click OK In the same way delete all occurrences of Roland V Synth that have an or symbol 9 Check whether Composite USB Device USB Device or USB Composite Device with an or symbol is displayed below Other Devices Sound Video and Game Controllers or Universal Serial Bus Controller If you find any such indication you need to determine whether it has appeared because the V Synth has been detected incorrectly or because there is a problem with some other device To determine this switch off the power of the V Synth If the Composite USB Device or other indication disappears when you turn off the power of the V Synth then it is the V Synth that has been incorrectly detected Return to step 2 and continue the procedure and when you reach step 8 delete the information that was detected incorrectly If the indication does not disappear when you turn off the power of the V Synth then this indication refers to a different device Do not delete it Composite USB Device USB Device or USB Compatible Device may some
29. LEVEL and the early portion of the sample is being lost you can use this setting to include the early portion Value 0 1000 msec Pre Gain Adjusts the input gain This will apply to the sound that is received from all input jacks It will also be applied to the sound being resampled With positive values the gain will be higher than originally and with negative values the gain will be lower than originally Value 12 36 dB Pre Effect Settings SAMPLING Pre Effect SAMPLING Pre Effect v SSS REMAIN TIME 22 8 Sec ase Ped Mec poete 60 a Temp Pre Metro There are three pre effects compressor limiter and noise suppressor By using these you can adjust the level of the sound being sampled Compressor By reducing high levels and raising low levels this effect smoothes out unevenness in volume Limiter By compressing sounds that exceed a specified volume level this effect prevents the sound from distorting Noise suppressor This effect leaves the original sound untouched but mutes the noise that is heard during periods of silence Type Pre Effect Type Value OFF No pre effect will be used COMP NS Compressor and noise suppressor settings can be made LMT NS Limiter and noise suppressor settings can be made NS Noise suppressor settings can be made E Compressor Sustain Specifies the time over which a low level sign
30. OGeneral Purpose Controller 2 LSB Controller number 49 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 31H vvH 0H FH ch 1 16 00H 7FH 0 127 n MIDI channel number vv Control value OGeneral Purpose Controller 3 LSB Controller number 50 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 32H vvH 0H FH ch 1 16 00H 7FH 0 127 n MIDI channel number vv Control value OGeneral Purpose Controller 4 LSB Controller number 51 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 33H vvH OH FH ch 1 16 00H 7FH 0 127 n MIDI channel number vv Control value OHold 1 Controller number 64 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 40H vvH OH FH ch 1 16 00H 7FH 0 127 0 63 OFF 64 127 ON n MIDI channel number vv Control value OGeneral Purpose Controller 5 Controller number 80 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 50H vvH 0H FH ch 1 16 00H 7FH 0 127 n MIDI channel number vv Control value OGeneral Purpose Controller 6 Controller number 81 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 51H vvH OH FH ch 1 16 00H 7FH 0 127 n MIDI channel number vv Control value OGeneral Purpose Controller 7 Controller number 82 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 52H vvH 0H FH ch 1 16 00H 7FH 0 127 n MIDI channel number vv Control value OGeneral Purpose Controller 8 Controller number 83 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 53H vvH n MIDI channel number 0H FH ch 1 16 vv Control v
31. 20000 20000 0000 bbbb I ES 00 6C 0000 aaaa I 0000 cccc I I 0000 bbbb I 0000 dddd Reverb Parameter 4 12768 52768 I 0000 cccc I I I I 20000 20000 I 0000 dddd MEX Parameter 27 12768 52768 E 00 12 0000 aaaa I I I 20000 20000 0000 bbbb I ES 00 70 0000 aaaa I I 0000 cccc I I 0000 bbbb I I 0000 dddd Reverb Parameter 5 12768 52768 I 0000 cccc I I I I 20000 20000 0000 dddd MEX Parameter 28 12768 52768 E 00 16 0000 aaaa I I I 20000 20000 0000 bbbb I ES 00 74 0000 aaaa I I 0000 cccc I I 0000 bbbb I I 0000 dddd Reverb Parameter 6 12768 52768 I 0000 cccc I I I I 20000 20000 0000 dddd MFX Parameter 29 12768 52768 E 00 1A 0000 aaaa I I I 20000 20000 0000 bbbb I ES 00 78 0000 aaaa I I 0000 cccc I I 0000 bbbb I 0000 dddd Reverb Parameter 7 12768 52768 I 0000 cccc I I I I 20000 20000 l 0000 dddd MFX Parameter 30 12768 52768 1 00 1E 0000 aaaa l I I 20000 20000 0000 bbbb I ES 00 7C 0000 aaaa I I 0000 cccc I I 0000 bbbb I 0000 dddd Reverb Parameter 8 12768 52768 I 0000 cccc I I I I 20000 20000 I 0000 dddd MFX Parameter 31 12768 52768 E 00 22 0000 aaaa 20000 20000 0000 bbbb ES 01 0
32. 20000 20000 I 0000 bbbb I ES 00 40 0000 aaaa I I 0000 cccc I I 0000 bbbb I 0000 dddd Chorus Parameter 8 12768 52768 0000 cccc I I I I 20000 20000 0000 dddd MFX Parameter 16 12768 52768 El 00 23 0000 aaaa I I I I 20000 20000 I 0000 bbbb I ES 00 44 0000 aaaa I I 0000 cccc I I 0000 bbbb I I 0000 dddd Chorus Parameter 9 12768 52768 I 0000 cccc I I I 20000 20000 0000 dddd MFX Parameter 17 12768 52768 IE 00 27 0000 aaaa I I I 20000 20000 I 0000 bbbb I ES 00 48 0000 aaaa I I 0000 cccc I 0000 bbbb I I 0000 dddd Chorus Parameter 10 12768 52768 I 0000 cccc I I I I 20000 20000 I 0000 dddd MFX Parameter 18 12768 52768 IE 00 2B 0000 aaaa I I I I 20000 20000 I 0000 bbbb I ES 00 4C 0000 aaaa I I 0000 cccc I 0000 bbbb I 0000 dddd Chorus Parameter 11 12768 52768 I 0000 cccc I I I I 20000 20000 0000 dddd MFX Parameter 19 12768 52768 IE 00 2F 0000 aaaa I I I 20000 20000 I 0000 bbbb I ES 00 50 0000 aaaa I I 0000 cccc I 0000 bbbb I 0000 dddd Chorus Parameter 12 12768 52768 0000 cece I 20000 20000 I 0000 dddd MFX Parameter 20 12768 52768 I I 20000 20000 00 00 00 33 Total Size I E 00 5
33. ADSR Attack Envelope Attack Time x Specifies the attack time of the envelope the time from when you press a key until the envelope level reaches the maximum value Value 0 127 Note ADSR Decay Envelope Decay Time x Specifies the decay time of the envelope the time from when the envelope level reaches the maximum value until it falls to a constant value Value 0 127 Note ADSR Sustain Envelope Sustain Level x Specifies the sustain level of the envelope the level at which the envelope remains constant Value 0 127 ADSR Release Envelope Release Time x Specifies the release time of the envelope the time from when you release a key until the envelope level reaches 0 Value 0 127 Note MEMO ENVELOPE in the lower right of the screen shows a graphical representation of the envelope produced by the current settings Env Depth Envelope Depth Specifies the depth of the envelope Higher settings will cause the envelope to produce greater change Negative settings will invert the shape of the envelope Value 63 63 Env Time KF Envelope Time Key Follow Make this setting when you want the decay time and subsequent times of the envelope to be affected by the location of the key you play Based on the envelope times for the C4 key center C positive settings will cause notes higher than C4 to have increasingly shorter times and negative settings will cause them to have increasing
34. F When you press 0K the region of the sample f between Edit Start and Edit End will be cut cuT MEMO Some editing functions require you to input a numerical value For details refer to the following explanations of each editing function 5 Touch lt OK gt to execute the editing function If you want to cancel without executing touch lt Cancel gt By touching Undo in the pulldown menu you can return to the state prior to executing the operation Undo Depending on the type of edit function you execute or on the state of the work area there may be cases in which the Undo function cannot be executed In such cases you will not be able to select lt Undo gt 6 If you want to save the edited result perform the Save operation p 72 Creating and Editing Samples Sample Mode Sample Editing Functions Truncate Copy Clear Paste Insert Zero Insert LRE Hix Trim Normalize Reverse Cut The region of the sample between Edit Start and Edit End will be cut Truncate The region of the sample between Edit Start and Edit End will be kept and the remainder of the sample will be deleted Copy The sample between Edit Start and Edit End will be copied Clear The sample between Edit Start and Edit End will be set to values of zero Paste The copied data will be overwritten beginning at the current location ore If there is any sample data f
35. Here you can use the following functions Touch the appropriate button to execute Prevw Preview audition the selected file w00 wav aif Info View information for the selected file Mark All Mark all files folders in the file list Mark Mark the selected file folder in the file list Open Open the selected folder Close Move to the next higher folder Touch lt OK gt A WARNING window like the following appears DELETE FILE FOLDER This Will Clear the Filets Folder s Rre You Sure CANCEL EXECUTE If you want to cancel the procedure at this point touch lt CANCEL gt 7 Touch lt EXECUTE gt to execute the operation Disk Related Functions Disk Mode Renaming a Files Folders Rename 1 Access the DISK UTILITY MENU screen p 83 2 Touch lt Tools gt The Disk Tools screen appears er 166 7MB Free W intnternal pr jx 3 Touch lt Rename gt 4 If you want to rename a file or folder in internal memory touch lt Int gt If you want to rename a file or folder in a PC card touch lt Card gt 5 In the file list select the file or folder that you want to rename Here you can use the following functions Touch the appropriate button to execute Prevw Preview audition the selected file w00 wav aif Info View information for the selected file Open Open the selected folder Close Move to the next higher fold
36. If you return to the PATCH PLAY screen without saving the display will indicate EDITED reminding you that the patch settings have been modified ote If you turn off the power or select a different patch while the display indicates EDITED your edited patch will be lost Initializing Patch Settings PATCH Init Tnitialize means to return the settings of the currently selected patch to a standard set of values nore The Initialize operation will affect only the currently selected patch in temporary area the patches that are stored in internal memory and work area will not be affected If you wish to restore all of the V Synth s settings to their factory values perform a Factory Reset p 98 1 Access the PATCH PLAY screen and select the patch that you wish to initialize p 21 2 Touch V in the upper right of the screen A pulldown menu appears Madorchestra 2 01 DataTransfer Info PATCH Name PATCH Write PATCH Init PATCH Copy PRTCH Delete oos soon TUR Erect 3 In the pulldown menu touch lt PATCH Init gt A window like the following appears INITIRLIZE PRTCH Rre You Sure CANCEL EXECUTE 4 Touch lt EXECUTE gt The initialization will be carried out and you ll be returned to the Patch Edit screen Copying Patch Settings PATCH Copy This operation copies the settings of any desired patch to the Creatin
37. LevelKF LUILFODP Pan PanKF PanLFODp a e sof of 127 64 Im 0Sc1 0sc2 ES eos COSM2 E Editing a Value To edit a value you can use the VALUE dial INC DEC or drag on the touch screen ele HINT In each V Synth screen you can select a value using the cursor as described earlier and modify its value woe Each parameter has its own range of possible values You cannot set any value smaller than the minimum value or greater than the maximum value VALUE Dial Turning the VALUE dial clockwise increases the value and turning it counterclockwise decreases its value Hold down SHIFT as you move the VALUE dial to increase value increments to make large value changes more quickly VALUE INC and DEC Press INC to increase the selected value and DEC to decrease it Keep the button pressed for continuous adjustment For faster value increases keep INC pressed down and press DEC To decrease values quickly keep DEC pressed down and press INC DEC INC O Touch Screen Touch a parameter value and drag your finger up down or left right Dragging upward or to the right increases the value and dragging downward or to the left decreases the value J PATCH Edit 7 Edit Y Madorchestra tz 011 2 011 E Sauter ERU ES KF d LFODp Pan PankF Pan pu Dp o e m osti 0sc2 i ose
38. The lower byte IIH of Master Volume will be handled as 00H The Master Level parameter SYSTEM Com Master will change OMaster Fine Tuning Status Data byte Status FOH 7FH 7FH 04H 03H 11H mmH F7H Byte Explanation FOH Exclusive status 7FH ID number universal realtime message 7FH Device ID Broadcast 04H Sub ID 1 Device Control 03H Sub ID 2 Master Fine Tuning 1H Master Fine Tuning LSB mmH Master Fine Tuning MSB F7H EOX End Of Exclusive mm ll 00 00H 40 00H 7F 7FH 100 0 99 9 cents The Master Tune parameter SYSTEM Com Master will change OMaster Coarse Tuning Status Data byte Status FOH 7FH 7FH 04H 04H 11H mmH F7 Byte Explanation FOH Exclusive status 7FH ID number universal realtime message 7FH Device ID Broadcast 04H Sub ID 1 Device Control 04H Sub ID 2 Master Coarse Tuning 1H Master Coarse Tuning LSB mmH Master Coarse Tuning MSB F7H EOX End Of Exclusive 1H ignored processed as 00H mmH 28H 40H 58H 24 0 24 semitones The Master Key Shift parameter SYSTEM Com Master will change 155 MEN Appendices MIDI Implementation Global Parameter Control OScale Octave Tuning Adjust Status Data byte Status FOH 7EH 7FH 08H 08H ffH ggH hhH ssH F7 Byte Explanation FOH Exclusive status 7EH ID number Universal Non realtime Message 7FH Device ID Broadcast 08H Sub ID 1 MIDI Tuning Standard 08H Sub ID 2 scale oc
39. V Synth Controller Section Video Generator Sound Generator V LINK PAYS isa function that provides for the play of music and visual material By using V LINK function visual effects can be easily linked to and made part of the expressive elements of a performance Playing in Patch Mode Example Connections Edirol DV 7PR Projector 0000000 0000 REMOTE fj Edirol UM 1 Display V Synth s m III Enter V LINK Mode 1 Press V LINK so the indicator lights A PATCH PLAY screen like the one shown below appears and the V Synth will enter V LINK mode V Synth PATCH PLAY Madorchestra LZ 811 v Ch TX RX7 Rx 1 4 12e e Trans c 00t 0 Zonelo1 s MadOrchestra Chi Tx 16 7r mmT TriP E off OT Bar Bender Mod orf wl lt Speed mm osti osc2 MoD E soon TVA Erect In this screen you can view the V LINK functions that are assigned to the various controllers u For details on how to assign V LINK functions to the controllers refer to V LINK Settings V LINK p 80 2 To exit V LINK mode press V LINK once again so the indicator goes out V LINK Function
40. eene en nennen nnne nennen 98 Adjusting the Sensitivity of the Touch Screen Time Trip Pad D Beam Controller Calibration Mode san is eee eden b e A eal eda 99 Adjusting the Sensitivity of the Touch Screen sss 99 Adjusting the Sensitivity of the Time Trip Pad u 100 Adjusting the Sensitivity of the D Beam Controller sss 100 Appendices LOL Parameter List uuu an ras eui ek kV d adea an CE DD aaa pani 102 poetataq aes eaten HOHER RUN EUER Ais AEE MSS 102 System Parameters scs aite ae aede ere i ese ote de ate lt ee Pee e e etie a 108 Mec Rr n 111 COSM Parameters iet ote onto etti doe inet de ober hes dei ov ee ce bt pest Saeed eee be eerie 111 Effects Lista eie aa uu A ta en ni ERAS cU EE 116 MEX Param tels uqu depen eei diste e arde peii b DOE ee au PR ORI IRL EI ep dh a ta 116 Chorus Parameters n tee ue ER oA E rne et Save donee Sone Sea eee 138 Reverb Parameters oen eoi Oa OR eon tede 138 TROUBIESNOOUING isien it Enea Lco alo eu codo 145 Problems Related to the V Synthu u ayah aa E ea eieaa e aT ERTEKE aS Eaei 145 Problems Related to the USB Driver Windows eese netten nenne 146 Problems Related to the USB Driver Macintosh eese 148 MESSI Listu dI cc 149 A A A ee Re e ege pe o ero ene gente dte 149 WARNING SCr etiS uiii or q
41. will automatically be played as an arpeggio 1 Access the PATCH PLAY screen p 21 2 Press ARPEGGIO ON OFF to make the indicator light The arpeggiator is turned on 3 Play the keyboard The V Synth arpeggiates what you ve played 4 To adjust the tempo of the arpeggio turn ARPEGGIO TEMPO Turning the knob toward the right will speed up the tempo and turning it toward the left will slow down the tempo 5 To finish playing arpeggios press ARPEGGIO ON OFF again so the indicator turns off Holding an Arpeggio By using the following procedure you can produce arpeggios even without continuing to press the keyboard 1 Press ARPEGGIO ON OFF to turn the Arpeggiator on Press ARPEGGIO HOLD to make the indicator light 2 3 Play the keyboard 4 If you play a different chord or notes while the arpeggio is being held the arpeggio will change accordingly 5 To cancel Arpeggio Hold press ARPEGGIO HOLD again When Using a Hold Pedal If you play an arpeggio while pressing the hold pedal the arpeggio will continue to be played even if you release the keyboard 1 Connect an optional pedal switch DP series to the HOLD PEDAL jack N 3 Play the keyboard while pressing the hold pedal gt you play the next chord Press ARPEGGIO ON OFF to turn the Arpeggiator on To play another chord release the pedal press it again as Using an External MIDI Keyboard to Play Arpeggi
42. 001 001 128 129 256 002 001 128 257 384 003 001 128 385 512 OPortamento Time Controller number 5 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 05H vvH n MIDI channel number 0H FH ch 1 16 vv Portamento Time 00H 7FH 0 127 OData Entry Controller number 6 38 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 06H mmH BnH 26H 11H n MIDI channel number 0H FH ch 1 16 mm ll the value of the parameter specified by RPN NRPN mm MSB ll LSB OVolume Controller number 7 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 07H vvH n MIDI channel number 0H FH ch 1 16 vv Volume 00H 7FH 0 127 Model V Synth Date Nov 20 2002 Version 1 00 OPanpot Controller number 10 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 0AH vvH 0H FH ch 1 16 00H 40H 7FH Left Center Right n MIDI channel number vv Panpot OExpression Controller number 11 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH OBH vvH n MIDI channel number 0H FH ch 1 16 vv Expression 00H 7FH 0 127 OHold 1 Controller number 64 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 40H vvH OH FH ch 1 16 00H 7FH 0 127 0 63 OFF 64 127 ON n MIDI channel number vv Control value OPortamento Controller number 65 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 41H vvH n MIDI channel number 0H FH ch 1 16 vv Control value 00H 7FH 0 127 0 63 OFF 64 127 ON OSostenuto Controller number 66 Status 2nd byte 3rd b
43. 127 I 0000 bbbb Env 12 Decay Time 0 144 I 00 27 0000 000a LFO 5 Key Sync 0 1 0 127 MUSICAL NOTES OFF ON I 01 13 Oaaa aaaa Env 12 Sustine 0 127 i I 4 01 14 0000 aaaa I 00 00 00 28 Total Size I I 0000 bbbb Env 12 Release Time 0 144 0 127 MUSICAL NOTES 2 01 16 0000 0aaa Env 12 Velocity Curve PS o D io i osi 01 17 0aaa aaaa Env 12 Velocity Sens d 129 SOS I 01 18 Oaaa aaaa Env 12 Attack Velocity Sens 127 LFO 4 COMS2 l l 63 63 LFO 5 TVA 01 19 0aaa aaaa Env 12 Decay Velocity Sens 1 127 kausa I I I 63 63 I 01 1A Oaaa aaaa Env 12 Release Velocity Sens 1 127 OPatch COSM I I I 63 63 l 01 1B OOaa aaaa Env 12 Time Keyfollow 44 84 b M I I I 200 200 Offset I Address Description I 4 01 1C 0000 aaaa I I K 0000 bbbb Env 13 Attack Time 0 144 00 00 0000 000a COSM Switch 0 1 l l l 0 127 MUSICAL NOTES BYPASS ON 14 01 1E 0000 aaaa I 00 01 0000 aaaa COSM Type 0 15 I 0000 bbbb Env 13 Decay Time 0 144 l l 0 127 MUSICAL NOTES zl I 01 20 Oaaa aaaa Env 13 Sustine 0 127 14 lol E 01 21 0000 aaaa I 0000 bbbb 0000 bbbb Env 13 Release Time 0 144 0000 cccc I 0 127 MUSICAL NOTES I 0000
44. For details on envelope settings refer to Making Envelope Settings p 48 LFO For details on LFO settings refer to Making LFO Settings p 49 112 COSM List 2nd order SideBandFilter By boosting the fundamental and overtones you can apply a pitch to unpitched input sounds such as noise or a drum phrase This lets you create a stronger effect than the first order sideband filter come Comb Filter An A comb filter can be used to boost or cut the fundamental or overtones Parameter Value Description COSM Type Octave 2 1 0 41 2 Octave setting Tone Tone 1 0 127 Tonal character Tone LFO Depth 63 63 Amount of LFO applied to 3 tone For details on envelope settings refer to Making Envelope Settings p 48 Detune Detune 2 0 127 Detune Detune LFO 63 63 Amount of LFO applied to Depth 4 detune For details on envelope settings refer to Making Envelope Settings p 48 LFO Parameter Value Description COSM Type Q 0 127 Frequency bandwidth LPF 0 127 Cutoff frequency of the low pass filter LPF KF 200 200 Key follow setting for cut off frequency of low pass filter Octave 2 1 0 Octave setting Width Width 1 0 127 Bandwidth Width KF 200 200 Key follow setting for bandwidth Dyn Env 63 63 Envelope depth for the in put sound
45. LFO DP1 LFO DP2 LFO DP3 These knobs adjust the depth of the LFO that is applied to the parameters of the knobs located above each knob LFO RATE This modifies the LFO rate LEVEL This modifies the volume E CosM1 COSM2 Here you can adjust the COSM sections These knobs are active when COSM is on indicator lit The result of adjusting these knobs will depend on the COSM type that is selected WIDTH CUTOFF P1 WIDTH Adjusts the width when SBF Side Band Filter is selected CUTOFF Adjusts the cutoff frequency when TVF is selected P1 Adjusts the parameter specified for the type when other types are selected DETUN EJ RESO Y P2 DETUNE Adjusts the detune when SBF Side Band Filter is selected RESO Adjusts the resonance when TVF is selected P2 Adjusts the parameter specified for the type when other types are selected TVA Here you can adjust the TVA section These sliders are active when the TVA is on indicator lit A This modifies the Attack Time D This modifies the Decay Time S This modifies the Sustain Level R This modifies the Release Time MEMO You can also use these sliders to make envelope settings in the envelope setting screens of other sections Pitch Bend Modulation Lever This allows you to control pitch bend or apply vibrato gt Quick Start p 17 Panel Descriptions Rear Panel POWER AC
46. Mode ST 2 mono stereo MONO Output is monaural ST 1 Chorus sound of the pitch vibration which phase is invert ed between left and right is mixed with the source sound This is a broader chorus with a weaker feeling of placement ST 2 The left output contains the source sound and the right side has the wavering chorus sound 17 Digital Chorus This is a stereo chorus or flanger Equalizers are provided before Pre and after Post the chorus or flanger Chorus Flanger Parameter Value Description Mode CHORUS Selects either chorus or flanger FLANGER Rate 1 0 05 10 0 Hz Sets the cycle for the chorus or note flanger sound undulations Depth 0 127 Adjusts the depth of modulation for the chorus or flanger Phase 0 180 deg Specifies the spaciousness of the chorus or flanger sound Pre Low Freq 50 4000 Hz Frequency of the low range Pre Pre Low Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the low range Pre Pre Hi Freq 2000 20000 Hz Frequency of the high range Pre Pre Hi Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the high range Pre Pre Dly Time 0 50 0 ms Adjusts the delay time from the direct sound until the chorus or flanger sound is heard Feedback 98 98 Adjusts the proportion of the chorus or flanger sound that is fed back into the effect Negative settings will invert the phase Xover LowFreq 50 4000 Hz Attenuates the effect in the range below the specified fre
47. Once the parameter number has been specified for RPN or NRPN all Data Entry messages transmitted on that same channel will be valid so after the desired value has been transmitted it is a good idea to set the parameter number to 7F 7FH to prevent accidents This is the reason for the B3 64 7F B3 65 7F at the end It is not desirable for performance data such as Standard MIDI File data to contain many events with running status as given in lt Example 4 gt This is because if playback is halted during the song and then rewound or fast forwarded the sequencer may not be able to transmit the correct status and the sound generator will then misinterpret the data Take care to give each event its own status It is also necessary that the RPN or NRPN parameter number setting and the value setting be done in the proper order On some sequencers events occurring in the same or consecutive clock may be transmitted in an order different than the order in which they were received For this reason it is a good idea to slightly skew the time of each event about 1 tick for TPQN 96 and about 5 ticks for TPQN 480 TPQN Ticks Per Quarter Note MIDI Implementation MExample of an Exclusive Message and Calculating a Checksum Roland Exclusive messages RQ1 DT1 are transmitted with a checksum at the end before F7 to make sure that the message was correctly received The value of the checksum is determined by the address and data or
48. Ps Hi Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the high range 20 Analog Flanger This effect reproduces the sound of Roland s SBF 325 analog flanger You can get three different types of flanger sounds adding a metallic swelling sound to the source sound and chorus like effect Analog Flanger Parameter Value Description Mode FL1 FL2 FL3 CHO Sets the effect type FL1 A general monaural flanger FL2 A stereo flanger that utiliz es the stereo placement of the source sound FL3 A cross mix flanger that providing a more intense effect CHO Chorus effect Rate 1 0 02 5 00 Hz note Sets the rate of the swelling of the flanger sound Depth 2 0 127 Specifies the modulation depth of the flanger sound Manual 0 127 Adjusts the center frequency to which the flanger effect is ap plied Feedback 3 0 127 Sets the intensity of the flanger s effect When the mode is set to CHO this setting will be ignored CH R Mod Phase NORM INV Sets the phase of the right chan nel This is usually set to Normal NORM Setting this to Invert INV inverts the phase of the modulation rise and fall in the right channel CH L Phase CH R Phase NORM INV Sets the phase of the left and right channels when the source sound is mixed with the flang ing sound NORM Positive phase INV negative phase 21 BOSS Flang
49. Specifies the volume of the oscillator Value 0 127 Level KF Level Key Follow Use this parameter if you want the volume of the oscillator to change according to the key that is pressed Relative to the volume at the C4 key center C positive settings will cause the volume to rise for notes higher than C4 and negative settings will cause the volume to fall for notes higher than C4 Larger settings will produce greater change Value 200 200 Level LFO Dp Level LFO Depth x Specifies how deeply the LFO will affect the volume of the oscillator Value 63 63 Ts In this screen you can make settings for the envelope that affects the sub TVA For details on envelope settings refer to Making Envelope Settings p 48 LFO PATCH Edit OSC1 LFO INIT PATCH 2 01 EX ed Key Sync OFF J Fade Em s orr f orr r common oso 0502 MoD ET cosm2 TUR m In this screen you can make settings for the LFO that affects the oscillator For details on LFO settings refer to Making LFO Settings p 49 45 EBENEN Creating a Patch Creating a Patch Mixing Modulating Two Sounds Mod Modulator Switch Switches the modulator on off Value OFF ON Mod Type PATCH Edit MOD Type INIT PATCH Z 011 Mop Mix Type aaa T T t mm osc SYNC TE FEA common osci oscz EZZ E TUR eee Modulator Type Selects the type of modula
50. quency Xover Low Gain 36 0 dB Specifies how greatly the low range will be attenuated Xover HiFreq 2000 20000 Hz Attenuates the effect in the range above the specified fre quency Xover Hi Gain 36 0 dB Specifies how greatly the high range will be attenuated Modulation 0 127 Volume of the chorus or flanger Level sound Ps Low Freq 50 4000 Hz Frequency of the low range Post Ps Low Gain 15 415 dB Gain of the low range Post Ps Hi Freq 2000 20000 Hz Frequency of the high range Post Ps Hi Gain 15 415 dB Gain of the high range Post 125 MEE Appendices 18 Space Chorus This effect reproduces the sound of Roland s SDD 320 spatial expression effects Greater breadth is added Parameter Value Description Mode 1 2 3 4 1 4 Selects the way in the chorus 244 3 4 will change The SDD 320 features four mode buttons for changing the effect This setting determines which buttons are to be pressed 1 4 represents the condition when Buttons 1 and 4 are pressed simultaneously Chorus Level 1 0 127 Volume level of the chorus sound Ps Low Freq 50 4000 Hz Frequency of the low range Ps Low Gain 15 415 dB Gain of the low range Ps Hi Freq 2000 20000 Hz Frequency of the high range Ps Hi Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the high range 19 Hexa Chorus Hexa chorus is a six stage chorus which adds depth and spaciousne
51. settings will invert the phase 3 5 Ba ss M ulti Mod XoverLPF 500 15000 Hz Adjusts the cutoff frequency of THRU the low pass filter THRU no Bass Multi provides Comp Limiter Overdrive or Distortion 3 band filter is used equalizer and Chorus or Flanger effects connected in series This Mod XoverHPF THRU 50 800 Adjusts the cutoff frequency of algorithm is a multi effects for bass Hz the high pass filter THRU no filter is used L Mod Level 0 127 Volume of the chorus or flanger Comp Limiter Overdrive Distortion i Chorus E 9 Flanger Y sound R Parameter Value Description Comp Sw OFF ON Turns the comp limiter on off Comp Thresh 60 0 dB Sets the volume level at which old 1 the compression begins Comp Attack 0 127 Sets the time after the sound vol ume is crossed the compressor threshold until compression be gins Comp Release 0 127 Specifies the time from when the volume drops below the com pressor threshold until com pression is no longer applied Comp Ratio 1 5 1 2 1 4 1 Sets the source sound output 100 1 sound compression ratio Comp Gain 60 12 dB Adjusts the output gain 134 36 Rhodes Multi Enhancer Phaser Chorus or Flanger and Tremolo or Auto pan are connected in series This effect is used for electric piano Tremolo Auto Pan
52. sound is heard Early Ref Level 0 99 Volume level of the initial ALTERNATE reflected sound note NLR Type L gt R NORMAL Method of output panning L R Shift 0 650 ms note Of the left and right delay LR LR Pan from the L chan sounds the delay time will be nel to the R channel increased for only one side NORMAL Output without If the L R order is LR the R panning sound will be later In the case of L amp R Pan from the R chan ROL the L sound will be later nel to the L channel When the mode is set to Env Time Ratio 10 120 The overall time will be ex MONO or ALTERNATE this panded or contracted while setting will be ignored preserving the time ratios L R Order L gt R ROL In STEREO or ALTERNATE of the various envelope mode this setting determines times which of the left or right sides Envelope T1 T4 0 1 1000 ms Time until each point T1 has the delay sound before the T4 is reached other Envelope L1 L3 0 100 Output level for each point LR The left side is expressed L1 L3 first If the total length of RL The right side is expressed Envelope times first T1 T2 T3 T4 exceeds In MONO mode this setting 1000 ms the sound of the will be ignored portion that extends Feedback 98 98 Adjusts the proportion of the de beyond this will be cut lay sound that is fed back into the effect Negative settings Level will invert the phase Low Damp Freq 50 4000 Hz Adjusts the frequency below which sound fed back to the
53. 00 4D Oaaa aaaa OSC 2 Fine Tune 14 114 I I 50 50 cent 00 4E 000a aaaa OSC 2 Random Pitch Depth 0 30 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 I I 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 I I 90 100 200 300 400 500 I I 600 700 800 900 1000 1100 I 1200 00 4F Oaaa aaaa OSC 2 Level 0 127 00 50 00aa aaaa OSC 2 Level Keyfollow 44 84 I I 200 200 00 51 Oaaa aaaa OSC 2 Level LFO Depth 1 127 I 63 63 00 52 0000 aaaa OSC 2 Analog Waveform 0 8 I I SAW SQUARE TRIANGLE SINE RAMP JUNO I I HQ SAW HQ SQUARE NOISE 00 53 00aa aaaa OSC 2 Impact 0 40 I I 0 0 4 0 00 54 Oaaa aaaa OSC 2 Pulse Width 1 127 I I 63 63 00 55 00aa aaaa OSC 2 Pulse Width Keyfollow 44 84 I I 200 200 00 56 Oaaa aaaa OSC 2 Pulse Width LFO Depth 1 127 I I 63 63 00 57 Oaaa aaaa OSC 2 Pulse Width Envelope Depth 1 127 I I 63 63 00 58 Oaaa aaaa OSC 2 Fat 0 127 00 59 O0aa aaaa OSC 2 Fat Keyfollow 44 84 I I 200 200 00 5A Oaaa aaaa OSC 2 Fat LFO Depth 1 127 I I 63 63 00 5B Oaaa aaaa OSC 2 Fat Envelope Depth 1 127 I I 63 63 00 5C 0000 aaaa 0000 bbbb 0000 ccce 0000 dddd OSC 2 Wave Number 0 999 I I OFF 1 999 00 60 0000 aaaa 0000 bbbb 0000 ccce MIDI Implementation
54. 0000 aaaa 0000 bbbb Step 30 Velocity 0 128 MIDI Implementation I I REST 1 127 TIE 00 3E 0000 aaaa 0000 bbbb Step 31 Velocity 0 128 I I REST 1 127 TIE 00 40 0000 aaaa 0000 bbbb Step 32 Velocity 0 128 l I REST 1 127 TIE 00 00 00 42 Total Size I 167 E Appendices MIDI Implementation 4 Supplementary Material Decimal and Hexadecimal Table An H is appended to the end of numbers in hexadecimal notation In MIDI documentation data values and addresses sizes of Exclusive messages etc are expressed as hexadecimal values for each 7 bits The following table shows how these correspond to decimal numbers D H D H D H D H 0 00H 32 20H 64 40H 96 60H T 01H 33 21H 65 41H 97 61H 2 02H 34 22H 66 42H 98 62H 3 03H 35 23H 67 43H 99 63H 4 04H 36 24H 68 44H 100 64H 5 05H 37 25H 69 45H 101 65H 6 06H 38 26H 70 46H 102 66H 7 07H 39 27H 71 47H 103 67H 8 08H 40 28H 72 48H 104 68H 9 09H 41 29H MES 49H 105 69H 10 OAH 42 2AH 74 4AH 106 6AH 11 OBH 43 2BH 15 4BH 107 6BH 12 OCH 44 2CH 76 4CH 108 6CH 13 ODH 45 2DH Tt 4DH 109 6DH 14 OEH 46 2EH 78 4EH 110 6EH 15 OFH 47 2FH 79 4FH 111 6FH 16 10H 48 30H 80 50H 112 70H 17 11H 49 31H 81 51H 113 71H 18 12H 50 32H 82 52H 114 72H 19 13H 51
55. 200 LFO Waveform LFO Waveform SIN TRI SAW SOR RND TRP S amp H CHAOS Offset LFO Offset 100 50 0 50 100 Key Sync LFO Key Sync Switch OFF ON Delay Time LFO Delay Time 0 127 Rate LFO Rate 0 127 note Fade Mode LFO Fade Mode ON lt lt ON gt gt OFF lt lt OFF gt gt Fade Time LFO Fade Time 0 127 Thirty second note Sixteenth note hy Eighth note triplet JA Dotted sixteenth note Eighth note J Quarter note triplet 2 Dotted eighth note J Quarter note Js Half note triplet J Dotted quarter note J Half note og Whole note triplet J Dotted half note Whole note eis Double note triplet Dotted whole note ar Double note 106 Effect Group p 50 Parameter List Parameter Value Routing MEX Send MEX Send Level 0 127 CHO Send Chorus Send Level 0 127 REV Send Reverb Send Level 0 127 Output Assign MULTI MAIN DIR MFX MFX On Off Switch OFF ON MFX Type 00 Thru 41 MFX Master Level 0 127 MFX To CHO MEX Chorus Send Level 0 127 MFX To REV MEX Reverb Send Level 0 127 CHO Chorus On Off Switch OFF ON CHO Type 00 Off 08 CHO Master Level Chorus Master Level 0 127 CHO To REV Chorus Reverb Send Level 0 127 REV Reverb On Off Switch OFF ON REV Type 00 Off 10 REV Master Level Reverb Master Level 0 127 MFX MFX Type 00 Thru 41 CHO
56. 7 I 00 2E 0000 Oaaa Env 4 Velocity Curve 0 7 ies ee I I I FIXED 1 7 n I 00 2F Oaaa aaaa Env 4 Velocity Sens lh 4277 d 99 3D Gane diag eee 10 velocity Sons _ ae pee I I I 63 63 I 00 30 Oaaa aaaa Env 4 Attack Velocity Sens A 127 00 78 den aaa Pv RO Attack Velocity nene E 12 I I I 63 63 E I 00 31 Oaaa aaaa Env 4 Decay Velocity Sens 1 127 SOUS Basan adam Boy 1 Decay Velocity Sene E ren I I I I 63 63 E E dasaveass d E alles Velddcity asas 229 1 I 01 00 Oaaa aaaa Env 10 Release Velocity Sens 127 165 RENEE Appendices MIDI Implementation I I I 63 63 I 00 16 0aaa aaaa LFO 3 Fade Time 0 127 I 01 01 OOaa aaaa Env 10 Time Keyfollow 44 84 I 00 17 0000 000a LFO 3 Key Sync 0 1 I I I 200 200 I I l OFF ON I I I I D 01 02 0000 aaaa I I 00 18 0000 Oaaa LFO 4 Waveform 0 7 0000 bbbb Env 11 Attack Time 0 144 l SIN TRI SAW SQR RND TRP 0 127 MUSICAL NOTES S amp H CHS D 01 04 0000 aaaa I 14 00 19 0000 aaaa I I 0000 bbbb Env 11 Decay Time 0 144 I 0000 bbbb LFO 4 Rate 0 144 0 127 MUSICAL NOTES 0 127 MUSICAL NOTES I 01 06 Oaaa aaaa Env 11 Sustine 0 127 I 00 1B 0000 Oaaa LFO 4 Offset 0 4 14 01 07 0
57. 7 Touch lt EXECUTE gt to execute the operation FORMAT All Data on the Disk Will Be Lost Are You Sure CANCEL EXECUTE If you want to cancel the procedure at this point touch lt CANCEL gt 6 Touch lt EXECUTE gt to execute the operation Disk Related Functions Disk Mode Functions Related to Files and Folders Tools You can manage files or folders by copying or moving them Copying Files Folders Copy 1 Access the DISK UTILITY MENU screen p 83 2 Touch lt Tools gt The Disk Tools screen appears 66 7MB Free 17 2items have Markanf Mark iy 3 Touch lt Copy gt 4 If you want to copy from internal memory touch lt lnt gt If you want to copy from a PC card touch lt Card gt 5 In the file list select the file or folder that you want to copy Here you can use the following functions Touch the appropriate button to execute Prevw Preview audition the selected file w00 wav aif Info View information for the selected file Mark All Mark all files folders in the file list Mark Mark the selected file folder in the file list Open Open the selected folder Close Move to the next higher folder 6 Touch lt OK gt The Disk Tools Copy Destination screen appears DISK Tools Copy Destination rr 11 1MBFree hd Internal Int lnternal pr jN select 1 item 7 If you want to copy to
58. 77 I I I OFF OSCI PITCH OSCI TIME PW OSC1 FORMA FAT OSCILVL OSC1 PENV ATK OSCI PENV DCY OSC1 PENV REL OSCI TENV ATK OSC1 TENV DCY OSC1 TENV REL OSC1I FENV ATK OSCI FENV DCY OSC1 FENV REL OSC1 AENV ATK OSC1 AENV DCY OSC1 AENV REL OSCI LFO RATE OSCI LFO PCH OSC1 LFO TM PW OSCI LFO FR FT OSCl LFO LVL OSC2 PITCH OSC2 TIME PW OSC2 FORMA FAT OSC2 LVL OSC2 PENV ATK OSC2 PENV DCY OSC2 PENV REL OSC2 TENV ATK OSC2 TENV DCY OSC2 TENV REL OSC2 FENV ATK OSC2 FENV DCY OSC2 FENV REL OSC2 AENV ATK OSC2 AENV DCY OSC2 AENV REL OSC2 LFO RATE OSC2 LFO PCH OSC2 LFO TM PW OSC2 LFO FR FT OSC2 LFO LVL CSM1 PRM1 CSM1 PRM2 CSM1 ENV1 ATK CSM1 ENV1 DCY CSM1 ENVI REL CSM1 ENV2 ATK CSM1 ENV2 DCY CSM1 ENV2 REL CSMI LFO RATE CSM1 LFO PRM1 CSM1 LFO PRM2 CSM2 PRM1 CSM2 PRM2 CSM2 ENV1 ATK CSM2 ENV1 DCY CSM2 ENV1 REL CSM2 ENV2 ATK CSM2 ENV2 DCY CSM2 ENV2 REL CSM2 LFO RATE CSM2 LFO PRM1 CSM2 LFO PRM2 TVA LVL TVA ENV ATK TVA ENV DCY TVA ENV REL TVA LFO RATE TVA LFO LVL TVA LFO PAN MFX SEND CHO SEND REV SEND MFX PRM1 MFX PRM2 MFX PRM3 I 00 65 Oaaa aaaa Matrix Control 6 Sens 1 1 127 I I 63 63 I 00 66 Oaaa aaaa Matrix Control 6
59. CHO SEND REV SEND MFX PRM1 MFX PRM2 MFX PRM3 I 00 6A Oaaa aaaa Matrix Control 7 Sens 1 1 429y I I I 63 63 l 00 6B Oaaa aaaa Matrix Control 7 Dest 2 0 77 OFF I I I OSCI TIME PW OSC1 FORMA FAT OSC1 PENV ATK OSCI TENV ATK OSC1 FENV ATK OSCI AENV ATK OSCI LFO RATE OSC2 PITCH OSC2 PENV ATK OSC2 TENV ATK OSC2 FENV ATK OSC2 AENV ATK OSC2 LFO RATE CSM1 ENV1 ATK CSM1 ENV2 ATK CSM1 LFO RATE CSM2 ENV1 ATK CSM2 ENV2 ATK CSM2 LFO RATE TVA ENV ATK TVA ENV DCY TVA LFO RATE OSCI LVL OSCI PENV REL OSCI TENV REL OSCI FENV REL OSCI AENV REL OSCI PENV DCY OSCI TENV DCY OSCI FENV DCY OSCI AENV DCY OSCI LFO PCH OSCI LFO TIM PW OSCI LFO FR FT OSCI LFO LVL OSC2 TIME PW OSC2 FORMA FAT OSC2 LVL OSC2 PENV REL OSC2 TENV REL OSC2 FENV REL OSC2 AENV REL OSC2 PENV DCY OSC2 TENV DCY OSC2 FENV DCY OSC2 AENV DCY OSC2 LFO PCH OSC2 LFO TIM PW OSC2 LFO FR FT OSC2 LFO LVL CSMI PRMl CSMI PRM2 CSM1 ENV1 DCY CSM1 ENVI REL CSMI ENV2 DCY CSM1 ENV2 REL CSMI LFO PRMl CSM1 LFO PRM2 CSM2 PRM1 CSM2 PRM2 CSM2 ENV1 DCY CSM2 ENVI REL CSM2 ENV2 DCY CSM2 ENV2 REL CSM2 LFO PRMl CSM2 LFO PRM2 TVA LVL TVA ENV REL TVA LFO LVL TVA LFO PAN ALL ss e is ee a a ke ss
60. Env 9 Velocity Sens d 127 I 00 22 Oaaa aaaa Env 3 Velocity Sens 127 y Bc I I I 63 63 I 00 23 Oaaa aaaa Env 3 Attack Velocity Sens 1 127 00 71 Qaaa aaaa Env 9 Attack Velocity Sens E 12m I l 63 63 E l 00 24 Oaaa aaaa Env 3 Decay Velocity Sens a 127 NA I Dag asas Bay Decay Velocity sens aS E 12 I 63 63 7 l 00 25 Oaaa aaaa Env 3 Release Velocity Sens 1 127 l 90 73 Qaaa aaaa I Env 9 Release Velocity Sens Att 12H I I I 63 463 I 00 26 OOaa aaaa Env 3 Time Keyfollow 44 84 I 00 74 00aa aaaa Env 9 Time Keyfollow 44 84 I 200 200 I I 200 4200 l l z it 00 75 0000 aaaa l4 00 27 0000 aaaa OSO EBSDS dv Rupa ok dine nay l I 0000 bbbb Env 10 Attack Time 0 144 0 127 MUSICAL NOTES 0 127 MUSICAL NOTES js 00 29 0000 aaaa 4 00 77 0000 aaaa l 0000 Dbbb ENVVA Decay PAS eats I 0000 bbbb Env 10 Decay Time 0 144 0 127 MUSICAL NOTES 0 127 MUSICAL NOTES I 00 79 Oaaa aaaa Env 10 Sustine 0 127 I 00 2B Oaaa aaaa Env 4 Sustine 0 127 H 00 2C 0000 aaaa i H 00 7A 0000 aaaa f 000 I EAA qa pasa TINS 4435 4 I 0000 bbbb Env 10 Release Time 0 144 0 127 MUSICAL NOTES 0 5 TE MUSICAL NOTES l 00 7C 0000 0aaa Env 10 Velocity Curve 0
61. Frequency of the high range Hi Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the high range Total Gain 15 15 dB Output Level 02 Graphic EQ Graphic Equalizer This simulates a 12 band stereo graphic equalizer 12 Band Graphic EQ Parameter Value Description 180Hz Gain 15 15 dB 250Hz Gain 355Hz Gain 500Hz Gain 710Hz Gain 1000Hz Gain 1400Hz Gain 2000Hz Gain 2800Hz Gain 4000Hz Gain 5600Hz Gain 8000Hz Gain Gain of each frequency band Total Gain 1 15 15 dB Output Level It allows for cyclical control of the cutoff frequency using an LFO It allows you to make drastic changes in the frequency response of the input signal by the cutoff frequency and feedback making the sound brighter or darker or giving it a distinctive character Resonant Filter Parameter Value Description Cutoff Freq 50 20000 Hz Basic frequency of the filter The LFO will control the cutoff frequency with this value as its maximum level Resonance 0 127 Filters resonance level Raising the setting increases res onance near the cutoff frequen cy producing a uniquely characteristic sound Band Mode LOW MID HIGH LOW MID MID HIGH ALL Frequency range to which the filter will be applied LOW low frequency band MID mid range frequency HIGH high frequency LOW MID low and middle rang
62. Lever Mod Local Sw V LINK Modulation Local Switch OFF ON Mod Assign V LINK Modulation Assign OFF PLAYBACK SPEED DISSOLVE TIME AUDIO LEVEL COLOR CB COLOR CR BRIGHTNESS VFX1 VFX2 VFX3 VFX4 OUT PUT FADE T BAR Bend Local Sw V LINK Pitch Bend Local Switch OFF ON Bend Assign V LINK Pitch Bend Assign OFF PLAYBACK SPEED DISSOLVE TIME AUDIO LEVEL COLOR CB COLOR CR BRIGHTNESS VFX1 VFX2 VFX3 VFX4 OUT PUT FADE T BAR After Local Sw V LINK Aftertouch Local Switch OFF ON After Assign V LINK Aftertouch Assign OFF PLAYBACK SPEED DISSOLVE TIME AUDIO LEVEL COLOR CB COLOR CR BRIGHTNESS VFX1 VFX2 VFX3 VFX4 OUT PUT FADE T BAR 110 COSM List COSM Parameters COSM provides 15 types This section explains the features of each COSM and the functions of the parameters iTS Explanations for each COSM Type are given on the following pages Overdrive Distortion OD DS p 111 Wave Shape W SHAPE p 111 Amp Simulator AMP p 112 Speaker Simulator SPEAKER p 112 Resonator RESONATOR p 112 1st order SideBandFilter SBF1 p 112 2nd order SideBandFilter SBF2 p 113 Comb Filter COMB p 113 Dual Filter DUAL p 113 TVF TVF p 114 Dynamic TVF DYN TVF p 114 Polyphonic Compressor COMP p 114 Polyphonic Limiter LIMITER p 115 Frequency Shifter F SHIFT p 115 Lo Fi Processor LO FI p 115 MEMO Parameters marked by 1 4 can be selected as a destination par
63. MET I 00 OF 0000 aaaa Part 2 Receive Channel 0 15 l 00 1F 00 Patch Oscillator Zone 16 l l DiS 1G I 4 00 10 0000 000a Part 3 Receive Switch 0 1 00 20 00 Patch Envelope Zone 1 l OFF ON I 00 22 00 Patch Envelope Zone 2 I 00 11 0000 aaaa Part 3 Receive Channel 0 15 MET I 1 16 I 00 3E 00 Patch Envelope Zone 16 00 12 0000 000a Part 4 Receive Switch 0 1 I I I OFF ON 00 40 00 Patch LFO Zone 1 I I 00 13 0000 aaaa Part 4 Receive Channel 0 15 00 41 00 Patch LFO Zone 2 l 1 16 I 3 I I 00 14 0000 000a Part 5 Receive Switch 0 1 00 4F 00 Patch LFO Zone 16 OFF ON I I I 00 15 0000 aaaa Part 5 Receive Channel 0 15 00 50 00 Patch COSM1 Zone 1 1 16 00 51 00 Patch COSM1 Zone 2 I 00 16 0000 000a Part 6 Receive Switch 0 1 I EMEN OFF ON I 00 5F 00 Patch COSM1 Zone 16 I 00 17 0000 aaaa Part 6 Receive Channel 0 15 I I 1 16 I 00 60 00 Patch COSM2 Zone 1 I 00 18 0000 000a Part 7 Receive Switch 0 1 00 61 00 Patch COSM2 Zone 2 OFF ON I se I 00 19 0000 aaaa Part 7 Receive Channel 0 15 l 00 6F 00 Patch COSM2 Zone 16 l I 1 16 I I 00 1A 0000 000a Part 8 Receive Switch 0 1 00 70 00 Patch Arpeggio Note 1 OFF ON 00 71 00 Patch Arpeggio Note 2 I 00 1B
64. MEX sound will not be output p 50 Oscillator Type has been to EXT IN but no sound is heard when audio is input through the INPUT jacks If the oscillator is set to external input EXT IN you will not hear sound unless you play the keyboard Try playing the keyboard No sound from connected MIDI device Is the instrument set to transmit MIDI messages Check the Patch Tx Ch parameter setting p 77 Does the MIDI transmit channel for the V Synth match the MIDI receive channel for the connected MIDI de vice Check the Patch Tx Ch parameter setting p 77 145 MEE Appendices Troubleshooting Problem Cause Action Exclusive messages are not received Is the instrument set to receive Exclusive messages Set the Rx Sys Ex parameter to ON p 76 Does the Device ID number of the transmitting device match the Device ID number of the V Synth Check the Device ID parameter setting p 75 Noise is heard while sampling During sampling the output frequency of the digital audio interface is fixed at 44 1 kHz regardless of the System mode setting Noise may be heard from con nected devices at this time This is not a malfunction Can t edit or encode a wave Could you have selected a preset wave The V Synth s factory loaded preset waves cannot be edited or encoded Select a sample that you ve sampled or imported Beep tone was turned of
65. Mono Poly Legato ep common osci 0sc2 MOD COSM1 cosm2 TVA Effect 4 In the Mono Poly field touch lt lt gt gt Now you can play in mono mode Creating Smooth Pitch Changes Porta mento Portamento is an effect which smoothly changes the pitch from the first played key to the next played key By applying portamento when Mono mode is selected see the preceding item you can simulate performance effects such as slurring on a violin 1 Access the PATCH Edit Com General screen p 21 PATCH Edit Com General MadOrchestra 2 01 b E fen peer Por tamento s AL v i Mode Type Gal OFF Normal Un RATE p TEM ST m PEs J Mono Poly Legato Time Time Velo Sens os AB 2 a EJ commen osct IE Moo eos E TUR Erect 2 In the Portamento field touch the on off switch to turn it ON You re ready to play portamento 3 When you want to change the portamento setting edit the following parameters in the screen of step 2 Mode Portamento Mode Type Portamento Type Time Portamento Time Time Velo Sens Portamento Time Velocity Sens D See p 37 for each parameter s functions 23 Patch Mode ing in uw Play Playing in Patch Mode Playing Arpeggios Arpeggiator The V Synth comes with an arpeggiator that can play arpeggios automatically Once you turn on the arpeggiator the keys you press
66. OSC2 PITCH OSC2 PENV ATK OSC2 TENV ATK OSC2 FENV ATK OSC2 AENV ATK OSC2 LFO RATE CSM1 ENV1 ATK CSM1 ENV2 ATK CSM1 LFO RATE CSM2 ENV1 ATK CSM2 ENV2 ATK CSM2 LFO RATE TVA ENV ATK TVA ENV DCY TVA LFO RATE OSCI AENV DCY OSC1 AENV REL OSCI LFO PCH OSCI LFO IM PW OSCI LFO FR FT OSCI LFO LVL OSC2 TIME PW OSC2 FORMA FAT OSC2 LVL OSC2 PENV REL OSC2 TENV REL OSC2 FENV REL OSC2 AENV REL OSC2 PENV DCY OSC2 TENV DCY OSC2 FENV DCY OSC2 AENV DCY OSC2 LFO PCH OSC2 LFO TIM PW OSC2 LFO FR FT OSC2 LFO LVL CSMI PRM1 CSM1 PRM2 CSM1 ENV1 DCY CSM1 ENVI REL CSMI ENV2 DCY CSM1 ENV2 REL CSMI LFO PRMl CSM1 LFO PRM2 CSM2 PRM1 CSM2 PRM2 CSM2 ENV1 DCY CSM2 ENVI REL CSM2 ENV2 DCY CSM2 ENV2 REL CSM2 LFO PRMl CSM2 LFO PRM2 TVA LVL TVA ENV REL TVA LFO LVL TVA LFO PAN OSCI PITCH I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I MFX SEND CHO SEND REV SEND I I I MFX PRM1 MFX PRM2 MFX PRM3 I 00 62 Oaaa aaaa Matrix Control 5 Sens 2 1 127 I I I 63 63 I 00 63 Oaaa aaaa Matrix Control 6 Source 0 108 I I OFF CC01 CC31 CC33 CC95 BEND AFT I I I PAD X PAD Y PAD X PAD Y TRIP R I I I BEAM L BEAM R KNOB1 KNOB2 VELO KEYF I 00 64 Oaaa aaaa Matrix Control 6 Dest 1 0
67. Sampling Import y gt DO2 958 VOXSWP E 003 114 SuncSuP 004 157 PGSweer 005 120 vox Sea Creating and Editing Samples Sample Mode 3 Select the location sample number that you wish to sample Move the cursor to the desired sample Normally you will select a sample that has no wave i e a sample number whose name is NO SAMPLE In this screen you can use the following functions Select a sample by directly touching it Change the number in steps of eight by pressing lt q Change the number in steps of one by touching lt A gt lt W gt located beside the sample list by pressing A y INC DEC or by turning the VALUE dial Scroll the sample list by dragging the scroll bar located beside the sample list up or down Move to the number 001 sample by touching Top Move to the number 999 sample by touching End Display information on the currently selected sample by touching Info p 63 However this information will not be displayed for the factory set waves Audition the currently selected sample by touching lt Prevw gt When you touch Search Empty you will jump to the NO SAMPLE sample number that follows the current sample number 4 Touch lt Sampling gt The SAMPLING Template screen appears SAMPLING Template v REMAIN TIME TMPL TMPL TMPL TMPL 22 9560 nic Line Optical Resampl
68. Viewing Various Information Info 1 In the upper right of the screen touch lt W gt A pulldown menu appears MadOrchestra CZ 011 DataTransfer Info PATCH Name PATCH Write PATCH Init PATCH Copy PATCH Delete 2 In the pulldown menu touch lt Info gt The PATCH Information window appears MadOrchestra Z 011 Version 1 14 Parti EEN madorchestra parts 001 Madorchestra Part2 001 MadOrchestra Partie 2091 MadOrchestra Part3 001 MadOrchestra Partii 001 MadOrchestra Part4 001 Madorchestra Part 2 001 Madorchestra Parts 801 MadOrchestra Partis o01 MadOrchestra Parte 001 MadOrchestra Parti4 001 MadOrchestra Part 001 MadOrchestra Partis 001 Madorchestra Parts 001 MadOrchestra Partt Madorchestra This window shows the following information Version The V Synth s program version Part The number and name of the patch assigned to each part 3 When you have finished viewing the information touch lt OK gt to close the window Other Functions Adjusting the Sensitivity of the Touch Screen Time Trip Pad D Beam Controller Calibration Mode Displaying the CALIBRATION MENU Screen 1 Press MODE The V SYNTH MODE MENU window appears STNTH MODE MENU 2 Touch lt CALIBRATION gt The CALIBRATION MENU screen appears CALIBRATION MENU D BEAM seh TOUCH Adjusting the Sensitivity of the T
69. fs Key Sync Delay Bat m OFF O 2 Fade gt 5 orr for r For some COSM selections that you choose in COSM Type you can make LFO settings For details on LFO settings refer to Making LFO Settings p 49 Creating a Patch Adjusting the Volume and Pan TVA TVA Switch Switches the TVA on off Value OFF ON TVA PATCH Edit TVA INIT PATCH 2 011 v Level LevelkF LUILFODp Pan PankF PanLFODp 127 0 00 o om oj 9 32 Decay m osc1 IE MoD eos cose ES Level x Specifies the volume of the patch Value 0 127 Level KF Level Key Follow Use this parameter if you want the volume of the patch to change according to the key that is pressed Relative to the volume at the C4 key center C positive settings will cause the volume to rise for notes higher than C4 and negative settings will cause the volume to fall for notes higher than C4 Larger settings will produce greater change Value 200 200 Lvl LFO Dp Level LFO Depth x Specifies how deeply the LFO will affect the volume of the patch Value 63 63 Pan Specifies the pan of the patch L64 is far left 0 is center and 63R is far right Value L64 0 63R Pan KF Pan Key Follow Use this parameter if you want key position to affect panning Positive settings will cause notes higher than C4 key center C to be panned
70. 00 si 00 Patch COSMI Zone 1 00 P 00 Patch COSM2 Zone 1 00 00 Patch Arpeggio Note 1 00 00 Patch Arpeggio Note 16 As the data size of Patch Arpeggio is 00 00 00 42H summation of the size and the start address of Temporary Patch Arpeggio Note 16 will be 10 00 00 OOH 00 00 7F OOH 00 00 00 42H 10 00 7F 42H And the size that have to be got should be 10 00 7F 42H 10 00 00 00H 00 00 7F 42H Therefore the system exclusive message should be sent is FO 41 10 00 53 11 10 00 00 00 00 00 7F 42 F7 1 2 3 4 5 address data checksum 6 1 Exclusive Status 2 ID Roland 3 Device ID 17 4 Model ID V Synth 5 Command ID RQ1 6 End of Exclusive Calculating the checksum as shown in Example 2 gt we get a message of F0 41 10 00 53 11 10 00 00 00 00 00 7F 42 2F F7 to be transmitted 169 MEN Appendices MIDI Implementation lt Example4 gt Getting Temporary Patch data of whiole part RQ1 at once According to the Parameter Address Map p 159 the start address of Temporary Patch of whole part is assigned as following 10 00 00 00 Temporary Patch Part 1 10 01 00 00 Temporary Patch Part 2 10 OF 00 00 Temporary Patch Part 16 The offset address of Patch is also assigned as follows 00 00 00 Patch Common 00 00 Patch Oscillator Zone 1 00 5h 00 Patch Envelope Zone 1 00 D 00 Patch LFO Zone 1 00 u 00 Patch COSM1 Zone 1 00 s 00 Patch COSM2 Zone 1 00
71. 06 Flanger This effect sounds somewhat like a jet airplane taking off and landing 07 Short Delay This is a delay with a short delay time 08 Fbk Short Delay This is a short delay with many repeats Chorus Parameters Parameter Value Description Pre Low Freq 500 15000 Hz THRU Frequency of the low range THRU no filter is used Pre Hi Freq THRU 50 800 Hz Frequency of the high range THRU no filter is used Pre Dly Time 0 50 0 ms Adjusts the delay time from the direct sound until the chorus sound is heard Co LPF Freq 500 15000 Hz THRU Adjusts the cutoff frequen cy of the low pass filter THRU no filter is used The effect will be applied to the frequency range below the cutoff frequency Co HPF Freq THRU 50 800 Hz Adjusts the cutoff frequen cy of the high pass filter THRU no filter is used The effect will be applied to the frequency range above the cutoff frequency Rate 0 05 10 0 Hz note Sets the cycle for the chorus or flanger sound undula tions Depth 0 127 Adjusts the depth of modu lation for the chorus or flanger Feedback 98 98 Adjusts the proportion of the effect sound that is fed back into the effect Nega tive settings will invert the phase Cho Flg Sw CHORUS FLANGER Selects either chorus or flanger Reverb Parameters The functions of Reverb param
72. 200 Fat LFO Depth 63 63 Velocity Curve Envelope Velocity Curve 0 7 Velocity Sens Envelope Velocity Sensitivity 63 63 Velocity A Sens Envelope Attack Time Velocity Sensitivity 63 63 Velocity D Sens Envelope Decay Time Velocity Sensitivity 63 63 Velocity R Sens Envelope Release Time Velocity Sensitivity 63 63 ADSR Attack Envelope Attack Time 0 127 note ADSR Decay Envelope Decay Time 0 127 note ADSR Sustain Envelope Sustain Level 0 127 ADSR Release Envelope Release Time 0 127 note Env Depth Envelope Depth 63 63 Env Time KF Envelope Time Key Follow 200 200 Time PCM Time 63 63 Time KF Time Key Follow 200 200 Time Offset BWD ZERO FWD Time LFO Depth 63 63 Velocity Curve Envelope Velocity Curve 0 7 Velocity Sens Envelope Velocity Sensitivity 63 63 Velocity A Sens Envelope Attack Time Velocity Sensitivity 63 63 Velocity D Sens Envelope Decay Time Velocity Sensitivity 63 63 Velocity R Sens Envelope Release Time Velocity Sensitivity 63 63 ADSR Attack Envelope Attack Time 0 127 note ADSR Decay Envelope Decay Time 0 127 note ADSR Sustain Envelope Sustain Level 0 127 ADSR Release Envelope Release Time 0 127 note Env Depth Envelope Depth 63 63 Env Time KF Envelope Time Key Follow 200 200 Formant PCM Formant 63 63 Formant KF Formant Key Follow 200 200 E
73. 3 00 Patch Arpeggio Note 1 00 00 Patch Arpeggio Note 16 As the data size of Patch Arpeggio is 00 00 00 42H summation of the size and the start address of Temporary Patch Port 16 Arpeggio Note 16 will be 10 OF 00 OOH 00 00 7F OOH 00 00 00 42H 10 OF 7F 42H And the size that have to be got should be 10 OF 7F 42H 10 00 00 00H 00 OF 7F 42H Therefore the system exclusive message should be sent is FO 41 10 00 53 11 10 00 00 00 00 OF 7F 42 22 F7 1 2 3 4 5 address data checksum 6 1 Exclusive Status 2 ID Roland 4 Model ID V Synth 5 Command ID RQ1 3 Device ID 17 6 End of Exclusive Calculating the checksum as shown in Example 2 we get a message of F0 41 10 00 53 11 10 00 00 00 00 OF 7F 42 20 F7 to be transmitted 170 EThe Scale Tune Feature address 40 1x 40 The scale Tune feature allows you to finely adjust the individual pitch of the notes from C through B Though the settings are made while working with one octave the fine adjustments will affect all octaves By making the appropriate Scale Tune settings you can obtain a complete variety of tuning methods other than equal temperament As examples three possible types of scale setting are explained below OEqual Temperament This method of tuning divides the octave into 12 equal parts It is currently the most widely used form of tuning especially in occidental music On the V Synth the default settings for the
74. 33H 83 53H 115 73H 20 14H 52 34H 84 54H 116 74H 21 15H 53 35H 85 55H 117 75H 22 16H 54 36H 86 56H 118 76H 23 17H 55 37H 87 57H 119 77H 24 18H 56 38H 88 58H 120 78H 25 19H 57 39H 89 59H 121 79H 26 1AH 58 3AH 90 SAH 122 7AH 27 1BH 59 3BH 91 5BH 123 7BH 28 1CH 60 3CH 92 5CH 124 7CH 29 1DH 61 3DH 93 SDH 125 7DH 30 1EH 62 3EH 94 5EH 126 7EH des D decimal H hexadecimal Decimal values such as MIDI channel bank select and program change are listed as one greater than the values given in the above table A 7 bit byte can express data in the range of 128 steps For data where greater precision is required we must use two or more bytes For example two hexadecimal numbers aa bbH expressing two 7 bit bytes would indicate a value of aa x 128 bb n the case of values which have a sign 00H 64 40H 0 and 7FH 63 so that the decimal expression would be 64 less than the value given in the above chart In the case of two types 00 00H 8192 40 00H 0 and 7F 7FH 8191 For example if aa bbH were expressed as decimal this would be aa bbH 40 00H aa x 128 bb 64 x 128 Data marked Use nibbled data is expressed in hexadecimal in 4 bit units A value expressed as a 2 byte nibble 0a 0bH has the value of a x 16b lt Example1 gt What is the decimal expression of 5AH From the preceding table 5AH 90 lt Example2 gt What is the decimal expression of the value 12 34H gi
75. 40 Bit Rate Converter By changing the bit count and sample rate this effect recreates the Lo Fi Low Fidelity sounds of the early digital samplers and similar machines After the Lo Fi processor a filter to change the tone is arranged in series L Lo Fi Processor Filter Parameter Value Description Pre Filter Sw OFF ON This is the switch of the filter placed before the Lo Fi process ing 1 1 1 2 1 4 1 8 1 16 1 32 Sample Rate Sets the fraction of current sam pling rates to be used for pro cessing Bit Down 0 15 This setting is for reducing the bit count Post Filter Sw OFF ON This is the switch of the filter placed after the Lo Fi process ing DRY100 0WET DRYO0 100WET Balance Volume balance between the di rect sound DRY and the effect sound WET THRU LPF BPF HPF NOTCH Filter Type Type of filter THRU no filter is used LPF Passes frequencies below the Cutoff BPF Passes frequencies near the Cutoff HPF Passes frequencies above the Cutoff NOTCH Passes frequencies other than those near the Cutoff Level NOTCH Filter Slope 12 24 dB O Filter s attenuation slope 24 dB per octave steep 12 dB per octave gentle Filter Cutoff 0 127 Cutoff frequency of the filter The closer to zero it is set the lower the cutoff frequency be comes set it closer to 127 and the cutoff frequency
76. 7 77 Patt 1 16 RX Ch g Sau u sia ede i et q n w uh 77 Part MIDI Part 16 RW 9 77 Patch Patch settings aeree reete tete eec 32 Selecting a patch 1 21 PATCH ASSIGN i13 Patch Coarse T n _ cernerent eee rea teen nien 41 PATXCETGODY Sa E aaa aaa Meade eti ua 33 PATCH Edit Com Arpeggio AS Patch Fine Tune we 41 PATCH Information 98 PASE CUA SIG corse fois CER 33 PATCH LAS bi oes Lulu adn kaa kan Sasan sasa 22 Patch Mode Playing in Patch mode u 21 Patch Modernas dirt ayy asa the to eee ree anita PATCH Na e re RR EA Patch palette s aS asa Q eene PATCH PLAY 2 Patch Remain ioca SSS uD yi leana Patch remain switch essere Patch Tempo Patch transmit channel Patch Tx Ch x PATCH Wit SI RE R er eee RO Ree A PEDRO ERES eee DE PATGELZOne erento tete arn entier eerie e Pattern Edit Pattern edit PC card A PC card protector ssssssssssssseeeneeenenenrenetenenee PC CARD sloE escocia ados 15 PCM oscillator loop switch a 43 PCM oscillator playback mode 1 ses 43 PCM oscillator robot voice switch 43 PCM oscillator start offset 42 PCM oscillator tempo sync switch 43 PCM oscillator vari switch sese 42 PCM oscillator waveform eene 42 PEAK it
77. ATK OSC1 AENV DCY OSC1 AENV REL OSCI LFO RATE OSCI LFO PCH OSCI LFO TM PW OSCI LFO FR FT OSC1 LFO LVL OSC2 PITCH OSC2 TIME PW OSC2 FORMA FAT OSC2 LVL OSC2 PENV ATK OSC2 PENV DCY OSC2 PENV REL OSC2 TENV ATK OSC2 TENV DCY OSC2 TENV REL OSC2 FENV ATK OSC2 FENV DCY OSC2 FENV REL OSC2 AENV ATK OSC2 AENV DCY OSC2 AENV REL OSC2 LFO RATE OSC2 LFO PCH OSC2 LFO TM PW OSC2 LFO FR FT OSC2 LFO LVL CSM1 PRM1 CSM1 PRM2 CSM1 ENV1 ATK CSM1 ENV1 DCY CSM1 ENV1 REL CSM1 ENV2 ATK CSM1 ENV2 DCY CSM1 ENV2 REL CSM1 LFO RATE CSM1 LFO PRM1 CSM1 LFO PRM2 CSM2 PRM1 CSM2 PRM2 CSM2 ENV1 ATK CSM2 ENV1 DCY CSM2 ENV1 REL CSM2 ENV2 ATK CSM2 ENV2 DCY CSM2 ENV2 REL CSM2 LFO RATE CSM2 LFO PRM1 CSM2 LFO PRM2 TVA LVL TVA ENV ATK TVA ENV DCY TVA ENV REL TVA LFO RATE TVA LFO LVL TVA LFO PAN MFX SEND CHO SEND REV SEND MFX PRM1 MFX PRM2 MFX PRM3 I 00 51 Oaaa aaaa Matrix Control 2 Sens 1 1 127 I I I 63 63 I 00 52 Oaaa aaaa Matrix Control 2 Dest 2 0 77 I I I OFF OSCI PITCH OSCI TIME PW OSC1 FORMA FAT OSC1 LVL OSC1 PENV ATK OSC1 PENV DCY OSC1 PENV REL OSCI TENV ATK OSCI TENV DCY OSC1 TENV REL OSC1 FENV ATK OSC1 FENV DCY OSC1 FENV
78. CHO Type Chorus Type 00 Off 08 REV REV Type Reverb Type 00 Off 10 E For details on the parameters of each MFX section refer to MFX Parameters p 116 For details on the parameters of each chorus section refer to Chorus Parameters p 138 For details on the parameters of each reverb section refer to Reverb Parameters p 138 107 MEE Appendices Parameter List System Parameters Common Group p 74 Parameter Value Master Master Tune 415 3 466 2 Hz Master Key Shift 24 24 Master Level 0 127 Patch Remain Patch Remain Switch OFF ON Powerup Mode Last Set Default 10 External Input Type STEREO L R MONORAL MIX MONORAL L MONORAL R Mix Parallel MIX PARALLEL Output Gain 12 12 dB Digital Output Freq Digital Output Frequency 44 1 48 96 KHz EQ 4 Band EQ 4 Band Equalizer Switch OFF ON LOW Freq Low Frequency 50 63 80 100 125 160 200 250 315 400 500 630 800 1000 1250 1600 2000 2500 3150 4000 Hz LOW Gain 15 15 dB MID1Q 0 5 0 7 1 0 2 0 4 0 8 0 MID 1 Freq Mid 1 Frequency 50 63 80 100 125 160 200 250 315 400 500 630 800 1000 1250 1600 2000 2500 3150 4000 5000 6300 8000 10000 12500 16000 20000 Hz MID 1 Gain 15 15 dB MID2Q 0 5 0 7 1 0 2 0 4 0 8 0 MID 2 Freq Mid 2 Frequency 50 63 80 100 125 160 2
79. CSM1 2 LFO PRM1 p 111 CSM1 2 LFO PRM2 p 111 TVA LVL Level p 47 TVA ENV ATK TVA Envelope Attack Time p 48 TVA ENV DCY TVA Envelope Decay Time p 48 TVA ENV REL TVA Envelope Release Time p 48 TVA LFO RATE TVA LFO Rate p 49 TVA LFO LVL Level LFO Depth p 47 TVA LFO PAN Pan LFO Depth p 47 MFX SEND MFX Send Level p 50 CHO SEND Chorus Send Level p 50 REV SEND Reverb Send Level p 50 MFX1 3 p 116 TVA PAN Pan p 47 HINT When you touch List the Destination List window will appear allowing you to select the Matrix Control Destination from the list 39 MU Creating a Patch Creating a Patch Arpeggio PATCH Edit Com Arpeggio ii e v pens Patch Tempo e 120 0 Octave Range epe e PEE Motif KBDUelo Duration d n ie REAL 190 up Shuffle Rate Resolution EIS Arpeggio Switch Switches the Arpeggiator on off Value OFF ON Patch Tempo Specify the tempo of an arpeggio When Clock Source parameter p 75 is set to INTERNAL this setting value is effective Value 20 0 250 0 Hold Arpeggio Hold Switch Switch between Hold On Hold Off for the Arpeggiator performance Value OFF ON Octave Range Arpeggio Octave Range Sets the key range in octaves over which arpeggio will take place If you want the arpeggio to sound using only the notes that you ac
80. Description j 00 00 0000 000a Control Switch tO t NOTE CTRL 00 01 Oaaa aaaa Control Number 0 127 I IE 00 02 0000 aaaa 0000 bbbb Step 1 Velocity 0 128 l l l REST 1 127 TIE IE 00 04 0000 aaaa 0000 bbbb Step 2 Velocity 0 128 l l l REST 1 127 TIE IE 00 06 0000 aaaa 0000 bbbb Step 3 Velocity 0 128 l j l REST 1 127 TIE IE 00 08 0000 aaaa 0000 bbbb Step 4 Velocity 0 128 l l l REST 1 127 TIE IE 00 0A 0000 aaaa 0000 bbbb Step 5 Velocity 0 128 l l REST 1 127 TIE IE 00 0C 0000 aaaa 0000 bbbb Step 6 Velocity 0 128 l l l REST 1 127 TIE IE 00 OE 0000 aaaa 0000 bbbb Step 7 Velocity 0 128 l l I REST 1 127 TIE IE 00 10 0000 aaaa 0000 bbbb Step 8 Velocity 0 TAB l l l REST 1 127 TIE IE 00 12 0000 aaaa 0000 bbbb Step 9 Velocity O 128 l l l REST 1 127 TIE IE 00 14 0000 aaaa 0000 bbbb Step 10 Velocity 0 128 l l REST 1 127 TIE IE 00 16 0000 aaaa 0000 bbbb Step 11 Velocity 0 128 l l REST 1 127 TIE IE 00 18 0000 aaaa 0000 bbbb Step 12 Velocity 0 128 l l REST 1 127 TIE IE 00 1A 0000 aaaa 0000 bbbb Step 13 Velocity 0 128 l j l REST 1 127 TIE IE 00 1C 0000 aaaa 0000 bbbb Step 14 Velocity to 128 l
81. E ESARET 63 Importing aiSample ee ee RU e ete t ie lode te oe 64 Editing a Sample tenen ebat dieta eve eid 64 Common Procedure for Editing s s neketa Et SEAE AKAVA EREE ESS aa Eiaa 64 Editing the Specified Region of the Sample u a 66 Loop Region Settings eorr eter a ede dere ied 68 Original Tempo Setting uy apan ener Saman sns tenete tenete 69 Converting the Sample to V Synth Data Encode M 69 Selecting the Encoding Type esee uapa ahh iii ree Dei ied 70 Automatically Detecting Events u na e nuan aswan paya nitens 71 Deleting and Adding Events u A p S Saa EE EEE 71 Savingia Sampler 72 Settings Common to All Modes System Mode 73 How to Make the System Function Settings eene nenne 73 Saving the System Settings Write erret 73 Initializing the System Settings Init eee 73 Functions of System Parameters siis ensenis er one n enira pene eas dienes ipiius sisas 74 Settings Common to the Entire System Common aa 74 Controller Settings Controller ete ii ic 77 V LINK Settings V INK soni opas ap dote EO DAD tob Ud aqata asan Aa 80 Disk Related Functions Disk Mode 83 About Disk MEY sisas ips 83 Basic Disk Utility Operati nS u un nn a akana AEE AS a qhasa sas 85 Sorting the Files Displayed in the File List u ua 84 Loading a Project from Disk
82. Eb and F have a natural third the interval between a major third and a minor third On the V Synth you can use Arabian temperament in the three keys of G C and F lt Example gt Note Equal tem name perament C C D Just Tempera Arabian Scale ment tonic C ojojojo O S ojojojojojo Scale Tune C B Make scale tune settings Value 100 100 41 MU Creating a Patch Creating a Patch Modifying Waveforms OSC1 OSC2 Oscillator Switch Switches the oscillator on off Value OFF ON OSC Type Analog Oscillator PATCH Edit OSC1 Type INIT PATCH 2 01 Wave Gain PCM EXTIN 0 lt J wt yj osc Type m 5 0502 moD co E TUR eee PCM Oscillator PATCH Edit OSC1 Type INIT PATCH 2 011 Wave Gain EXT ES E 1 EG Waveform 168 MrphSyn Solo Mono Start offset List wawaqa Ye Time Trip Time Tri 3 Robot ieee ee Sue keel A Voice ET E a m e 0sc2 MoD oe TVA erect Oscillator Type mum p Mode Selects the type of oscillator By selecting EXT IN the signal that is input through the rear panel INPUT jack can be used as an oscillator This lets you play the externally input signal from the keyboard Value ANALOG Analog Oscillator PCM PCM Oscillator EXT IN External Input Oscillator Wave Gain Sets the gain amp
83. F 6 A B common 03501 IE MoD E E TUR erect Patch Coarse Tune Adjusts the pitch of the patch s sound up or down in semitone steps 4 octaves Value 48 48 Patch Fine Tune Adjusts the pitch of the patch s sound up or down in 1 cent steps 50 cents Value 50 50 MEMD One cent is 1 100th of a semitone Scale Tune Scale Tune Switch Turn this on when you wish to use a tuning scale other than equal temperament Value OFF ON The V Synth allows you to play the keyboard using temperaments other than equal temperament The pitch is specified in one cent units relative to the equal tempered pitch MEMO One cent is 1 100th of a semitone The selected scale applies to MIDI messages received from an external MIDI device Equal Temperament This tuning divides the octave into 12 equal parts and is the most widely used method of temperament used in Western music The V Synth employs equal temperament when the Scale Tune Switch is set to OFF Just Temperament Tonic of C Compared with equal temperament the principle triads sound pure in this tuning However this effect is achieved only in one key and the triads will become ambiguous if you transpose Arabian Scale In this scale E and B are a quarter note lower and C F and G are a quarter note higher compared to equal temperament The intervals between G and B C and E F and G Bb and C and
84. FH ch 1 16 kk note number 00H 7FH 0 127 vv note off velocity 00H 7FH 0 127 Note On Status 2nd byte 3rd byte 9nH kkH vvH n MIDI channel number 0H FH ch 1 16 kk note number 00H 7FH 0 127 vv note on velocity 01H 7FH 1 127 G Control Change By selecting a controller number that corresponds to the setting of parameters of y 8 P 8 P controllers Time Trip Pad D Beam Knob control change message and so on the V Synth can transmit any OBank Select Controller number 0 32 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 00H mmH BnH 20H 1H n MIDI channel number 0H FH ch 1 16 mm 11 Bank number These messages are transmitted when Pa Transmit Program Change or Transmit Ba USB is OFF 00 00H 7F 7FH bank 1 bank 16384 tch is selected But not transmitted when nk Select parameter SYSTEM Com MIDI Although with the V Synth you can select the Bank Select messages to be transmitted be sure to refer to the Program Change Map on p 153 for the Bank Select messages transmitted when the V Synth is selec Performance OModulation Controller number 1 t a Patch Rhythm Set Multitimbre or Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 01H vvH n MIDI channel number 0H FH ch 1 16 vv Modulation depth 00H 7FH 0 127 OBreath Type MSB Controller number 2 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 02H vvH n MIDI channel number 0H FH ch 1 16 vv Control
85. FR FT OSC2 LFO LVL CSMI PRM1 CSMI1 PRM2 CSM1 ENV1 DCY CSM1 ENVI REL CSMI ENV2 DCY CSM1 ENV2 REL CSMI LFO PRMl CSM1 LFO PRM2 CSM2 PRM1 CSM2 PRM2 CSM2 ENV1 DCY CSM2 ENVI REL CSM2 ENV2 DCY CSM2 ENV2 REL CSM2 LFO PRMl CSM2 LFO PRM2 TVA LVL TVA ENV ATK TVA ENV DCY TVA ENV REL TVA LFO RATE TVA LFO LVL TVA LFO PAN MFX SEND CHO SEND REV SEND MFX PRM1 MFX PRM2 MFX PRM3 OSC1 PENV ATK OSCI TENV ATK OSCI FENV ATK OSCI AENV ATK OSCI LFO RATE OSC2 PITCH 161 OSCI PENV DCY OSC1 PENV REL OSCI TENV DCY OSC1 TENV REL OSCI FENV DCY OSC1 FENV REL OSCI AENV DCY OSC1 AENV REL OSCI LFO PCH OSCI LFO IM PW OSCI LFO FR FT OSCI LFO LVL OSC2 TIME PW OSC2 FORMA FAT I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 00 4E Oaaa aaaa Matrix Control 1 Sens 2 1 127 I I I 63 63 4 I 00 4F Oaaa aaaa Matrix Control 2 Source 0 108 I I OFF CC01 CC31 CC33 CC95 BEND AFT I I I PAD X PAD Y PAD X PAD Y TRIP R I I I BEAM L BEAM R KNOB1 KNOB2 VELO KEYF I 00 50 Oaaa aaaa Matrix Control 2 Dest 1 0 77 OFF OSCI PITCH OSCI TIME PW OSC1 FORMA FAT OSC1 LVL OSC1 PENV ATK OSCI PENV DCY OSC1 PENV REL OSCI TENV ATK OSCI TENV DCY OSC1 TENV REL OSC1 FENV ATK OSC1 FENV DCY OSC1 FENV REL OSC1 AENV
86. For that reason a number of the more typical of the V Synth s patch parameters have been designed so they accept the use of Control Change or other MIDI messages for the purpose of making changes in their values This provides you with a variety of means of changing the way patches are played For example you can use the Pitch Bend lever to change the LFO cycle rate or use the keyboard s touch to open and close a filter The function which allows you use MIDI messages to make these changes in realtime to the tone parameters is called the Matrix Control To use the Matrix Control specify which MIDI message Source parameter will be used to control which parameter Destination parameter and how greatly Sns parameter Up to eight Matrix Controls can be used in a single patch In the right side of the screen touch the Control 1 2 Control 7 8 tabs to select the matrix control that you want to use Source Matrix Control Source Sets the MIDI message used to change the patch parameter with the Matrix Control Value OFF Matrix control will not be used CC01 31 33 95 Controller numbers 1 31 33 95 iS For more information about Control Change messages please refer to MIDI Implementation p 153 BEND Pitch Bend AFT Aftertouch PAD X Time Trip pad horizontal direction from the center PAD Y Time Trip pad vertical direction from the center PAD X Time Trip pad horizontal direction PAD Y Time
87. Frequency of the middle range range Pre Mid Q 0 5 0 7 1 0 2 0 Gain of the middle range Pre Mid Q 0 5 0 7 1 0 2 0 Gain of the middle range 4 0 8 0 Set a higher value for Q to 4 0 8 0 Set a higher value for Q to narrow the range to be af narrow the range to be af fected fected Pre Mid Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the middle range Pre Mid Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the middle range Pre Hi Freq 2000 20000 Hz Frequency of the high Pre Hi Freq 2000 20000 Hz Frequency of the high range range Pre Hi Gain 15 415 dB Gain of the high range Pre Hi Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the high range Low Rev Time 0 06 32 0 sec Duration time of the re Reverb Time 0 06 32 0 sec Duration time of the re verb for the low frequency verb band Pre Dly Time 0 200 0 ms Adjusts the delay time from Hi Rev Time 0 06 32 0 sec Duration time of the re the direct sound until the verb for the high frequency delay sound is heard band Density 0 99 Density of the reverb Xover Freq 160 15000 Hz The reverberation specified Room Size 1 8 Size of the room which is THRU by the Low Rev Time will simulated be applied to the range be Early Ref Level 0 99 Volume level of the initial low this frequency and by reflected sound the Hi Rev Time to the Release Density 0 99 Density of the sound that range above this frequency reaches the listener after Pre Dly Time 0 200 0 ms Adjusts the delay time from many repeated reflections the direct sound until the Low Damp Freq 50 4
88. Gain 36 0 dB Degree of High Damp da the limiter mode is DE Delay Level 0 127 Volume of the delay sound ESSER the setting for Limtr xxxxx will be ignored When 34 Guitar Multi the mode is LIMITER the setting for DE xxxxx will be Guitar Multi provides Comp Limiter Overdrive or Distortion ignored Chorus or Flanger and Delay effects connected in series Limtr Thresh 60 0 dB Adjusts the level Threshold old Level at which the limiter will L begin to operate f pz Sue imtr Release 0 127 Adjusts the time until when the Flanger 1 limiter will turn off after the in r Lone HE put level falls below the thresh R old level Limtr Gain 60 12 dB Adjusts the gain of the sound that passes through the limiter DE Sens 0 127 Adjusts the sensitivity relative to the input volume which con trols how the effect is applied DEFrequency 1000 10000 Hz Adjusts the frequency at which the de esser effect will apply Parameter Value Description Enhan Sens 0 127 Sensitivity of the enhancer Comp Sw OFF ON Turns the comp limiter on off Enhan Frequen 0 127 Sets the lower limit of the fre Comp Thresh 60 0 dB Sets the volume level at which cy quencies to which the enhance old the compression begins ment effects added Comp Attack 0 127 Sets the time after the sound vol Enhan Mix Lev 0 127 Level of the overtones generated ume is crossed the compressor el by the enhancer threshold until compression be Enhan Level 0 127 Volume of the
89. Mark Mark the selected file folder in the file list Open Open the selected folder Close Move to the next higher folder 6 Touch lt OK gt The Disk Tools Move Destination screen appears DISK Tools Move Destination s LA 7 If you want to move the file or folder to internal memory touch lt Int gt If you want to move it to a PC card touch lt Card gt 8 In the file list select the move destination file or folder Here you can use the following functions Touch the appropriate button to execute Prevw Preview audition the selected file w00 wav aif Info View information for the selected file Open Open the selected folder Close Move to the next higher folder 9 Touch lt OK gt A WARNING window like the following appears y MOVE FILE FOLDER Are You Sure CANCEL EXECUTE If you want to cancel the procedure at this point touch lt CANCEL gt 10 Touch lt EXECUTE gt to execute the operation Deleting Files Folders Delete 1 Access the DISK UTILITY MENU screen p 83 2 Touch lt Tools gt The Disk Tools screen appears m 7 66 7MB Free bd Int Internal pr 3s 172items Have 3 Touch lt Delete gt If you want to delete a file or folder from internal memory touch lt Int gt If you want to delete it from a PC card touch lt Card gt In the file list select the file or folder that you want to delete
90. Mid Freq 50 20000 Hz Frequency of the middle range filter is used EQ Mid Q 0 5 0 7 1 0 2 0 Gain of the middle range Mod XoverHPF THRU 50 800 Adjusts the cutoff frequency of 4 0 8 0 Set a higher value for Q to nar Hz the high pass filter THRU no row the range to be affected filter is used EQ Mid Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the middle range Mod Level 0 127 Volume of the chorus or flanger EQ Hi Freq 2000 20000 Hz Frequency of the high range sound I EQ Hi Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the high range Delay Time 0 1300 ms note Adjusts the delay time from the Mod Mode CHORUS Selects whether touse chorusior direct sound until the delay FLANGER anser sound is heard i n Delay Feedback 98 98 Adjusts the proportion of the de Mod Rate al nee i S m lay sound that ui fed back mio Mod Depth 0 127 Adjusts the depth of modulation the effect Negative settings ii for the chorus or flanger will invert the phase Hi Damp Freq 500 15000 Hz Adjusts the frequency above Mod phase 0180 deg Sets how the chorus or ilatiger THRU which sound fed back to the ef sound is spread 3 fect will be cut Mod Pre Delay 0 50 0 ms Adjusts the delay time from the High Damp by attenuating the direct sound until the chorus or higher frequencies first makes flanger OD heard the delay sound more natural Mod Feedback 98 98 Adjusts the proportion of the ef Delay Level 0 127 Volume of the delay sound un thit i fed han ane the effect Negative
91. OFF or not disconnected ON Value OFF ON D Beam 1 4 Assign L R V LINK D Beam1 4 Assign L R Specify the V Link function that will be controlled when you operate the D Beam controller Assign L is the left side and Assign R is the right side Value OFF The D Beam controller will not be used PLAYBACK SPEED Playback speed DISSOLVE TIME Dissolve time time over which the image switches AUDIO LEVEL Volume during audio playback COLOR CB Color Cb color difference signal COLOR CR Color Cr color difference signal BRIGHTNESS Brightness VFX1 Visual effects 1 VFX2 Visual effects 2 VFX3 Visual effects 3 VFX4 Visual effects 4 OUTPUT FADE Output fade y Local Sw ES Assign OFF Lever Bend Local Sw Y D Assign X fas PLAYBACK SPEED After Local Sw lt N Rssign gt H OFF dE oo Init Write roller RA Mod Local Sw V LINK Modulation Local Switch Specify whether the modulation lever will be disconnected from the internal sound generator in V Link mode OFF or not disconnected ON Value OFF ON Mod Assign V LINK Modulation Assign Specify the V Link function that will be controlled when you operate the modulation lever Value OFF The modulation lever will not be used PLAYBACK SPEED Playback speed DISSOLVE TIME Dissolve time time over which the image switches AUDIO LEVEL Volume during audio playback COLOR CB Color Cb color dif
92. Part 4 Bank Select MSB CC 0 0 127 I I 1 16 00 OA Oaaa aaaa Part 4 Bank Select LSB CC 32 0 127 00 26 0000 000a Part 14 Receive Switch 0 1 l 00 OB Oaaa aaaa Part 4 Program Number PC 0 127 I I OFF ON l 00 OC Oaaa aaaa Part 5 Bank Select MSB CC 0 0 127 00 27 0000 aaaa Part 14 Receive Channel 0 15 l 00 OD Oaaa aaaa Part 5 Bank Select LSB CC 32 0 127 1 16 00 OE Oaaa aaaa Part 5 Program Number PC 0 127 00 28 0000 000a Part 15 Receive Switch 1 1 00 OF Oaaa aaaa Part 6 Bank Select MSB CC 0 0 127 OFF ON 00 10 Oaaa aaaa Part 6 Bank Select LSB CC 32 0 127 00 29 0000 aaaa Part 15 Receive Channel 0 15 I 00 11 Oaaa aaaa Part 6 Program Number PC 0 127 1 16 00 12 0aaa aaaa Part 7 Bank Select MSB CC 0 0 127 I 00 2A 0000 000a Part 16 Receive Switch 0 dy l 00 13 Oaaa aaaa Part 7 Bank Select LSB CC 32 0 127 I OFF ON l 00 14 Oaaa aaaa Part 7 Program Number PC 0 127 00 2B 0000 aaaa Part 16 Receive Channel 0 15 00 15 Oaaa aaaa Part 8 Bank Select MSB CC 0 0 127 I 1 16 00 16 Oaaa aaaa Part 8 Bank Select LSB CC 32 0 127 00 2C 000a aaaa EQ Low Freq 0 19 00 17 Oaaa aaaa Part 8 Program Number PC 0 127 I 50 4000 Hz 00 18 O
93. Pattern Clear Here s how to erase data from the pattern You can erase a specific line or the entire pattern recording on a sequencer You can record notes and control changes 1 To specify a line that you want to erase move the cursor to by inputting them one by one that line 1 Specify the End Point of the arpeggio pattern that you want 2 Touch lt Clear gt to create Move the cursor to the End Point value box and make the setting 2 Touch lt Step Rec gt The V Synth will be in step input standby mode NOTE G85 NOTE G 5 NOTE G 5 NOTE G 5 NOTE G 5 NOTE G 5 NOTE G 5 OTE G 5 NOTE G 5 NOTE G 5 OTE G 5 NOTE G 5 NOTE G85 NOTE G 5 ars Gits Value mmm Controller Grid End Point Ctr 1 Ez 32 Ctri 2 ED AE A window like the following will appear PRTTERN CLERR This Will Clear One or All Lines Please Select the Command LINE ALL Cub CLEAR CLEAR 3 To erase a line of data touch lt LINE CLEAR gt To erase the entire pattern touch lt ALL CLEAR gt If you decide you don t want to clear anything touch lt CANCEL gt 3 Play the V Synth s keyboard or operate a controller to input the first step You can repeatedly record over the pattern length number of steps you specified in step 1 On each pass you can add new notes and control changes to build up the pattern
94. REL I I I OSCI AENV ATK OSCI AENV DCY OSCI AENV REL I I I OSC1 LFO RATE OSCI LFO PCH OSCI LFO TM PW I I I OSCI LFO FR FT OSC1 LFO LVL I I I OSC2 PITCH OSC2 TIME PW OSC2 FORMA FAT I I I OSC2 LVL I I I OSC2 PENV ATK OSC2 PENV DCY OSC2 PENV REL I I I OSC2 TENV ATK OSC2 TENV DCY OSC2 TENV REL I I I OSC2 FENV ATK OSC2 FENV DCY OSC2 FENV REL I I I OSC2 AENV ATK OSC2 AENV DCY OSC2 AENV REL I I I OSC2 LFO RATE OSC2 LFO PCH OSC2 LFO TM PW I I I OSC2 LFO FR FT OSC2 LFO LVL I I I CSM1 PRM1 CSM1 PRM2 I I I CSMI ENVI ATK CSMI ENVI DCY CSMI ENVI REL I I I CSMI ENV2 ATK CSM1 ENV2 DCY CSM1 ENV2 REL I I I CSMI LFO RATE CSM1 LFO PRM1 CSMI LFO PRM2 I I I CSM2 PRM1 CSM2 PRM2 I I I CSM2 ENV1 ATK CSM2 ENV1 DCY CSM2 ENV1 REL I I I CSM2 ENV2 ATK CSM2 ENV2 DCY CSM2 ENV2 REL I I I CSM2 LFO RATE CSM2 LFO PRM1 CSM2 LFO PRM2 I I I TVA LVL I I I TVA ENV ATK TVA ENV DCY TVA ENV REL I I I TVA LFO RATE TVA LFO LVL TVA LFO PAN I I I MFX SEND CHO SEND REV SEND I I I MFX PRM1 MFX PRM2 MFX PRM3 I 00 53 Oaaa aaaa Matrix Control 2 Sens 2 1 127 I I I 63 63 I I 00 54 Oaaa aaaa Matrix Control 3 Source 0 108 I I I OFF CC01 CC31 CC33 CC95 BEND AFT I I I PAD X PAD Y PAD X PAD Y TRIP R I I BEAM L BEAM R KNOB1 KNOB2 VELO KEYF I 00 55 Oaaa aaaa Matrix Control 3 Dest 1 0 77 OFF OSCI PITCH OSCI TIME PW OSC1 FORMA FAT
95. S u aa NA 96 MIDI USB E iii esas 75 Mix Parallel 74 MOD lS Mod 46 Mod ASSIGN 81 Mod Local SW niii deron 81 Modulator original level Modulator release time Modulator switch a aa a tnnt Modulator Type ukana n a L aea ieni ear aE eha Mono Mono Poly Motif MI ii Os Piles Folders u 2 dide loo eter ines Mita iio eta eei 16 N NUMBER 22 irte DEED P RENE teet 13 22 O Octave Range esee tere dde ere ede te RO 40 Octave Shift semuis act etiem TR 37 Octave SIL borne om aaa cm pas atas eds n uere A 23 Offset NN RRAS 49 ON OFF AT POR plato A aaa ep cedat 12 24 TJ BOUE ere nre a mte ea rei a e nee 12 OPTICAL IN OUT nereis sieren issia tenente 15 Original Level Original tempo OSC TVA E OSC1 OSC1 OSC2 OSEA ins eres k Oscillator coarse tune as 43 Oscillator fine tune tte ice dete etin 43 Oscillator random pitch depth we 43 Oscillator switch wee 42 Oscillator type wee 42 QutpubAssign cese t cd a a as ar ee ced a Ms onde 50 Output Gaii atre rem ener treni eei rendent ed 74 Output level reeeo raiar enenet ea enrii 61 62 P O 47 Part 1 16 receive channel 77 Part 1 16 receive switch
96. Samples Sample Mode Creating and Editing Samples Sample Mode Deleting a Sample SAMPLE Delete 1 Access the SAMPLE Top screen p 56 2 Touch V in the upper right of the screen A pulldown menu appears 121 Qu Di Yib SRHPLE Name tzz Sona Vib anal Or SAMPLE Copy SAMPLE Move SAMPLE Exchange SAMPLE Delete 29 shanai orn i e4iDidseridoo pum ia 127 Sanxian 3 In the pulldown menu touch SAMPLE Delete gt The SAMPLE Delete List window appears SAMPLE Top Sample Delete List 0012108 MrehSun 917 032 lcs ls AN ES 003 114 sencsue o11 115 xvLeo1 c ans I EE 004 157 PGSweer o12 0953 xvLP02 on oae ETE 005 126 HaveTbl 9013 0685 X LPOS E vos 113 sectsea 0142111 Lees ETE 007 123 Frntsea i O15 160 KVLPOS P T 008 120 Vox seas l 015 123 DSeLro1 I E er lalele Cancel Execute 4 From the list select the sample that you want to delete Either turn the VALUE dial or use INC DEC to select a patch You can also select a patch by touching it on the display Each screen in the SAMPLE Delete List window shows a group 002 058 VoxSwr 010 120 PlckSea of 16 samples To view other samples touch lt 017 032 gt lt 241 256 gt located at either side of the screen To view higher numbered samples touch lt 257 512 gt lt 769 999 gt located at the bottom of the screen 5 Touch lt E
97. TIME PW OSC1 FORMA FAT OSCILVL I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I MIDI Implementation OSC2 LVL OSC2 PENV ATK OSC2 PENV DCY OSC2 PENV REL OSC2 TENV ATK OSC2 TENV DCY OSC2 TENV REL OSC2 FENV ATK OSC2 FENV DCY OSC2 FENV REL OSC2 AENV ATK OSC2 AENV DCY OSC2 AENV REL OSC2 LFO RATE OSC2 LFO PCH OSC2 LFO TIM PW OSC2 LFO FR FT OSC2 LFO LVL CSMI PRMl CSMI1 PRM2 CSM1 ENV1 ATK CSMI ENV1 DCY CSM1 ENVI REL CSMI ENV2 ATK CSM1 ENV2 DCY CSM1 ENV2 REL CSMI LFO RATE CSMI LFO PRMl CSM1 LFO PRM2 CSM2 PRM1 CSM2 PRM2 CSM2 ENVI ATK CSM2 ENV1 DCY CSM2 ENVI REL CSM2 ENV2 ATK CSM2 ENV2 DCY CSM2 ENV2 REL CSM2 LFO RATE CSM2 LFO PRMl CSM2 LFO PRM2 TVA LVL TVA ENV ATK TVA ENV DCY TVA ENV REL TVA LFO RATE TVA LFO LVL TVA LFO PAN MFX SEND CHO SEND REV SEND MFX PRMl MFX PRM2 MFX PRM3 OSCI PENV ATK OSCI PENV DCY OSC1 PENV REL OSCI TENV ATK OSCI TENV DCY OSC1 TENV REL OSCI FENV ATK OSCI FENV DCY OSC1 FENV REL l 00 58 Oaaa aaaa Matrix Control 3 Sens 2 1 127 I 63 63 00 59 Oaaa aaaa Matrix Control 4 Source 0 108 I I OFF CC01 CC31 CC33 CC95 BEND AFT I I PAD X PAD Y PAD X PAD Y TRIP R I I BEAM L BEAM R KNOB1 KNOB2 VELO KEYF 00 5A Oaaa aaaa Matrix Control 4 Dest 1 0 77 OFF OSCI PI
98. Touch the appropriate y 8 PProP The Disk Format screen appears button to execute Prevw Preview audition the selected file w00 wav aif mam 66 7MB Free hd Mark All Mark all files folders in the file list Patch Mark Mark the selected file folder in the file list Open Open the selected folder Info View information for the selected file have Close Move to the next higher folder MEMD If you have selected a patch whose oscillator type is PCM the wave used by that patch will also be imported 6 Touch lt OK gt A WARNING window like the following appears 3 If you want to format the internal memory touch lt Int gt If you want to format a PC card touch lt Card gt Here you can use the following functions Touch the appropriate button to execute IMPORT FILE Prevw Preview audition the selected file w00 wav aif Are You Sure Info View information for the selected file Mark All Mark all files folders in the file list Mark Mark the selected file folder in the file list Open Open the selected folder Close Move to the next higher folder CANCEL EXECUTE L E ES 4 When you format a PC card the VOLUME Name window will appear allowing you to assign a new volume name 5 Touch lt OK gt If you want to cancel the procedure at this point touch A WARNING window like the following appears lt CANCEL gt
99. Value 0 127 gt After referring to How to Apply the LFO p 49 change the setting until the desired effect is achieved Rate LFO Rate x Adjusts the modulation rate or speed of the LFO Value 0 127 Note LFO Rate sets the beat length for the synchronized tempo when the tempo that specifies the LFO cycle Patch Tempo is synchronized with the tempo set in a external sequencer Example For a tempo of 120 120 quarter notes occur in 1 minute 60 seconds Setting Delay time d half note 1 second 60 60 1 second J quarter note 0 5 seconds 60 120 0 5 seconds J eighth note 0 25 seconds 60 240 0 25 seconds note This setting will be ignored if the Waveform parameter is set to CHAOS Mem LFO in the lower right of the screen shows a diagram of the wave cycle that corresponds to the current settings Fade Mode LFO Fade Mode Specifies how the LFO will be applied Value ON lt lt ON gt gt OFF lt lt OFF gt gt uU After referring to How to Apply the LFO p 49 change the setting until the desired effect is achieved Fade Time LFO Fade Time Specifies the time over which the LFO amplitude will reach the maximum minimum Value 0 127 E After referring to How to Apply the LFO p 49 change the setting until the desired effect is achieved How to Apply the LFO Apply the LFO gradually after the key is pr
100. a 34 22H 66 42H B 98 62H b 35 23H 67 43H C 99 63H c 36 24H 68 44H D 100 64H d oh 25H 69 45H E 101 65H e 38 26H amp 70 46H F 102 66H f 39 27H 71 47H G 103 67H g 40 28H 72 48H H 104 68H h 41 29H 73 49H I 105 69H i 42 2AH id 74 4AH J 106 6AH 3 43 2BH 75 4BH K 107 6BH k 44 2CH k 76 4CH L 108 6CH 1 45 2DH T 4DH M 109 6DH m 46 2EH a 78 4EH N 110 6EH n 47 2FH 79 4FH o 113 6FH 48 30H 0 80 50H P 112 70H p 49 31H 1 81 51H Q 113 71H q 50 32H 2 82 52H R 114 72H r 51 33H 3 83 53H s 115 73H s 52 34H 4 84 54H T 116 74H t 53 35H 5 85 55H U 117 75H u 54 36H 6 86 56H V 118 76H v 55 37H 7 87 57H W 119 77H w 56 38H 8 88 58H x 120 78H x 57 39H 9 89 59H Y 121 79H y 58 3AH 90 SAH z 122 7AH z 59 3BH rH 91 5BH 123 7BH 60 3CH lt 92 5CH 124 7CH 61 3DH 93 5DH 125 7DH 62 3EH gt 94 5EH e na 63 3FH z 95 5FH ad t t t tr D decima H hexadecimal SP is space Synthesizer Keyboard Date Nov 20 2002 Model V Synth MIDI Implementation Chart Version 1 00 Basic Default 16 1 16 Channel Changed 16 1 16 Memorized Default Mode 3 Mode 3 Messages Mono Poly Mode 3 4 M 1 Altered kk ke ke ke dee hehe hehe ee Note 0 127 Number E True Voice FOI I Note On Velocity Note Off Key s Channel s Pitch Bend Bank select Modulation Breath type Portamento time Data entry Volume Panpot Expression General purpose controller 1 Genera
101. and overtones a human voice can be given a groaning character Parameter Value Description Effect Effect 1 0 127 Effect depth Effect KF 200 200 Key follow setting for the effect volume Effect LFO Depth 63 63 Amount of LFO applied to 3 the effect volume For details on envelope settings refer to Making Envelope series Parameter Value Description COSM Type Bit Down 0 15 This setting is for reducing the bit count Sample Rate Normal 1 2 1 4 Sets the fraction of current Down 1 8 1 16 1 32 sampling rates to be used for processing Filter Filter 1 0 127 Cutoff frequency of the fil ter Filter KF 200 200 Key follow setting for filter cutoff frequency Filter LFO Depth 63 63 Amount of LFO applied to 3 filter cutoff frequency For details on envelope settings refer to Making Envelope Settings p 48 Balance Balance 2 0 127 Volume balance between the direct sound and the ef fect sound Balance LFO 63 63 Amount of LFO applied to Depth the volume balance LFO For details on LFO settings refer to Making LFO Settings p 49 Settings p 48 Balance Balance 2 0 127 Volume balance between the direct sound and the ef fect sound Balance LFO 63 63 Amount of LFO applied to Depth the volume balance For details on envelope settings refer to Making En
102. another sample you must specify the correct original tempo If you fail to do this the sounds will drift out of synchronization 1 Move the cursor to the item that you wish to set 2 Either turn the VALUE dial or press INC DEC to set the Sign time signature Meas measure and Beat values 3 Touch B The precise tempo will be displayed at the right of the gt The tempo displayed here is the original tempo You can also move the cursor to the original tempo and set it by rotating the VALUE dial or by using INC DEC Converting the Sample to V Synth Data Encode After you have finished editing the sample you should encode it By using the encoding that is appropriate for the sample you ll be able to maintain a higher quality of audio while controlling the pitch time and formant von The factory set waves preset waves cannot be encoded Displaying the Encode Screen nore Samples whose wave is too short 0 1 sec or less cannot be encoded and the SAMPLE Encode screen cannot be accessed for such samples 1 Press MODE The V SYNTH MODE MENU window appears W SYNTH MODE MENU 2 Touch lt SAMPLE gt The SAMPLE Top screen appears SAMPLE Top y SAMPLE BROWSER 1198 MrehsSynt 002 058 voxSuP oos 1 14 Suncsue P 904 157 Pasweer 905 126 HaveTbl 906 119 SPctsear 007 123 FrmtSea 905 3 Select the sample number that
103. area to disk 1 Access the DISK UTILITY MENU screen p 83 2 Touch lt Save Project gt The Disk Save Project screen appears DISK Save Project mur ss Free Internal Current Intsinternal pr js 3 To save to internal memory touch Int To save to PC card touch lt Card gt Then select the save destination project HINT If you want to save the data as a new project touch lt New Project gt The PROJECT Name window will appear Assign a name to the new project 4 Touch lt OK gt A WARNING window like the following appears SRVE PROJECT Rre You Sure CANCEL EXECUTE HINT If you want to cancel the procedure at this point touch lt CANCEL gt 5 Touch lt EXECUTE gt to execute the operation Delete Unneeded Files Clean Project This lets you clean up the contents of the disk by deleting files that cannot be used by the V Synth or waves that are not used by patches Executing this operation can increase the free space available on the disk If there are any unused patch wave numbers subsequent patches waves will be automatically renumbered forward 1 Access the DISK UTILITY MENU screen p 83 2 Touch lt Clean Project gt The DISK Clean Project screen appears DISK Clean Project Executing this operation will delete unused waves or needless files in the current project If there are any unused patch wave n
104. can give you the sound you want 1 Access the PATCH PLAY screen and select the patch whose settings you wish to modify p 21 HINT If you want to create all your patches from the ground up rather than the patches that have already been prepared carry out the Initialize operation p 33 2 The parameters are organized into several editing groups Touch one of the buttons at the bottom of the screen to select the edit group containing the parameters you want to set HINT In the PATCH PLAY screen you can touch the display area for each section to jump to the setting screen for that section 3 Touch one of the tabs in the left of the screen to select the desired editing screen U lt For details on how the parameters are grouped refer to Patch Parameters p 102 4 In each editing screen touch the touch screen to set the parameters ES For details on how to use the touch screen refer to Basic Touch Screen Operation p 19 5 When editing a parameter that requires you to specify a value move the cursor to the value box of that parameter Then modify the value by either turning the VALUE dial or pressing INC or DEC You can also modify a value by dragging over the touch screen 6 Repeat steps 2 5 to complete a patch 7 If you wish to save the changes you ve made perform the Save operation p 34 If you do not wish to save changes press EXIT to return to the PATCH PLAY screen
105. delete or add events as you like In the SAMPLE Encode screen you can touch lt PREVIEW gt to play the sample from the current location until the next event By touching lt PREVIEW gt you can play the sample to see whether events have been assigned to the locations that you expect vos Beaware that if you change the encode depth after deleting or adding events the events that were modified manually will be discarded and the events that were detected by depth will be displayed If you modify the location of events after encoding you must re encode The modified location of the events will take effect when you encode Deleting an Event 1 Move the cursor to Current 2 By turning the VALUE dial pressing INC DEC or dragging your finger over the sample in the screen set Current to the location of the event that you want to delete 3 Touch either or The Current location will move to the location of the next event toward the left or right 4 Repeat step 3 to move Current to the location of the event that you wish to delete Touch to delete the event nore The events at the beginning and end of a sample cannot be deleted gi Adding an Event 1 Move the cursor to Current 2 By turning the VALUE dial pressing INC DEC or dragging your finger over the sample in the screen move Current to the location at which you want to add the event 3 Touch to add the event 71 BE Cr
106. enhancer sound gins EQ Low Freq 50 4000 Hz Frequency of the low range Comp Release 0 127 Specifies the time from when the EQ Low Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the low range volume drops below the com EQ Mid Freq 50 20000 Hz Frequency of the middle range pressor threshold until com EQ Mid Q 0 5 0 7 1 0 2 0 Gain of the middle range pression is no longer applied 4 0 8 0 Set a higher value for Q to nar Comp Ratio 1 5 1 2 1 4 1 Sets the source sound output row the range to be affected 100 1 sound compression ratio EQ Mid Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the middle range Comp Gain 60 12 dB Adjusts the output gain EQ Hi Freq 2000 20000 Hz Frequency of the high range Distortion Sw OFF ON Selects whether to use overdrive EQ Hi Gain 5 15 dB Gain of the high range or distortion Delay Time 0 1300 ms note Adjusts the delay time from the Distortion OD DS Selects whether to use overdrive direct sound until the delay Mode OD or distortion DS sound is heard Drive 0 127 Degree of distortion Delay Feedback 98 98 Adjusts the proportion of the de Amp Sim Sw OFF ON Turns the amp simulator on off lay sound that is fed back into Amp Type SMALL Type of guitar amp the effect Negative settings BUILT IN 2 SMALL small amp will invert the phase STACK 3 BUILT IN single unit type amp STACK 2 STACK large double stack amp 3 STACK large triple stack amp Distortion Level 0 127 Volume of the overdrive or dis tortion
107. fast speed sound WET Low Level 0 127 Volume of the low frequency ro Ps Low Freq 50 4000 Hz Frequency of the low range tor Ps Low Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the low range Hi Slow Rate 0 05 10 0 Hz Slow speed SLOW of the high Ps Hi Freq 2000 20000 Hz Frequency of the high range note frequency rotor Ps Hi Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the high range Hi Fast Rate 0 05 10 0 Hz Fast speed FAST of the high note frequency rotor Hi Acceleration 0 15 Adjusts the time it takes the high frequency rotor to reach the newly selected speed when switching from fast to slow or slow to fast speed Hi Level 0 127 Volume of the high frequency rotor Separation 1 0 127 Spatial dispersion of the sound Ps Low Freq 50 4000 Hz Frequency of the low range Ps Low Gain 15 415 dB Gain of the low range Ps Hi Freq 2000 20000 Hz Frequency of the high range Ps Hi Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the high range 129 MEN Appendices 27 Stereo Pitch Shifter This effect features two pitch shifters arranged in parallel making it stereo compatible It can shift the pitch of the input signal up to one octave up or down 28 OD DS gt Cho Flg Overdrive Distortion Chorus Flanger This effect connects either Overdrive or Distortion and either Chorus or Flanger Overdrive Distortion OF p Chorus a Flanger EQ OF 130
108. internal memory touch lt Int gt If you want to copy to a PC card touch lt Card gt 8 In the file list select the copy destination file or folder Here you can use the following functions Touch the appropriate button to execute Prevw Preview audition the selected file w00 wav aif Info View information for the selected file Open Open the selected folder Close Move to the next higher folder 9 Touch lt OK gt A WARNING window like the following appears COPY FILE FOLDER Are You Sure CANCEL EXECUTE EE If you want to cancel the procedure at this point touch lt CANCEL gt 10 Touch lt EXECUTE gt to execute the operation Moving Files Folders Move 1 Access the DISK UTILITY MENU screen p 83 2 Touch lt Tools gt The Disk Tools screen appears wa 66 7MB Free bd 1 2items 3 Touch lt Move gt 4 If you want to move a file or folder from internal memory touch lt Int gt If you want to move it to a PC card touch lt Card gt 87 w Disk Related Functions Disk Mode Disk Related Functions Disk Mode 5 In the file list select the file or folder that you want to move Here you can use the following functions Touch the appropriate button to execute Prevw Preview audition the selected file w00 wav aif Info View information for the selected file Mark All Mark all files folders in the file list
109. into the V Synth Load Project u 84 Saving Project on Disk Save Project ss anata Dreier a ieee ennt 85 Delete Unneeded Files Clean ProJject u uu retient ici 85 Importing Individual Patch or Wave Files Import Files Q 85 Initializing a Disk Format eet deer diti teet 86 Functions Related to Files and Folders Tools eese 87 Copying Files Folders Copy entente nennen 87 Moving Files Folders Move nette tette tetti etri n eres 87 Deleting Files Folders Delete edere treten terti bns 88 Reriaming a Files Folders Rename iii ti diia 89 Connecting to Your Computer via USB USB Mode 90 About USB Functions econo cir te fo pev een rep deter ie ra quee Sad daa 90 Transferring Files to or from Your Computer Storage Modeb u 90 Windows Me 2000 XP Users tete e eerte tati 91 Macintosh Users eant dune ida 93 Examples of Using Storage Mode eene 94 Exchanging MIDI Messages with Your Computer MIDI Mode sess 96 Driver Installation and Setting usinsitshashpisaaypaysyyaspaiipaykayayapaqayi9pssayayiyshaikiyssaya 96 Other Functions uuu nnne nnne nenne nans 97 Transmitting Data to an External MIDI Device Data Transfer sess eee 97 Reset to Default Factory Settings Factory Reset sss 98 Viewing Various Information Info
110. is currently loaded into the work area With the factory set project there is approximately 115 seconds stereo 230 seconds monaural of sampling memory If you delete the factory set waves you will be able to use a maximum of approximately 280 seconds stereo 560 seconds monaural of sampling memory However since a maximum of approximately 56 seconds stereo 113 seconds monaural can be saved in internal memory you will need to use a commercially available PC card if you want to store more samples than this The above values are for when the sample is encoded using the LITE type MEM The factory set waves can be restored using the Factory Reset operation p 98 even if they have been erased Preset Memory Preset memory contains the state of the internal memory when the unit is shipped from the factory If after erasing the internal memory you once again want to use the factory set patches or waves you can either perform the Factory Reset operation or use Disk mode to import the factory data from preset memory USB If you connect the V Synth to your computer via a USB cable projects patches and wave data in the V Synth s internal memory or ona PC card can be saved backed up to the hard disk or other media on your computer In addition wave data created on the V Synth can also be used by software running on your computer or wave data created by your computer software can be used on the V Synth
111. m Playing in Patch Mode Patch mode is the mode in which you can play the keyboard using a single sound patch or rhythm set About the PATCH PLAY Screen Displaying PATCH PLAY Screen To access the PATCH PLAY screen use the following procedure 1 Press MODE The V SYNTH Mode MENU window appears V SYNTH MODE MENU FACTORY RESET 2 Touch lt PATCH gt You will enter Patch mode and the PATCH PLAY screen appears PATCH PLAY MadOrchestra 2 011 v Ch Es J 1 120 0 Trans c 0ct 0 Zonelo1 Ra Common osci E MoD eos Em TUR eee Functions in the PATCH PLAY Screen r Indicates a list of patches Indicates the current mode Indicates the MIDI transmit channel Tx and receive channel Rx Indicates sets the tempo Sets the Transpose and the Octave Shift Indicates the name and zone of the selected patch Indicates sets the zone Opens the pulldown menu PATCH PLA ELC AA IN ac or cnestra cz tziai wv JOnTXSRHZRXSUNEE iZO O Trans C oot o Zone o1 E ll Mad0r chestr a Indicates selects the number and name of the selected patch Graphically displays the parameter settings of the selected patch Common 1 05C1 x IE EZ erect Displays the various patch setting screens Selecting a Patch V Synth contains 512 patches for you to select and use All of these patches can be overwritten
112. or BANK the PATCH PALETTE window will appear In this window you can view the patches that are registered in the currently selected bank Selecting Patches from the List You can display a list of patches and select a patch from that list 1 Access the PATCH PLAY screen p 21 2 Touch lt List gt in the upper left area of the display The PATCH List window appears PATCH PLAY MadOrchestra rz 811 PATCH List 901 POSSE E kaa 901 Madorchestra 009 Phrase Lab detis HM MEME ooz Harr Trek EE ic J mA 89S Time Warrer ES 004 Trip of Time 12 Noizy LOOP sss Dd RTA al J 080 S Bo sides now 913 Ghost insGrit WF SAME A 906 Feedback Osc O14 VARI ARP o BRENNEN 112 007 VoixBulsares O 1S Earth Temple ES 005 Jet Bass 910 Quasimodo 011 LetThemPray eie Runnins Away 3 Select a patch from the list Either turn the VALUE dial or use INC DEC to select a patch You can also select a patch by touching it on the display E you select a patch in the list and play the keyboard the selected patch will sound This is a useful way to audition the sound of a patch 4 To view other patches touch lt 017 032 gt lt 241 256 gt located at either side of the screen To view higher numbered patches touch 257 512 located at the bottom of the screen 5 Touch lt OK gt The patch is selected and the PATCH List window closes Transposing the Keyboard in Semito
113. p 138 Value 00 Off 08 In this setting screen you can edit the parameters of the chorus that is selected by the CHO Type setting For details on the parameters that can be edited refer to Chorus Parameters p 138 When you touch lt List gt the Chorus List window will appear allowing you to select the chorus from the list 51 MU Creating a Patch Creating a Patch REV PATCH Edit Effect Reverb INT PATCH tase y Reverb Room 1 Rev Time PreEg ie Tine wer mes EJ poe Sa Freq Time 0 37 0 35 see ze e ts s Hz ms Density Room Size EIo Qa de MO Ea 70 16 9 a fm common osci osc2 moo co E TUR Erect REV Type Reverb Type Use this parameter to select from among the 10 available reverb For details on reverb parameters refer to Reverb Parameters p 138 Value 00 Off 10 In this setting screen you can edit the parameters of the reverb that is selected by the REV Type setting For details on the parameters that can be edited refer to Reverb Parameters p 138 HINT When you touch lt List gt the Reverb List window will appear allowing you to select the reverb from the list Zone Settings Zone V Synth lets you divide the keyboard into as many as sixteen zones with each zone playing a different sound MEMO The following patch settings are applied in common to each of
114. samples from the V Synth p 60 149 MEE Appendices Message List Message Meaning Action SAMPLE EDIT There is not enough wave memory to execute the Delete unneeded samples from the V Synth p 60 Memory Full wave editing operation Insert Zero Insert Region Paste SAMPLING Since the wave memory has become full the opera Delete unneeded samples from the V Synth p 60 Memory Full tion was halted WARNING Screens If a WARNING screen appears follow the procedure described in the corresponding Action Message Meaning Action CHANGE USB MODE USB Mode Will Be Changed USB mode will be changed Exit any USB MIDI related applications on your computer COPY FILE FOLDER Are You Sure The file s or folder s will be copied from the disk Is it OK to execute To cancel the operation touch CANCEL To exe cute the operation touch lt EXECUTE gt DELETE FILE FOLDER This Will Clear the File s Folder s Are You Sure The file s or folder s will be deleted from the disk Is it OK to execute To cancel the operation touch CANCEL To exe cute the operation touch lt EXECUTE gt DISCONNECT USB Disconnection Will Be Done Before Ejecting Are You Sure Will disconnect before ejecting Is it OK to execute Perform the Eject operation on your computer EDITED DATA EXISTS If You Need This Data Save Immedi ately T
115. screen touch Internal or PC Card gt to change drives Closing the USB Storage Screen 1 In the V Synth s USB Storage screen make sure that Access the access indicator is not blinking 2 In My Computer right click the Removable Disk icon and execute Eject 3 Press EXIT The USB Storage screen will close vos If you press EXIT without performing the Eject operation on your computer a WARNING window like the following will appear DISCONNECT USB Disconnection Will Be Done Before EJectins Rre You Sure CANCEL EXECUTE Touch lt EXECUTE gt to close this window only if you are unable to perform the Eject operation on your computer Canceling the USB Connection Once you have connected the V Synth and your computer in Storage mode you must cancel the USB connection on your computer before you do either of the following actions Disconnect the USB cable Turn off the V Synth s power while the USB cable is connected 1 Use Eject hardware displayed in the task bar in the lower right of the screen to cancel the connection with the V Synth The Removable Disk drive icon will disappear from My Computer and the USB connection will be cancelled Connecting to Your Computer via USB USB Mode Macintosh Users Connecting the V Synth to Your Computer 1 Make sure that the power of the V Synth is turned off 2 Sta
116. size of the transmitted Exclusive message How to Calculate the Checksum hexadecimal numbers are indicated by H The checksum is a value derived by adding the address size and checksum itself and inverting the lower 7 bits Here s an example of how the checksum is calculated We will assume that in the Exclusive message we are transmitting the address is aa bb cc ddH and the data or size is ee ffH aa bb cc dd ee ff sum sum 128 quotient remainder 128 remainder checksum lt Example1 gt Setting CHORUS TYPE of PATCH to CHORUS 1 DT1 According to the Parameter Address Map p 159 the start address of Temporary Patch is 10 00 00 00H the offset address of PATCH CHORUS at PATCH is 04 00H and the address of CHORUS TYPE is 00 00H Therefore the address of CHORUS TYPE of PATCH CHORUS is 10 00 00 OOH 04 00H 00 00H 10 00 04 00H CHORUS 1 has the value of 01H So the system exclusive message should be sent is FO 41 10 00 53 12 10 00 04 00 01 22 F7 1 2 3 4 5 address data checksum 6 1 Exclusive Status 2 ID Roland 3 Device ID 17 4 Model ID V Synth 5 Command ID DT1 6 End of Exclusive Then calculate the checksum 10H 00H 04H 00H 01H 16 0 4 0 1 21 sum 21 sum 128 0 quotient 21 remainder checksum 128 21 remainder 107 6BH This means that FO 41 10 00 53 12 10 00 04 00 01 6B F7 is the message should be sent l
117. some pedals the electrical signal output by the pedal when it is pressed or released is the opposite of other pedals If your pedal has an effect opposite of what you expect set this parameter to REVERSE If you are using a Roland pedal that has no polarity switch set this parameter to STANDARD Value STANDARD REVERSE 79 MU Settings Common to All Modes System Mode Settings Common to All Modes System Mode V LINK Settings V LINK Tx Channel EN Palette Cocal Sw a E mm ne Init write MIDI Channel V LINK MIDI Channel Specifies the channel used to transmit MIDI messages for V LINK control Value 1 16 Audio V LINK Audio Switch Specifies whether sound from the externally connected video device will be played ON or not played OFF Value OFF ON KBD Output V LINK Keyboard Output Fade Switch Specifies whether the video output from the video device will be stopped ON or will not be stopped OFF when you are not holding down a key Value OFF ON Palette Local Sw V LINK Patch Palette Local Switch Specify whether you will press PATCH PALETTE NUMBER 1 8 in V Link mode to switch patches ON or not OFF Value OFF ON SYSTEM LINK TT Pad Knob Y Tx ES TT Pad TT Pad Zo Knob E LE MM X Rssign XY OFF Lever Y Assign XY Assign TT T BAR TIME TRIP Knob Sw Sw ML LN 1Rssian 2 ssign COLOR CB COLOR CR
118. sound 133 MEE Appendices Parameter Value Description Parameter Value Description Mod Mode CHORUS Selects whether to use chorus or Distortion Sw OFF ON Selects whether to use overdrive FLANGER flanger or distortion Mod Rate 0 05 10 0 Hz Adjusts the speed of modulation Distortion OD DS Selects whether to use overdrive note for the chorus or flanger Mode OD or distortion DS Mod Depth 0 127 Adjusts the depth of modulation Drive 0 127 Degree of distortion for the chorus or flanger AmpSimSw OFF ON Turns the amp simulator on off Mod Phase 0 180 deg Sets how the chorus or flanger Amp Type SMALL Type of guitar amp sound is spread BUILT IN 2 SMALL small amp Mod Pre Delay 0 50 0 ms Adjusts the delay time from the STACK 3 BUILT IN single unit type amp direct sound until the chorus or STACK 2 STACK large double stack flanger sound is heard amp Mod Feedback 98 98 Adjusts the proportion of the ef 3 STACK large triple stack amp fect sound that is fed back into Distortion Level 0 127 Volume of the overdrive or dis the effect Negative settings tortion sound will invert the phase EQ Low Freq 50 4000 Hz Frequency of the low range Mod XoverLPF 500 15000 Hz Adjusts the cutoff frequency of EQ Low Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the low range THRU the low pass filter THRU no EQ
119. space DISK There is an identically named file or folder Assign a different name p 89 Alternatively File Folder Name Duplicate please write to a folder that does not contain an identically named file or folder DISK A patch or sample used by the project or patch was Re create the project or patch and save it File Not Found not found on disk DISK The data is damaged and cannot be loaded Do not use this file File Read Error DISK The media is of a format to which the V Synth can Prepare a media that is of a format to which the V File Write Error not write Synth is able to write DISK Since the format of this file is incorrect it cannot be Do not use this file Illegal Format loaded DISK This file uses a type of compression that the V Use the device that created the file to convert the Illegal PCM Wave Cannot Load This Wave Synth is unable to read data into an 8 bit or 16 bit wave DISK Since the wave memory has become full the opera Delete unneeded samples from the V Synth Alter Memory Full tion was halted natively individually import the patches or sam ples that you want to use DISK You are attempting to write to the same hierarchical Change the writing destination Path Duplicate level DISK The path name is too long Shorten the names of each folder p 89 Alterna Path Name Too Long tively move the entire folder to a shallower level of the hierarc
120. system architecture The V Synth lets you customize all patches and wave data By connecting your computer via USB you can easily back up all of your data In addition to being able to sample using the V Synth itself you can also import WAV or AIFF format files so audio data created on other devices can easily be loaded into the V Synth and used Furthermore you can store data on PC cards for easy exchange of sound data O A full complement of external interfaces The digital audio interface supports both optical and coaxial connections and sampling rates of 44 1 kHz 48 kHz and 96 kHz making the V Synth ideal for any digital music production environment The USB connector supports file transfer or MIDI communication and you can select its function depending on your needs The PC card slot makes it easy to store large amounts of data on commercially available media such as Compact Flash or SmartMedia via a PC card adaptor V LINK function is a function that links music and video performance By using a video device that supports V LINK you can easily link various video effects with your performances If the V Synth is connected to an Edirol DV 7PR you can use the V Synth s controllers to adjust the brightness or color of the image vary the playback speed or switch between images What is VariPhrase VariPhrase has the following advantages 1 Capable of changing the pitch rate of time expansion compression a
121. the Time Trip effect Time The D Beam controller will control the Time Control effect Pitch The D Beam controller will control the Pitch Control effect Assignable The D Beam controller will control the effect specified for each patch iS For details on how to specify the effect that will be controlled when Assignable is selected refer to Matrix Ctrl p 38 MEMO The level meters at both sides of D Beam in the screen show the state of response as you move your hand closer to the D Beam controller Bend Range Up Pitch Bend Range Up Specifies the degree of pitch change in semitones when the Pitch Bend lever is all the way right For example if this parameter is set to 12 the pitch will rise one octave when the pitch bend lever is moved to the right most position Value 0 48 37 OZI GIIWIGIGIGI I IEII I EIEII IIIFTIHHIIIHrIIAIA Patch Creating a Patch Bend Range Down Pitch Bend Range Down Specifies the degree of pitch change in semitones when the Pitch Bend lever is all the way left For example if this is set to 48 and you move the pitch bend lever all the way to the left the pitch will fall 4 octaves Value 0 48 TT Pad PATCH Edit Com TT Pad INIT PATCH 2 011 v Gene Mode ral Time Trip AY X Rssisn ccse x Assisn cC82 Y Assisn cc81 Y Assisn cC83 TT Pad DBeam Bender TT Pad Mode Time Trip Pad Mode
122. the effect will be cut High Damp by attenuating the higher frequencies first Hi Damp Gain 36 0 dB Degree of High Damp Post HC Freq 160 15000 Hz Frequency at which the THRU high cut filter will begin to take effect THRU no filter is used Chorus Rate 0 127 Rate of modulation for the reverb Chorus Depth 0 127 Depth of modulation for the reverb 05 Hall 2 06 Hall 3 Simulates the reverberation in a concert hall This is suitable for simulating a smaller room and produces a clear reverberation Simulates the reverberation in a concert hall This is suitable for simulating a fairly large room and produces reverberation with a strong mid and low range Parameter Value Description Pre Low Freq 50 4000 Hz Frequency of the low range Parameter Value Description Pre Low Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the low range Pre Low Freq 50 4000 Hz Frequency of the low range Pre Mid Freq 50 20000 Hz Frequency of the middle Pre Low Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the low range range Pre Mid Freq 50 20000 Hz Frequency of the middle Pre Mid Q 0 5 0 7 1 0 2 0 Gain of the middle range range 4 0 8 0 Set a higher value for Q to Pre Mid Q 0 5 0 7 1 0 2 0 Gain of the middle range narrow the range to be af 4 0 8 0 Set a higher value for Q to fected narrow the range to be af Pre Mid Gain 15 15 dB Gain of th
123. the point that you want to specify Then specify the location by turning the VALUE dial by using INC DEC or by dragging your finger over the sample in the screen MEMO The region of the sample between Edit Start and Edit End is displayed with the color inverted When Current Loop Edit Start moving Loop Edit Start will cause Current to change as well note It is not possible to move Loop Edit Start to the right of Loop Edit End LENGTH LOCK This locks the length of the region between the start point Start and end point End of the sample It is convenient to use this when you already know the length of the sample that you need and want to find the right region to use After the length has been locked you can turn the VALUE dial use INC DEC or drag your finger over the sample in the screen to adjust the Start and End locations while maintaining the distance between these two points HINT You can also use Adjust p 65 or Zero Cross Search p 66 while the length of the sample is locked LOOP This switches loop playback on off Turn this on if you want the loop region specified in the Loop FWD BWD screen to play repeatedly PREVIEW PREVIEW This plays the sample During playback you can touch this once again to stop playback In the Loop FWD BWD screen the Adjust function moves the Loop Start Loop End or Current locations to the nearest of the following locations
124. to television channels By changing the channel on a television set you can view the programs that are being broadcast by different stations In the same way MIDI also allows a device to select the information intended for that device out of the variety of information that is being transmitted to it The cable from the antenna carries the TV signals from many broadcast stations Station A Station B g Station C The TV is set to the channel of the station you wish to watch MIDI uses sixteen channels 1 through 16 Set the receiving device so that it will receive only the channel that it needs to receive Example Set the V Synth to send Channel 1 and Channel 2 then set sound module A to receive only Channel 1 and sound module B only Channel 2 With this setup you can get an ensemble performance with for example a guitar sound from sound module A and bass from sound module B MIDI OUT MIDI IN MIDI THRU Transmit channel 1 2 ALL MIDI keyboard Sound Receive channel 1 ound s TEME oo Eh 12 n 7 Sound Receive channel 2 ji Module 00 O n When used as a sound module the V Synth can receive on up to sixteen MIDI channels Sound modules like the V Synth which can receive multiple MIDI channels simultaneously to play different sounds on each channel are called multi timbral sound modules MIDI Impleme
125. transfer MIDI communication must be switched before you connect the V Synth with your computer For the procedure refer to USB Setup p 76 Transferring Files to or from Your Computer Storage Mode By connecting the V Synth with your computer via a USB cable you can transfer files such as projects patches and wave data from internal memory or a PC card to and from the hard disk or other media of your computer in order to back up your data You can use software on your computer to edit wave data you ve created on the V Synth Conversely wave data that you ve created on your computer can be used on the V Synth In this way USB Storage mode lets you transfer files such as patch and waves to or from a connected computer von Never connect or disconnect the USB cable or turn off the power while in USB mode or while data is being transferred Selecting USB Storage Mode You must switch the V Synth to USB Storage mode before you connect the V Synth and your computer with a USB cable MEMO With the factory settings the V Synth is set to USB Storage mode 1 Press MODE to access the V SYNTH MODE MENU window 2 Touch lt SYSTEM gt The SYSTEM Com Master screen appears Master Master Tune Master Key Shift Master Level 0 Patch Remain Powerup Mode OET pic QE U LINK 3 In the left side of the screen touch the MIDI USB gt tab The SYSTEM Com MIDI USB s
126. units 3 3 octaves For playing a bass part more easily using your right hand transpose the keyboard down by 1 or 2 octaves 1 Press OCT or OCT and its indicator will light Pressing OCT once will raise the keyboard 1 octave Pressing OCT once will lower the keyboard 1 octave The specified Octave Shift setting will be shown in the Oct indication of PATCH PLAY screen PATCH PLAY MadOrchestra 2 91 v CERA 1d 120 0 Trans Ogg ej MadOrchestra PLAY screen and turn the VALUE dial or use INC DEC to make the setting You can also do this by dragging on the touch screen yon There is a single Octave Shift setting Setup parameter for the entire V Synth The changed setting will be remembered even if you switch patches 2 To turn off the Octave Shift function press the other button OCT or OCT of that pressed in step 1 The indicator will go off Playing Single Notes Mono When using a patch for a naturally monophonic instrument such as sax or flute it is effective to play in mono 1 Access the PATCH PLAY screen p 21 2 Atthe bottom of the screen touch lt Common gt 3 In the left side of the screen touch the General tab The Patch Edit Com General screen appears PATCH Edit Com General Madorchestra rz 011 vw Structure Type TYPE ae E EJ mm costa icosta2 2298 es LL erit Lo Portamento i Mode min OFF mI Esato me mi a
127. value 00H 7FH 0 127 OVolume Controller number 7 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 07H vvH n MIDI channel number 0H FH ch 1 16 vv Volume 00H 7FH 0 127 OExpression Controller number 11 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH OBH vvH n MIDI channel number 0H FH ch 1 16 vv Expression 00H 7FH 0 127 OGeneral Purpose Controller 1 MSB Controller number 16 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 10H vvH n MIDI channel number 0H FH ch 1 16 vv Control value 00H 7FH 0 127 OGeneral Purpose Controller 2 MSB Controller number 17 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 1H vvH n MIDI channel number 0H FH ch 1 16 vv Control value 00H 7FH 0 127 OGeneral Purpose Controller 3 MSB Controller number 18 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 12H vvH 0H FH ch 1 16 00H 7FH 0 127 n MIDI channel number vv Control value OGeneral Purpose Controller 4 MSB Controller number 19 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 13H vvH 0H FH ch 1 16 00H 7FH 0 127 n MIDI channel number vv Control value OBreath Type LSB Controller number 34 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 22H vvH OH FH ch 1 16 00H 7FH 0 127 n MIDI channel number vv Control value OGeneral Purpose Controller 1 LSB Controller number 48 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 30H vvH 0H FH ch 1 16 00H 7FH 0 127 n MIDI channel number vv Control value
128. you wish to encode For details on how to select a sample refer to Sampling Procedure p 56 69 MU Creating and Editing Samples Sample Mode Creating and Editing Samples Sample Mode 4 Touch lt Encode gt The SAMPLE Encode screen appears SAMPLE Encode hd PREVIEW A AA AA current eeaeocce LITE SOLO ENSEMBLE 22272 Adjust f Adjust f pel Evt f Adaeve f zoom J zoom flag i 4 i Ma Wes l a i E i To Execute the Encode Operation In the SAMPLE Encode screen select the encode type set the encode depth and delete or add events Then touch lt Execute gt If you wish to stop the encode during the operation touch lt Abort gt When encoding is completed you will return to the SAMPLE Top screen u For details on these settings refer to the following sections MEMO The amount of time required by the encoding process will depend on the sample You may need to wait a certain amount of time for encoding to be completed Selecting the Encoding Type You can choose from the following four types of encoding Touch the appropriate button to select a type LITE SOLO EA ENSEMBLE LITE This is the simplest encoding type When you sample on the V Synth this type is selected by default This type can be used with a variety of sounds but to obtain the highest quality we recommend that you encode using one of the other types SOLO This is suitable for monophonic vocals o
129. 0 0000 aaaa I 0000 cccc I I 0000 bbbb I 0000 dddd Reverb Parameter 9 12768 52768 I 0000 cccc I I I I 20000 20000 E 00 26 0000 aaaa I 163 NENNEN Appendices MIDI Implementation 0000 bbbb 0000 cccc 0000 dddd Reverb Parameter 10 12768 52768 20000 20000 14 00 2A 0000 aaaa 0000 bbbb 0000 ccce 0000 dddd Reverb Parameter 11 12768 52768 20000 20000 14 00 2E 0000 aaaa 0000 bbbb 0000 cece 0000 dddd Reverb Parameter 12 12768 52768 20000 20000 IE 00 32 0000 aaaa 0000 bbbb 0000 cece 0000 dddd Reverb Parameter 13 12768 52768 20000 20000 14 00 36 0000 aaaa 0000 bbbb 0000 cccc 0000 dddd Reverb Parameter 14 12768 52768 20000 20000 IE 00 3A 0000 aaaa 0000 bbbb 0000 ccce 0000 dddd Reverb Parameter 15 12768 52768 20000 20000 IE 00 3E 0000 aaaa 0000 bbbb 0000 cece 0000 dddd Reverb Parameter 16 12768 52768 20000 20000 1 00 42 0000 aaaa 0000 bbbb 0000 cccc 0000 dddd Reverb Parameter 17 12768 52768 20000 20000 IE 00 46 0000 aaaa 0000 bbbb 0000 ccce 0000 dddd Reverb Parameter 18 12768 52768 20000 200
130. 0 0 Hz Specifies the modulation speed note of the modulation effect Mod Depth 0 127 Specifies the modulation depth of the modulation effect Diffusion 0 100 Specifies the spaciousness of the delay sound Feedback 2 98 98 Adjusts the proportion of the de lay sound that is fed back into the effect Negative settings will invert the phase Hi Damp Freq 500 15000 Hz Adjusts the frequency above THRU which sound fed back to the ef fect will be cut High Damp by attenuating the higher frequencies first makes the delay sound more natural Echo Level 3 0 127 Volume of the echo sound Ps Low Freq 50 4000 Hz Frequency of the low range Ps Low Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the low range Ps Hi Freq 2000 20000 Hz Frequency of the high range Ps Hi Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the high range BPF 1 5 Freq 50 20000 Hz Sets the center frequency for each band pass filter 1 5 15 Band Pass Delay This is a delay with a band pass filter a filter that outputs only a specified frequency range on each of five delays A phaser is included before the delay Phaser is an effect that adds a phase shifted sound to the original sound to create time varying change modulating the sound BPF1 20 BPF 3 4 50 0 3 24 0 Specify the output bandwidth for each band pass filter 1 5 Balance 2 DRY100 0WET DRYO 100WET Volume balance between the di rect sound DRY and the delay sound
131. 00 Value 0 200 D Beam 1 4 Assign L R Specifies the MIDI controller number that will be transmitted by movements in the D Beam Controller Assign L is the left side and Assign R is the right side Value OFF No message will be transmitted CC01 31 33 95 Controller numbers 1 31 33 95 IS For more information about Control Change messages please refer to MIDI Implementation p 153 Pedal SYSTEM Ctrl Pedal v Polarity H Assign REVERSE s ZES Polarity Y Assign lin cot mm ES Init Write Hold Polarity Hold Pedal Polarity Select the polarity of the Hold pedal On some pedals the electrical signal output by the pedal when it is pressed or released is the opposite of other pedals If your pedal has an effect opposite of what you expect set this parameter to REVERSE If you are using a Roland pedal that has no polarity switch set this parameter to STANDARD Value STANDARD REVERSE Pedal 1 2 Assign This specifies the function of each pedal connected to the CTRL 1 CTLR 2 PEDAL jacks Value OFF The control pedal will not be used CC01 31 33 95 Controller numbers 1 31 33 95 E For more information about Control Change messages please refer to MIDI Implementation p 153 BEND UP Pitch bend positive direction BEND DOWN Pitch bend negative direction AFT Aftertouch Pedal 1 2 Polarity Selects the polarity of the pedal On
132. 00 250 315 400 500 630 800 1000 1250 1600 2000 2500 3150 4000 5000 6300 8000 10000 12500 16000 20000 Hz MID 2 Gain 15 15 dB HIGH Freq High Frequency 2000 4000 5000 6300 8000 10000 12500 16000 20000 Hz HIGH Gain 15 15 dB TOTAL Gain 15 15 dB MIDI USB Device ID Device ID Number 17 32 Clock Source INTERNAL EXTERNAL Rx PC Receive Program Change Switch OFF ON Rx Bank Receive Bank Select Switch OFF ON Rx Sys Ex Receive System Exclusive Switch OFF ON Tx Edit Transmit Edit Data Switch OFF ON Clock Out OFF ON Part MIDI Part 1 16 Rx Sw Part 1 16 Receive Switch OFF ON Part 1 16 Rx Ch Part 1 16 Receive Channel 1 16 108 Parameter List Controller Group p 77 Parameter Value Tx Patch Tx Ch Patch Transmit Channel 1 16 RX CH OFF Tx PC Transmit Program Change Switch OFF ON Tx Bank Transmit Bank Select Switch OFF ON Tx Active Sens Transmit Active Sensing Switch OFF ON KBD KBD Sens Keyboard Sensitivity LIGHT MEDIUM HEAVY KBD Velocity Keyboard Velocity REAL 1 127 After Sens Aftertouch Sensitivity 0 200 Local Sw Local Switch OFF ON Remote KBD Sw Remote Keyboard Switch OFF ON TT Pad Knob X Assign XY OFF CC01 31 CC33 95 Y Assign XY OFF CC01 31 CC33 95 X Assign TT X Assign Time Trip OFF CC01 31 CC33 95 Y Assign TT Y Assign Time Trip OFF CC01 31 CC33 95 Knob 1 2 Assign OFF CC01 31 CC33 95
133. 00 IE 00 4A 0000 aaaa 0000 bbbb 0000 cccc 0000 dddd Reverb Parameter 19 12768 52768 20000 20000 14 00 4E 0000 aaaa 0000 bbbb 0000 cccc 0000 dddd Reverb Parameter 20 12768 52768 20000 20000 E 00 52 0000 aaaa 0000 bbbb 0000 cece 0000 dddd Reverb Parameter 21 12768 52768 20000 20000 IE 00 56 0000 aaaa 0000 bbbb 0000 cece 0000 dddd Reverb Parameter 22 12768 52768 20000 20000 1 00 5A 0000 aaaa 0000 bbbb 0000 cece 0000 dddd Reverb Parameter 23 12768 52768 20000 20000 IE 00 5E 0000 aaaa 0000 bbbb 0000 ccce 0000 dddd Reverb Parameter 24 12768 52768 20000 20000 l 00 00 00 62 Total Size 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A offset I I Address Description I I 00 00 0000 O0aa Structure Type 0 2 I I I Y 3 I I 00 01 0000 000a MOD Switch 0 1 OFF ON I 00 02 0000 Oaaa MOD Type 0 4 I I I MIX RING AM FM ENV RING OSC SYNC I 00 03 Oaaa aaaa MOD Original Level 0 127 I 00 04 Oaaa aaaa MOD Attack Time 0 127 I 00 05 Oaaa aaaa MOD Release Time 0 127 I I 00 06 0000 000a TVA Switch 0 1 OFF ON l 00 07 Oaaa aaaa TVA Level 0 127 I 00 08 00aa
134. 00 16 Oaaa aaaa Env 2 Attack Velocity Sens 127 00 64 Qaaa aaaa Env 8 Attack Velocity Sens E 7 o I 63 63 I 00 17 Oaaa aaaa Env 2 Decay Velocity Sens 1 127 E Hass asas RIG Decay Velocity gens of u aco I I I 63 63 I 00 18 Oaaa aaaa Env 2 Release Velocity Sens 1 127 99 88 desa agas I Puy S SeleascVelocity Sens E 120 l 63 63 f 2 old Bosac zas BARZ ne Keyfollow Chl S aaa I 00 67 00aa aaaa Env 8 Time Keyfollow 44 84 I 200 200 I 200 4200 H t I i 4 00 68 0000 aaaa I 00 1A 0000 aaaa I I 0000 bbbb Env 3 Attack Time 0 144 0000 bbbb Env 9 Attack Time 0 144 0 127 MUSICAL NOTES 0 127 MUSICAL NOTES E 00 1C 0000 aaaa I is Q8 SA OOO a asi I 30090 abei Baye Sc Tine vidas I 0000 bbbb Env 9 Decay Time 0 144 0 127 MUSICAL NOTES 0 127 MUSICAL NOTES I 00 6C Oaaa aaaa Env 9 Sustine 0 127 I 00 1E Oaaa aaaa Env 3 Sustine 0 127 H 00 6D 0000 aaaa I L 00 1F 0000 aaaa I 0000 bbbb Env 9 Release Time 0 144 I 0000 bbbb Env 3 Release Time 0 144 0 127 MUSICAL NOTES Ques TOUS MUSIOARZMOTES 00 6F 0000 Oaaa Env 9 Velocity Curve 0 7 I 00 21 0000 Oaaa Env 3 Velocity Curve 0 7 l ipa c l l PIKSD hed d I 00 70 Oaaa aaaa
135. 00 34 0000 aaaa EQ Hi Freq 0 8 l 00 27 Oaaa aaaa Part 14 Bank Select MSB CC 0 0 127 2000 20000 Hz l 00 28 Oaaa aaaa Part 14 Bank Select LSB CC 32 0 127 I 00 35 000a aaaa EQ Hi Gain 0 30 NENNEN Appendices MIDI Implementation 15 15 dB 20 0 250 0 I I I 00 36 000a aaaa EQ Total Gain 0 30 I I I 15 15 dB 00 1B 00aa aaaa Pitch Bend Range Up 0 48 00 37 0000 000a EQ Switch 0 13 00 1C O0aa aaaa Pitch Bend Range Down 0 48 OFF ON l l 00 1D 0000 000a MFX Switch 0 1 00 00 00 38 Total Size I BYPASS ON 4 00 1E 0000 000a Chorus Switch 0 1 OFF ON 00 1F 0000 000a Reverb Switch 0 1 OSystem Controller I l I OFF ON 00 20 0000 aaaa Current Zone 0 15 Offset I I l ZONE1 ZONE16 Address Description 00 21 Oaaa aaaa Zone 1 Range Upper 0 127 E 29 7 I 00 00 0000 000a Transmit Program Change 0 1 00 22 0aaa aaaa Zone 2 Range Upper 0 127 OFF ON c 1 G9 00 01 0000 000a Transmit Bank Select 0 1 00 23 0aaa aaaa Zone 3 Range Upper 0 127 OFF ON c 1 G9 I 00 02 Oaaa aaaa Keyboard Velocity 0 127 I 00 24 0aaa
136. 000 Hz Adjusts the frequency be delay sound is heard low which sound fed back Density 0 99 Density of the reverb to the effect will be cut Room Size 5 6 34 7 m Size of the room which is The Low Damp function simulated damps the low frequency Early Ref Level 0 99 Volume level of the initial band of the reverb sound reflected sound quicker than other bands Release Density 0 99 Density of the sound that Low Damp Gain 36 0 dB Degree of Low Damp reaches the listener after Hi Damp Freq 2000 20000 Hz Adjusts the frequency many repeated reflections above which sound fed Low Damp Freq 50 4000 Hz Adjusts the frequency be back to the effect will be low which sound fed back cut to the effect will be cut High Damp by attenuating The Low Damp function the higher frequencies first damps the low frequency Hi Damp Gain 36 0 dB Degree of High Damp band of the reverb sound Post HC Freq 160 15000 Hz Frequency at which the quicker than other bands THRU high cut filter will begin to Low Damp Gain 36 0 dB Degree of Low Damp take effect THRU no filter Hi Damp Freq 2000 20000 Hz Adjusts the frequency is used above which sound fed back to the effect will be cut High Damp by attenuating the higher frequencies first Hi Damp Gain 36 0 dB Degree of High Damp Post HC Freq 160 15000 Hz Frequency at which the high cut filter will begin to take effect THRU no filter is used 09 Non Linear This uses digital processing to create
137. 000 aaaa I I I I 100 50 0 50 100 I 0000 bbbb Env 11 Release Time 0 144 I 00 1C Oaaa aaaa LFO 4 Delay Time 0 127 0 127 MUSICAL NOTES 00 1D 0000 O0aa LFO 4 Fade Mode id T I 01 09 0000 Oaaa Env 11 Velocity Curve 0 7 I I I ON IN ON OUT OFF IN OFF OUT FIXED 1 7 00 1E Oaaa aaaa LFO 4 Fade Time 0 127 I 01 0A Oaaa aaaa Env 11 Velocity Sens 1 127 I 00 1F 0000 000a LFO 4 Key Sync 0 1 63 02 OFF ON I 01 0B Oaaa aaaa Env 11 Attack Velocity Sens 1 127 I I I I 63 63 I 00 20 0000 Oaaa LFO 5 Waveform 0 7 01 0C Oaaa aaaa Env 11 Decay Velocity Sens 1 4127 I SIN TRI SAW SOR RND TRP z 63 S amp H CHS I 01 OD Oaaa aaaa Env 11 Release Velocity Sens A 127 D 00 21 0000 aaaa I I I I 63 63 I 0000 bbbb LFO 5 Rate 0 144 I 01 OE OOaa aaaa Env 11 Time Keyfollow 44 84 I I I 0 127 MUSICAL NOTES I I I 200 4200 I 00 23 0000 0aaa LFO 5 Offset 0 4 ne k l l l 100 50 0 50 100 E 01 OF 0000 aaaa I I 00 24 Oaaa aaaa LFO 5 Delay Time O 127 I 0000 bbbb Env 12 Attack Time 0 144 I 00 25 0000 OOaa LFO 5 Fade Mode 0 3 0 127 MUSICAL NOTES ON IN ON OUT OFF IN OFF OUT 14 01 11 0000 aaaa I I 00 26 Oaaa aaaa LFO 5 Fade Time 0
138. 0000 Hz Frequency of the high range Higher de lali Ht Ps Hi Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the high range Hi Damp Gain 36 0 dB Degree of High Damp Ps Low Freq 50 4000 Hz Frequency of the low range Ps Low Gain 15 415 dB Gain of the low range Ps Hi Freq 2000 20000 Hz Frequency of the high range Ps Hi Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the high range 29 OD DS gt Delay Overdrive Distortion Delay This effect connects either Overdrive or Distortion and Delay in series Overdrive Distortion Parameter Value Description Mod Mode CHORUS FLANGER Selects whether to use chorus or flanger Mod Rate 1 0 05 10 0 Hz note Adjusts the speed of modulation for the chorus or flanger Mod Depth 0 127 Adjusts the depth of modulation for the chorus or flanger Mod Phase 0 180 deg Sets how the chorus or flanger sound is spread Mod Pre Delay 0 50 0 ms Adjusts the delay time from the direct sound until the chorus or flanger sound is heard Mod Feedback 98 98 Adjusts the proportion of the ef fect sound that is fed back into the effect Negative settings will invert the phase Xover LowFreq 50 4000 Hz Attenuates the effect in the range below the specified fre quency Xover Low Gain 36 0 dB Specifies how greatly the low range will be attenuated Parameter Value Description Distortion OD DS Selects wheth
139. 0000 aaaa Part 8 Receive Channel 0 15 ERE 1 16 00 7F 00 Patch Arpeggio Note 16 00 1C 0000 000a Part 9 Receive Switch 0 1 I OFF ON 00 1D 0000 aaaa Part 9 Receive Channel 0 15 I I 1 16 OSetup 00 1E 0000 000a Part 10 Receive Switch 0 1 I OFF ON I 00 1F 0000 aaaa Part 10 Receive Channel 0 15 Offset I I I I 1 16 I Address Description I 00 20 0000 000a Part 11 Receive Switch 0 1 I I I I OFF ON l 00 00 Oaaa aaaa Part 1 Bank Select MSB CC 0 0 127 00 21 0000 aaaa Part 11 Receive Channel 0 15 l 00 01 Oaaa aaaa Part 1 Bank Select LSB CC 32 0 127 1 16 l 00 02 Oaaa aaaa Part 1 Program Number PC 0 127 00 22 0000 000a Part 12 Receive Switch 0 1 I 00 03 Oaaa aaaa Part 2 Bank Select MSB CC 0 0 127 OFF ON l 00 04 Oaaa aaaa Part 2 Bank Select LSB CC 32 0 127 00 23 0000 aaaa Part 12 Receive Channel 0 15 I 00 05 Oaaa aaaa Part 2 Program Number PC 0 127 I I I 1 16 00 06 Oaaa aaaa Part 3 Bank Select MSB CC 0 0 127 00 24 0000 000a Part 13 Receive Switch 0 1 I 00 07 Oaaa aaaa Part 3 Bank Select LSB CC 32 0 127 OFF ON l 00 08 Oaaa aaaa Part 3 Program Number PC 0 127 00 25 0000 aaaa Part 13 Receive Channel 0 15 00 09 Oaaa aaaa
140. 1 Value 50 63 80 100 125 160 200 250 315 400 500 630 800 1000 1250 1600 2000 2500 3150 4000 5000 6300 8000 10000 12500 16000 20000 Hz MID 1 Gain Adjusts the gain of the middle range 1 Positive settings will emphasize the middle range 1 Value 15 15 dB MID2Q Adjusts the width of the middle range 2 Set a higher value for Q to narrow the range to be affected Value 0 5 0 7 1 0 2 0 4 0 8 0 MID 2 Freq Mid 2 Frequency Selects the frequency of the middle range 2 Value 50 63 80 100 125 160 200 250 315 400 500 630 800 1000 1250 1600 2000 2500 3150 4000 5000 6300 8000 10000 12500 16000 20000 Hz MID 2 Gain Adjusts the gain of the middle range 1 Positive settings will emphasize the middle range 2 Value 15 15 dB High Freq High Frequency Selects the frequency of the high range Value 2000 4000 5000 6300 8000 10000 12500 16000 20000 Hz HIGH Gain Adjusts the gain of the high frequency Positive settings will emphasize the high frequency range Value 15 15 dB TOTAL Gain Adjusts the total gain Value 15 15 dB MIDI USB SYSTEM Com MIDI USB Y Master Clock Source a EXTERNAL e Rx PC RxBank RXxSys Ex TxEdit Clock Out ON ON ON USB Setup DI Device ID ps common rover U LINK Device ID Device ID Number When you want to transmit or receive System E
141. 1 Access the PATCH PLAY screen p 21 Patch number PATCH PLAY MadOrchestra Z 011 Chi Tx RX Rx i 120 0 Trans C 00t 0 Zone a1 1 MadOrchestra Common J osti 05c2 roo sos EE E e 2 Move the cursor to the patch number either by using the cursor buttons or by touching the patch number display 3 Turn the VALUE dial or press INC DEC to select a patch number You can also do this by dragging on the touch screen 21 Patch Mode ing in uwa Play Playing in Patch Mode Selecting Favorite Patches Patch Palette You can bring together your favorite and most frequently used patches in one place by registering them into the patch palette By using this function you can rapidly select favorite patches from internal memory or a Wave Expansion Board IS For details on how to register a patch in the patch palette refer to Registering a Favorite Patch Patch Palette p 35 1 Access the PATCH PLAY screen p 21 2 Press NUMBER 1 8 to select a patch ASSIGN PATCH PALETTE ess 1 2 3 6 7 8 BANK 990 990 oo 900 990 900 990 909 899 889 889 889 889 880 880 989 86 86 86 86 86 86 86 Ses 3 To switch the patch palette bank hold down BANK and press NUMBER 1 8 When you press BANK the indicator of the currently selected bank button NUMBER 1 8 will blink NUMBER 4 5 If you continue pressing PATCH ASSIGN
142. 1 5 In edit screens the Adjust function moves the Edit Start Edit End or Current locations to the nearest of the following locations 1 7 Sample Start location Sample End location Loop Start location Loop End location Current location Edit Start location Edit End location NO Q FWD Move the cursor to the point that you want to adjust Start End or Current and touch or Touching will move the point toward the left and touching will move it toward the right MEMO In the SAMPLE Encode screen p 69 this will move the Current location to the closest event HINT For example if you wish to touch lt PREVIEW gt to check whether the results of your editing were satisfactory you can jump the current location von In some cases nothing may happen due to the relation between points or the Length Lock setting 65 MU Creating and Editing Samples Sample Mode Creating and Editing Samples Sample Mode zero zero Zero Cross Search This function searches for locations where the sample has a value of zero When setting loop points or when cutting the sample you should search for locations where the sample value is zero so that noise is not heard when you play the sample Move the cursor to the point Start End or Current for which you want to find a zero cross point and then touch or Touching will search toward the left and touching will search toward the
143. 1 Assign 0 95 l l 100 100 I I OFF CC01 CC31 CC33 CC95 IE 00 3A 0000 aaaa I 00 15 Oaaa aaaa Knob 2 Assign 0 95 0000 bbbb Patch Scale Tune for E 28 228 I OFF CC01 CC31 CC33 CC95 I 100 100 IE 00 3C 0000 aaaa I I 00 16 0000 Oaaa Hold Pedal Polarity 0 1 I 0000 bbbb Patch Scale Tune for F 28 228 I STANDARD REVERSE I I 100 100 I 14 00 3E 0000 aaaa I 00 17 Oaaa aaaa Pedal 1 Assign 0 98 0000 bbbb Patch Scale Tune for F 28 228 l OFF CC01 CC31 CC33 CC95 I 100 100 I BEND UP BEND DOWN AFT 00 40 0000 aaaa I 00 18 0000 Oaaa Pedal 1 Polarity 0 1 0000 bbbb Patch Scale Tune for G 28 228 I STANDARD REVERSE l l I 100 100 00 19 Oaaa aaaa Pedal 2 Assign 0 98 ES 00 42 0000 aaaa I I I OFF CCOl CC31 CC33 CC95 0000 bbbb Patch Scale Tune for G 28 228 I BEND UP BEND DOWN AFT 100 100 I 00 1A 0000 Oaaa Pedal 2 Polarity 0 1 E 00 44 0000 aaaa I I STANDARD REVERSE 0000 bbbb Patch Scale Tune for A 28 228 l I I I 100 100 00 00 00 1B Total Size I ES 00 46 0000 aaaa I I 0000 bbbb Patch Scale Tune for A 28 228 I 100 100 ES 00 48 0000 aaaa OPatch Common I 0000 bbbb Patch S
144. 127 4 63 63 I 00 4B Oaaa aaaa Env 6 Decay Velocity Sens 127 I I I 63 63 OPatch Envelope I 00 4C Oaaa aaaa Env 6 Release Velocity Sens 1 127 I I I 63 63 hi I 00 4D OOaa aaaa Env 6 Time Keyfollow 44 84 Offset I I I I I 200 200 Address Description js H us I 4 00 4E 0000 aaaa I is 00 00 0000 aaaa I I 0000 bbbb Env 1 Attack Time 0 144 0000 bbbb Env 7 Attack Time Deed ul 0 127 MUSICAL NOTES 0 127 MUSICAL NOTES js 00 02 0000 aaaa I H 00 50 0000 aaaa I I 0000 bbbb Env 1 Decay Time 0 144 l 0000 bbbb Env 7 Decay Time 0 144 0 127 MUSICAL NOTES 0 127 MUSICAL NOTES I 00 52 Oaaa aaaa Env 7 Sustine 0 127 I 00 04 Oaaa aaaa Env 1 Sustine 0 127 4 00 05 0000 aaaa l It OO 2S COO a aan I 0000 bbbb Env 1 Release Time 0 144 l 0000 bbbb Env 7 Release Time 0 127 MUSICAL NOTES l Bos cDON MUSICAL NOTES tl 00 55 0000 Oaaa Env 7 Velocity Curve 0 7 I 00 07 0000 Oaaa Env 1 Velocity Curve 0 7 Y iiy 25 FIXED 1 7 00 56 0 Env 7 Velocity S 1 127 00 08 Oaaa aaaa Env 1 Velocity Sens 1 127 98a aaae Dy SOS HEY Sens E I I I 63 63 u I 00 09 Oaaa aaaa Env 1 Attack Velocity Sens 11 4x RU I paaa agaa d T Aeran Ve Tocitv Tecos ea
145. 17 SIE Overview of the V Synth Overview of the V Synth Basic Operation of the V Synth Changing Operating Modes MO DE The V Synth has eight operating modes Patch mode Sample mode System mode Disk mode USB mode Calibration mode Factory reset mode and Demo play mode To access the desired V Synth feature you must select the appropriate mode Here s how to change modes 1 Press MODE The V SYNTH MODE MENU window appears SYNTH MODE MENU PATCH SAMPLE Q USB areng FACTORY DEMO i in tf 2 Touch the touch screen to select the desired mode When you select a mode the screen for that mode appears The currently selected mode is shown in the upper left of each screen LIW PETT Es JI poi MadOrchestra Patch Mode PATCH PLAY for ana TVA Effect Common O5C1 0502 MoD COSM1 In this mode you can play a single patch from the keyboard and edit patch settings Sample Mode SAMPLE Top In this mode you can sample the waves that form the basis of the sounds you create and edit the sampled waves System Mode SYSTEM Com Master jj eem In this mode you can set the overall behavior of the V Synth such as its tuning and how it handles received MIDI messages Disk Mode DISK UTILITY MENU In this mode you can perform operations related to disks such as saving data on a disk or loading data from a disk Ove
146. 200 x 3072 8192 75 cents of Pitch Bend is being applied to MIDI channel 11 lt Example4 gt B3 64 00 65 00 06 OC 26 00 64 7F 65 7F BnH is the Control Change status and n is the MIDI channel number For Control Changes the 2nd byte is the control number and the 3rd byte is the value In a case in which two or more messages consecutive messages have the same status MIDI has a provision called running status which allows the status byte of the second and following messages to be omitted Thus the above messages have the following meaning B3 6400 MIDI ch 4 lower byte of RPN parameter number 00H B3 6500 MIDI ch 4 upper byte of RPN parameter number 00H B3 060C MIDI ch 4 upper byte of parameter value 0CH B3 2600 MIDI ch 4 lower byte of parameter value 00H B3 647F MIDI ch 4 lower byte of RPN parameter number 7FH B3 65 7F MIDI ch 4 upper byte of RPN parameter number 7FH In other words the above messages specify a value of 0C 00H for RPN parameter number 00 00H on MIDI channel 4 and then set the RPN parameter number to 7F 7FH RPN parameter number 00 00H is Pitch Bend Sensitivity and the MSB of the value indicates semitone units so a value of OCH 12 sets the maximum pitch bend range to 12 semitones 1 octave On GS sound generators the LSB of Pitch Bend Sensitivity is ignored but the LSB should be transmitted anyway with a value of 0 so that operation will be correct on any device
147. 3 distortion For details on envelope settings refer to Making Envelope Settings p 48 Tone Tone 2 0 127 Tonal character Tone KF 200 200 Key follow setting for tone Tone LFO Depth 63 63 Amount of LFO applied to 4 tone For details on envelope settings refer to Making Envelope Settings p 48 LFO For details on LFO settings refer to Making LFO Settings p 49 E Appendices COSM List ma Amp Simulator Simulates an amp 1st order SideBandFilter By boosting the fundamental and overtones you can apply a pitch to unpitched input sounds such as a noise or a drum phrase Parameter Value Description COSM Type Amp Type 1 3 Type of guitar amp Bass 0 127 Tone of the bass mid tre Middle ble range Treble Output Level 0 127 Output Level Gain Gain 1 0 127 Degree of distortion Gain LFO Depth 63 63 Amount of LFO applied to 3 distortion For details on envelope settings refer to Making Envelope Settings p 48 LFO For details on LFO settings refer to Making LFO Settings p 49 aa Speaker Simulator Simulates the speaker type Parameter Value Description COSM Type Speaker Type 1 12 Resonator Simulates the resonance of a guitar body Parameter Value Desc
148. 31 CC33 CC95 BEND AFT l I I PAD X PAD Y PAD X PAD Y TRIP R I I I BEAM L BEAM R KNOB1 KNOB2 VELO KEYF I 00 69 Oaaa aaaa Matrix Control 7 Dest 1 0 77 OFF OSCI PITCH OSCI TIME PW OSC1 FORMA FAT OSC1 LVL OSC1 PENV ATK OSC1 PENV DCY OSC1 PENV REL OSCI TENV ATK OSCI TENV DCY OSC1 TENV REL OSC1 FENV ATK OSC1 FENV DCY OSC1 FENV REL OSCI AENV ATK OSCI AENV DCY OSC1 AENV REL OSCI LFO RATE OSCI LFO PCH OSC1 LFO TM PW OSCI LFO FR FT OSC1 LFO LVL OSC2 PITCH OSC2 TIME PW OSC2 FORMA FAT OSC2 LVL OSC2 PENV ATK OSC2 PENV DCY OSC2 PENV REL OSC2 TENV ATK OSC2 TENV DCY OSC2 TENV REL OSC2 FENV ATK OSC2 FENV DCY OSC2 FENV REL OSC2 AENV ATK OSC2 AENV DCY OSC2 AENV REL OSC2 LFO RATE OSC2 LFO PCH OSC2 LFO TM PW OSC2 LFO FR FT OSC2 LFO LVL CSM1 PRM1 CSM1 PRM2 CSM1 ENV1 ATK CSM1 ENV1 DCY CSM1 ENV1 REL CSM1 ENV2 ATK CSM1 ENV2 DCY CSM1 ENV2 REL CSM1 LFO RATE CSM1 LFO PRM1 CSM1 LFO PRM2 CSM2 PRM1 CSM2 PRM2 CSM2 ENV1 ATK CSM2 ENV1 DCY CSM2 ENV1 REL CSM2 ENV2 ATK CSM2 ENV2 DCY CSM2 ENV2 REL CSM2 LFO RATE CSM2 LFO PRM1 CSM2 LFO PRM2 TVA LVL TVA ENV ATK TVA ENV DCY TVA ENV REL TVA LFO RATE TVA LFO LVL TVA LFO PAN MFX SEND
149. 4 0000 aaaa I I 0000 bbbb I l 0000 cccc I I 0000 dddd MFX Parameter 21 12768 52768 OPatch Reverb I I I 20000 20000 ES 00 58 0000 aaaa I I 0000 bbbb I Offset I I 0000 cece I Address Description I 0000 dddd MFX Parameter 22 12768 52768 I I I I 20000 20000 I 00 00 0000 aaaa Reverb Type 0 10 E 00 5C 0000 aaaa I I I I I 0000 bbbb I 00 01 Oaaa aaaa Reverb Master Level 0 127 I 0000 cccc Js i E I 0000 dddd MFX Parameter 23 12768 52768 E 00 02 0000 aaaa I I I 20000 20000 0000 bbbb I ES 00 60 0000 aaaa I I 0000 cccc I I 0000 bbbb I I 0000 dddd Reverb Parameter 1 12768 52768 I 0000 cccc I I I I 20000 20000 I 0000 dddd MFX Parameter 24 12768 52768 IE 00 06 0000 aaaa I I I I 20000 20000 0000 bbbb I ES 00 64 0000 aaaa I I 0000 cccc I I 0000 bbbb I I 0000 dddd Reverb Parameter 2 12768 52768 I 0000 cccc I I I I 20000 20000 I 0000 dddd MFX Parameter 25 12768 52768 E 00 0A 0000 aaaa I 20000 20000 0000 bbbb E 00 68 0000 aaaa I I 0000 cccc I I 0000 bbbb I I 0000 dddd Reverb Parameter 3 12768 52768 I 0000 cccc I I I I 20000 20000 I 0000 dddd MFX Parameter 26 12768 52768 E 00 OE 0000 aaaa I I I I
150. 4 Range Upper 0 127 OFF CC01 CC31 CC33 CC95 I I I c 1 G9 I 00 0C Oaaa aaaa Beam 3 Assign L 0 95 00 2F 0aaa aaaa Zone 15 Range Upper 0 127 OFF CC01 CC31 CC33 CC95 I I C 1 G9 I 00 OD Oaaa aaaa Beam 3 Assign R 0 95 00 30 0aaa aaaa Zone 16 Range Upper 0 127 OFF CC01 CC31 CC33 CC95 I I I c 1 69 00 OE Oaaa aaaa Beam 4 Assign L 0 95 l I I I OFF CC01 CC31 CC33 CC95 00 31 0000 000a Scale Tune Switch 0 1 I 00 OF Oaaa aaaa Beam 4 Assign R 0 95 I OFF ON l I I OFF CC01 CC31 CC33 CC95 14 00 32 0000 aaaa I 0000 bbbb Patch Scale Tune for C 28 228 I 00 10 Oaaa aaaa Pad Assign X 0 95 l 100 100 I I OFF CC01 CC31 CC33 CC95 14 00 34 0000 aaaa I 00 11 Oaaa aaaa Pad Assign Y 0 95 0000 bbbb Patch Scale Tune for C 28 228 I OFF CC01 CC31 CC33 CC95 I I I 100 100 I 00 12 Oaaa aaaa Time Trip Assign X 0 95 14 00 36 0000 aaaa I I OFF CC01 CC31 CC33 CC95 0000 bbbb Patch Scale Tune for D 28 228 00 13 Oaaa aaaa Time Trip Assign Y 0 95 l 100 100 I I OFF CC01 CC31 CC33 CC95 IE 00 38 0000 aaaa I 0000 bbbb Patch Scale Tune for D 28 228 I 00 14 Oaaa aaaa Knob
151. 6 I Pal j I r 20 00 00 00 User Patch 001 I Offset l I 20 01 00 00 User Patch 002 I Address Description zo I ES 00 00 0000 aaaa I 28 7F 00 00 User Patch 512 II I 0600 SEE l 0000 cccc I 0000 dddd Master Tune 24 2024 100 0 100 0 cent OSystem 00 04 O0aa aaaa Master Key Shift 40 88 I I 24 24 Offset 00 05 Oaaa aaaa Master Level 0 127 Address Description i 00 06 0000 000a Patch Remain 0 1 I I I I OFF ON I 00 00 00 System Common I 00 07 0000 000a Mix Parallel 0 1 00 40 00 System Controller I HJ ai MIX PARALLEL E I 00 08 0000 000a Clock Source 0 1 I INT MIDI OPatch 00 09 0000 000a Clock Out 0 1 OFF ON A I 4 Offset I I 00 0A 0000 000a Receive Program Change 0 1 Address Description I OFF ON i i I 00 OB 0000 000a Receive Bank Select 0 1 00 00 00 Patch Common l OFF ON 00 02 00 Patch MFX I I 00 04 00 Patch Chorus I I 00 OC 0000 000a Part 1 Receive Switch 0 1 00 06 00 Patch Reverb l OFF ON I 00 08 00 Patch Controller I 00 OD 0000 aaaa Part 1 Receive Channel 0 15 I 4 I 1 16 I 00 10 00 Patch Oscillator Zone 1 00 OE 0000 000a Part 2 Receive Switch 0 1 l 00 11 00 Patch Oscillator Zone 2 l OFF ON
152. 8 52768 IE 00 0B 0000 aaaa I I I 20000 20000 I 0000 bbbb I ES 00 2C 0000 aaaa I I 0000 cccc I 0000 bbbb I I 0000 dddd Chorus Parameter 3 12768 52768 I 0000 cccc I I I 20000 20000 I 0000 dddd MEX Parameter 11 12768 52768 E 00 OF 0000 aaaa I I I I 20000 20000 I 0000 bbbb I ES 00 30 0000 aaaa I I 0000 cccc I I 0000 bbbb I I 0000 dddd Chorus Parameter 4 12768 52768 I 0000 cccc I I I 20000 20000 I 0000 dddd MEX Parameter 12 12768 52768 IE 00 13 0000 aaaa I I I 20000 20000 0000 bbbb I ES 00 34 0000 aaaa I I 0000 cccc I 0000 bbbb I I 0000 dddd Chorus Parameter 5 12768 52768 0000 cccc I I I 20000 20000 I 0000 dddd MEX Parameter 13 12768 52768 El 00 17 0000 aaaa I I I I 20000 20000 I 0000 bbbb I ES 00 38 0000 aaaa I I 0000 cccc I 0000 bbbb I I 0000 dddd Chorus Parameter 6 12768 52768 I 0000 cccc I I I I 20000 20000 I 0000 dddd MFX Parameter 14 12768 52768 IE 00 1B 0000 aaaa I I I I 20000 20000 I 0000 bbbb I ES 00 3C 0000 aaaa I I 0000 cccc I l 0000 bbbb I 0000 dddd Chorus Parameter 7 12768 52768 I 0000 cccc I I I 20000 20000 0000 dddd MEX Parameter 15 12768 52768 IE 00 1F 0000 aaaa I I I
153. AMA TEL 315 0101 PARAGUAY Distribuidora De Instrumentos Musicales J E Olear y ESQ Manduvira Asuncion PARAGUAY TEL 021 492 124 URUGUAY Todo Musica S A Francisco Acuna de Figueroa 1771 C P 11 800 Montevideo URUGUAY TEL 02 924 2335 VENEZUELA Musicland Digital C A Av Francisco de Miranda Centro Parque de Cristal Nivel C2 Local 20 Caracas VENEZUELA TEL 212 285 8586 AUSTRIA Roland Austria GES M B H Siemensstrasse 4 P O Box 74 A 6063 RUM AUSTRIA TEL 0512 26 44 260 BELGIUM HOLLAND LUXEMBOURG Roland Benelux N V Houtstraat 3 B 2260 Oevel Westerlo BELGIUM TEL 014 575811 DENMARK Roland Scandinavia A S Nordhavnsvej 7 Postbox 880 DK 2100 Copenhagen DENMARK TEL 3916 6200 FRANCE Roland France SA 4 Rue Paul Henri SPAAK Parc de l Esplanade F 77 462 St Thibault Lagny Cedex FRANCE TEL 01 600 73 500 FINLAND Roland Scandinavia As Filial Finland Elannontie 5 FIN 01510 Vantaa FINLAND TEL 0 9 68 24 020 GERMANY Roland Elektronische Musikinstrumente HmbH Oststrasse 96 22844 Norderstedt GERMANY TEL 040 52 60090 GREECE STOLLAS S A Music Sound Light 155 New National Road Patras 26442 GREECE TEL 2610 435400 HUNGARY Roland East Europe Ltd Warehouse Area DEPO Pf 83 H 2046 Torokbalint HUNGARY TEL 23 511011 IRELAND Roland Ireland Audio House Belmont Court Donnybrook Dublin 4 Republic of IRELAND TEL 01 2603501 ITA
154. Beam D Beam Sens L R D Beam Sensitivity L R 0 200 D Beam 1 4 Assign L R OFF CC01 31 CC33 95 Pedal Hold Polarity Hold Pedal Polarity STANDARD REVERSE Pedal 1 2 Assign OFF CC01 31 CC33 95 BEND UP BEND DOWN AFTERTOUCH 109 MEE Appendices Parameter List V LINK Group p 80 Parameter Value Tx Channel V LINK MIDI Channel 1 16 Audio V LINK Audio Switch OFF ON Output V LINK Keyboard Output Fade Switch OFF ON Local Sw V LINK Patch Palette Local Switch OFF ON TT Pad Knob Local Sw V LINK Time Trip Pad Local Switch OFF ON X Assign XY V LINK X Assign XY OFF PLAYBACK SPEED DISSOLVE TIME AUDIO LEVEL COLOR CB COLOR CR BRIGHTNESS VFX1 VFX2 VFX3 VFX4 OUT PUT FADE T BAR Y Assign XY V LINK X Assign XY OFF PLAYBACK SPEED DISSOLVE TIME AUDIO LEVEL COLOR CB COLOR CR BRIGHTNESS VFX1 VFX2 VFX3 VFX4 OUT PUT FADE T BAR Assign TT V LINK Assign Time Trip OFF TIME TRIP Local Sw V LINK Knob1 2 Local Switch OFF ON 1 2 Assign V LINK Knob1 2 Assign OFF PLAYBACK SPEED DISSOLVE TIME AUDIO LEVEL COLOR CB COLOR CR BRIGHTNESS VFX1 VFX2 VFX3 VFX4 OUT PUT FADE T BAR Beam Local Sw V LINK D Beam Local Switch OFF ON 14 Assign L R V LINK D Beam1 4 Assign L R OFF PLAYBACK SPEED DISSOLVE TIME AUDIO LEVEL COLOR CB COLOR CR BRIGHTNESS VFX1 VFX2 VFX3 VFX4 OUT PUT FADE T BAR
155. Bu Nominal Input Level INPUT LINE 20 dBu INPUT MIC 46 dBu Arpeggiator Patterns User programmable support use of control change messages Motifs 8 types Tempo 20 to 250 BPM Display Graphic 320 x 240 dot backlit LCD with touch screen Controllers Pitch Bend Modulation Lever Time Trip Pad D Beam Controller Twin beam Assignable Control Knobs C1 C2 Connectors Headphones Jack Main Output Jacks L MONO R 1 4 inch phone type Direct Output Jacks L R 1 4 inch phone type Input Jacks L R 1 4 inch phone type Equipped with line mic gain switch Hold Pedal Jack Control Pedal Jacks 1 2 assignable MIDI Connectors IN OUT THRU USB Connector Digital Audio Interface 24 bits S P DIF COAXIAL IN OUT OPTICAL IN OUT AC Inlet O Power Supply AC 117 V AC 230 V AC 240 V O Power Consumption 16 W O Dimensions 1 056 W x 398 D x 111 H mm 41 5 8 W x 15 11 16 D x 4 3 8 H inches O Weight 13 1 kg 28 lbs 15 oz O Accessories Quick Start Owner s Manual Sound List CD ROM Driver PC CARD Protector Power Cable O Options Keyboard Stand KS 12 Pedal Switch DP 2 6 8 Foot Switch BOSS FS 5U BOSS FV 300L Expression Pedal EV 5 Microphone DR 20 0 dBu 0 775 V rms In the interest of product improvement the specifications and or appearance of this unit are subject to change without prior notice 172 Symbols OCT AA hama eec eec brace cae e e
156. By Name 4 Sort By Name Sort By Size 4 Sort By Size Current Int Internal pr 3s 2 Choose the desired sorting order from the pull down menu Sort By Name A gt Sort in alphabetical order of file name Sort By Name Y gt Sort in reverse alphabetical order of file name Sort By Size A gt Sort in ascending order of file size Sort By Size Y Sort in descending order of file size Loading a Project from Disk into the V Synth Load Project This function loads a project on disk into the V Synth s work area von When a project is loaded work area will be rewritten If work area contains important data you must save it to disk before you load other data 1 Access the DISK UTILITY MENU screen p 83 2 Touch Load Project gt The Disk Load Project screen appears DISK Load Project a 66 7 M6 Free hd Internal Current IntInternal pr 3s 3 To load from internal memory touch Int To load from a PC card touch lt Card gt Then select the project that you want to load 4 Touch lt OK gt A WARNING window like the following appears LOAD PROJECT Are You Sure CANCEL EXECUTE K Tf you want to cancel the procedure at this point touch lt CANCEL gt 5 Touch lt EXECUTE gt to execute the operation Disk Related Functions Disk Mode Saving Project on Disk Save Project Save the project in the work
157. Depth 1 127 I 63 63 00 38 0000 OOaa OSC 1 Time Offset 0 2 I I BWD ZERO FWD 00 39 0aaa aaaa OSC 1 Formant 1 127 I I 63 63 00 3A 00aa aaaa OSC 1 Formant Keyfollow 44 84 I I 200 200 00 3B Oaaa aaaa OSC 1 Formant LFO Depth 1 127 I I 63 63 00 3C Oaaa aaaa OSC 1 Formant Envelope Depth 1 127 I I 63 63 00 3D 0000 000a OSC 1 Tempo Sync Sw 0 1 I I OFF ON 00 3E 0000 000a OSC 1 Robot Voice Sw 0 1 I I OFF ON 00 3F 0000 OOaa OSC 1 Playback Mode 0 3 I I RETRIGGER LEGATO STEP EVENT 00 40 0000 000a OSC 1 Loop Sw 0 1 I I OFF ON 00 41 0000 OOOa OSC 1 Vari Sw 0 1 I I OFF ON 00 42 Oaaa aaaa OSC 1 Energy 0 127 I I OFF 1 127 00 43 0000 000a OSC 1 Time Trip Sw 0 1 I I OFF ON 00 44 0000 OOOa OSC 1 Time Trip Beat Keep 0 1 I I OFF ON 00 45 0000 000a OSC 2 Switch 0 1 I I OFF ON 00 46 0000 OOaa OSC 2 Type 0 2 I I ANALOG PCM EXTIN 00 47 000a aaaa OSC 2 Wave Gain 52 76 I I 12 12 dB 00 48 Oaaa aaaa OSC 2 Pitch 1 127 I I 63 63 00 49 O0aa aaaa OSC 2 Pitch Keyfollow 44 84 I I 200 200 00 4A Oaaa aaaa OSC 2 Pitch LFO Depth 1 127 I I 63 63 00 4B Oaaa aaaa OSC 2 Pitch Envelope Depth 1 127 I I 63 63 00 4C Oaaa aaaa OSC 2 Coarse Tune 16 112 I I 48 48
158. Dest 2 0 77 I I I OFF I I I OSCI PITCH OSCI TIME PW OSC1 FORMA FAT I I I OSC1 LVL I I I OSCI PENV ATK OSCI PENV DCY OSC1 PENV REL I I I OSCI TENV ATK OSCI TENV DCY OSCI TENV REL I I I OSCI FENV ATK OSCI FENV DCY OSCI FENV REL I I I OSCI AENV ATK OSCI AENV DCY OSCI AENV REL I I I OSC1 LFO RATE OSCI LFO PCH OSCI LFO TM PW I I I OSCI LFO FR FT OSC1 LFO LVL I I I OSC2 PITCH OSC2 TIME PW OSC2 FORMA FAT I I I OSC2 LVL I I I OSC2 PENV ATK OSC2 PENV DCY OSC2 PENV REL I I I OSC2 TENV ATK OSC2 TENV DCY OSC2 TENV REL I I I OSC2 FENV ATK OSC2 FENV DCY OSC2 FENV REL I I I OSC2 AENV ATK OSC2 AENV DCY OSC2 AENV REL I I I OSC2 LFO RATE OSC2 LFO PCH OSC2 LFO TM PW I I I OSC2 LFO FR FT OSC2 LFO LVL I I I CSM1 PRM1 CSM1 PRM2 I I I CSMI ENVI ATK CSMI ENVI DCY CSM1 ENV1 REL I I I CSMI ENV2 ATK CSMI ENV2 DCY CSM1 ENV2 REL I I I CSMI LFO RATE CSM1 LFO PRM1 CSMI LFO PRM2 I I I CSM2 PRM1 CSM2 PRM2 I I I CSM2 ENV1 ATK CSM2 ENVI DCY CSM2 ENV1 REL I I I CSM2 ENV2 ATK CSM2 ENV2 DCY CSM2 ENV2 REL I I I CSM2 LFO RATE CSM2 LFO PRM1 CSM2 LFO PRM2 I I I TVA LVL I I I TVA ENV ATK TVA ENV DCY TVA ENV REL I I I TVA LFO RATE TVA LFO LVL TVA LFO PAN I I I MFX SEND CHO SEND REV SEND I I I MFX PRM1 MFX PRM2 MFX PRM3 I 00 67 Oaaa aaaa Matrix Control 6 Sens 2 1 127 I I I 63 63 I 00 68 Oaaa aaaa Matrix Control 7 Source 0 108 l I OFF CC01 CC
159. E S aren Ween ates 79 81 Bean Local Written Do 81 Beat eene eei t e RR RE de een 62 Beat Keep T O Bend Assign an aa S u as asa Bend Local Sw Bend Range Down A Bend Range Up see s ana aeae AEEA E KENESE en ESEAS n S C e 12 30 62 sa una te up neue mente Me ETAT 12 30 CALIBRATION MENU hohes iseseisana KE Eei EESE 99 Calibration mode 19 99 CHO aaa NIRE E MUL u Te rM IL NOS 51 CHO Master Level cocto nire ei ee greet 51 CHO Send xit eite etin d eedem Dans 50 CHO To REV co E be b E 51 CHO Type aps HORE RH e EEA 51 CHORUS ctii es 14 Chorus master level 501 Chorus on off switch nbl Chorus reverb send level bl Chorus send level a creer dete eed 50 Chorus type Clean Project Clock Out Clock Source R8 c SER COAXIAL IN QUT ua aasan eve rea rre a 15 Common P t li 1 eir eie idee iei Reiten 36 Syste 74 Compare a 35 Compare function aq y ua netten 35 Controller Controller section ua SN ni iiit 16 GODys cuisses Msc ADAE rt 87 Files Folders 87 Patch 033 COSM switch we 46 COSM Type cote te dde 46 COSME 5 sett eee T Sa Ed 13 COSM1 COSM2 46 COSM2 za 19 Count In we 62 CTER2 PEDALDJa aCE tere ee aiii 15 ETRE TPEDAL jack tre tete 15 Cursor uA Cursor DU Mii 13 20 CUTOEE nete tete O ad Bhs 14 D Beam 1 4 Assign L R D B
160. F ON von Effects settings change as soon as you switch to a new patch without being influenced by the Patch Remain setting Because of this certain effects settings can cause notes that were until then sounding to no longer be heard even though Patch Remain has been set to on Powerup Mode Specifies the condition that the V Synth will be in when the power is turned on Value LAST SET Reinstates the patch selected at the time the V Synth was last turned off DEFAULT The V Synth will be ready to play Patch 001 IO External Input Type Mix Parallel Output Gain Digital Output Freq Para x 44 1 Nel kHz common a par External Input Type Selects the type of external input used when Oscillator Type p 42 is set to EXT IN Value STEREO L R Input in stereo MONORAL MIX Mix the L and R input signals and input in monaural MONORAL L Input the L signal in monaural MONORAL R Input the R signal in monaural Mix Parallel Specifies how the sound of the entire V Synth will be output Value MIX Set this to have the collective output of all sounds output from the OUTPUT A MIX jacks When you want to check the final overall sound being output set to MIX HINT Sounds output from the PHONES jack are the same as those output from the MIX OUT jacks Therefore any sounds set with Output Assign to be output from the DIRECT OUT jacks is not output from the PHONES jack Be sur
161. F Time Trip Time Pitch Assignable Bend Range Up Pitch Bend Range Up 0 48 Bend Range Down Pitch Bend Range Down 0 48 TT Pad Mode Time Trip Pad Mode XY TT Hold Time Trip Pad Hold Switch OFF ON Matrix Ctrl Source Matrix Control Source OFF CC01 31 CC33 95 BEND AFT PAD X Y PAD X Y TRIP R BEAM L R KNOB1 2 VELO KEYF Sens Matrix Control Sens 63 63 Destination 1 2 Matrix Control Destination 1 2 Arpeggio Arpeggio Switch OFF ON Patch Tempo 20 0 250 0 Hold Arpeggio Hold Switch OFF ON Octave Range Arpeggio Octave Range 3 3 KBD Velo Arpeggio Keyboard Velocity REAL 1 127 Duration Arpeggio Duration 0 100 Motif Arpeggio Motif UP DOWN UP amp DOWN RANDOM NOTE ORDER RHYTHM PHRASE AUTO Shuffle Rate Arpeggio Shuffle Rate 0 100 Shuffle Resolution Arpeggio Shuffle Resolution O Eighth note Tune Patch Coarse Tune 48 48 Patch Fine Tune 50 50 Scale Tune Scale Tune Switch OFF ON Scale Tune C B 100 100 Zone Current Zone Zone 01 16 Zone 01 16 Range Hi C 1 G9 OSCI 2 PITCH OSC1 2 TIME PW OSC1 2 FORMA FAT OSC1 2 LVL OSC1 2 PENV ATK OSC1 2 PENV DCY OSC1 2 PENV REL OSC1 2 TENV ATK OSC1 2 TENV DCY OSC1 2 TENV REL OSC1 2 FENV ATK OSC1 2 FENV DCY OSC1 2 FENV REL OSC1 2 AENV ATK OSC1 2 AENV DCY OSC1 2 AENV REL OSC1 2 LFO RATE OSC1 2 LFO PCH OSC1 2 LFO TM PW OSC1 2 LFO FR FT OSC1 2 LFO LVL CSM1 2 PRM1 CSM1 2 PRM2 CSM1 2 ENV1 ATK CSM1 2 ENV1 DCY CSM1 2 E
162. FF a Touch lt OK gt to apply the settings of this window or touch lt Cancel gt to cancel and close the window USB Mode Selects the mode in which the USB connector will be used Available Settings Storage Storage mode Select this if you want to transfer files MIDI MIDI mode Select this if you want to exchange MIDI messages with a sequencer or other program o m must switch the USB Mode before you connect the V Synth to your computer via the USB cable If you change this setting while the V Synth is connected the computer may fail to recognize it correctly u For details on connections to your computer in each USB Mode refer to Connecting Your Computer Via USB USB Mode USB MIDI Thru Sw USB MIDI Thru Switch When USB Mode is set to MIDI this switch specifies whether MIDI messages received at the MIDI connector will be re transmitted from the MIDI OUT connector ON or not OFF Value OFF ON USB OUT USB IN MIDI OUT MIDI IN Sound Generator Section Controller Section Local Switch USB MIDI Thru Sw OFF MIDI OUT MIDI IN USB OUT USB IN t Sound Generator Section Controller Section Local Switch USB MIDI Thru Sw ON Settings Common to All Modes System Mode Part MIDI SYSTEM Com Part MIDI bd Part4 Rx Sw fE Rx Sw El Rx Sw El Rx Sw El
163. I I 63 63 l 00 OA Oaaa aaaa Env 1 Decay Velocity Sens 1 127 l 90 58 Qaaa aaaa Env 7 Decay Velocity Sens Be n l I I I 63 63 r I 00 OB Oaaa aaaa Env 1 Release Velocity Sens d 127 00 59 dara atea ny Release Vetocity Sens REL I I 63 63 x CRETAE RESTOS ew Cade asc d I 00 5A 00aa aaaa Env 7 Time Keyfollow 44 84 I I 200 200 I I 200 200 ie d a al i E 00 5B 0000 aaaa I E 00 OD 0000 aaaa I I 0000 bbbb Env 2 Attack Time 0 144 l 0000 bbbb Env 8 Attack Time 0 144 0 127 MUSICAL NOTES 0 127 MUSICAL NOTES js 00 OF 0000 aaaa I H 00 5D 0000 aaaa l I 0090 be lap gaste aypa SEET I 0000 bbbb Env 8 Decay Time 0 144 0 127 MUSICAL NOTES 0 127 MUSICAL NOTES I 00 5F Oaaa aaaa Env 8 Sustine 0 127 I 00 11 Oaaa aaaa Env 2 Sustine 0 127 E 00 12 0000 aaaa I 14 GO et 0000 anal I 0000 bbbb Env 2 Release Time 0 144 B9DO DESD Pn enolase Time IB LAM d 0 127 MUSICAL NOTES ocv hats SMUSICAICNOTES 00 62 0000 0aaa Env 8 Velocity Curve 0 7 I 00 14 0000 Oaaa Env 2 Velocity Curve 0 7 l l l vue a sU l BIZED P D d I 00 63 0 Env 8 Velocity S 1 127 00 15 Oaaa aaaa Env 2 Velocity Sens 1 127 oa cic Dv e QCruy sens B VE I I I 63 63 I
164. I 0000 dddd COSM Parameter 6 12768 52768 ENV 9 COSM1 Parameter 1 20000 20000 ENV 10 COSM1 Parameter 2 I 4 00 1A 0000 aaaa ENV 11 COSM2 Parameter 1 0000 bbbb I ENV 12 COSM2 Parameter 2 I I 0000 cccc I ENV 13 TVA Level I I 0000 dddd COSM Parameter 7 12768 52768 I I I 20000 20000 E 00 1E 0000 aaaa I OPatch LFO l 0000 bbbb I I 0000 cccc I I 0000 dddd COSM Parameter 8 12768 52768 Offset I I I I I 20000 20000 I Address Description I D 00 22 0000 aaaa I I I I 0000 bbbb I I 00 00 0000 Oaaa LFO 1 Waveform 0 7 I 0000 cccc I SIN TRI SAW SQR RND TRP l 0000 dddd COSM Parameter 9 12768 52768 S amp H CHS l 20000 20000 D 00 01 0000 aaaa I 14 00 26 0000 aaaa I I 0000 bbbb LFO 1 Rate 0 144 I 0000 bbbb I 0 127 MUSICAL NOTES 0000 cccc I 00 03 0000 0aaa LFO 1 Offset 0 4 I 0000 dddd COSM Parameter 10 12768 52768 I I I 100 50 0 50 100 I I I 20000 20000 I 00 04 Oaaa aaaa LFO 1 Delay Time 0 127 D 00 2A 0000 aaaa I I 00 05 0000 00aa LFO 1 Fade Mode 0 3 I 0000 bbbb I ON IN ON OUT OFF IN OFF OUT 0000 cece I 00 06 Oaaa aaaa LFO 1 Fade Time 0 127 I 0000 dddd COSM Parameter 11 12768 52768 I 00 07 0000 000
165. IN E E uiid amp t a 2 e POWER Switch Press to turn the power on off gt Quick Start p 4 AC Inlet Connect the included power cord to this inlet Quick Start p 3 PC CARD PC CARD Slot A PC card can be inserted here iS For details on installing the included PC card protector refer to p 178 USB DIGITAL AURIT INTERFACE OUT In Gut IN a loe a OPTICAL COAXIAL USB Connector This is a USB connector You can connect it to your personal computer to send or receive files and MIDI messages DIGITAL AUDIO INTERFACE Connector OPTICAL IN OUT COAXIAL IN OUT conforming to S P DIF These connectors input output a digital audio signal stereo The output signal is identical to the signal that is output from the MAIN OUT jacks MEM S P DIF is a digital interface format used for consumer digital audio devices LCD CONTRAST LCD CONTRAST Knob Adjusts the display contrast Quick Start p 5 979 6 0006 oF MIDI THRU OUT MIDI Connectors IN OUT THRU These connectors can be connected to other MIDI devices to receive and transmit MIDI messages FOOT PEDAL 2 CTRL 1 HOLD CTRL 1 CTLR 2 PEDAL Jack You can connect optional expression pedals EV 5 etc to these jacks By assigning a desired function to a pedal you can use it to select or modify sound or perform various ot
166. In the pulldown menu touch lt Zone gt PLAY screen The PATCH Zone window appears 8 In this state zone 01 is selected Specify the sound that you want to play in zone 01 PRTCH PLRY INIT PATCH tz 011 9 After you have specified the sound that you want to play in Zone EE zone 01 next specify the sound for zone 02 Perform steps 2 and 3 once again to access the PATCH Zone window 10 Touch lt 02 gt and then touch lt OK gt Zone 02 will be selected and you will return to the PATCH PLAY screen 11 Since zone 02 is now selected specify the sound that you want to play in zone 02 In this way you can create a patch that plays different sounds on either side of the split point you specified in step 6 12 To save the patch you created perform the Write operation p 34 53 HE Creating a Patch Creating a Patch 4 In the lower part of the screen touch lt Drum gt A window like the following appears PATCH PLAY INIT PRTCH _ Z 011 ww PATCH Zone ENA s oz es os os os or os ro far fae as ae 15 16 El 5 To change the split point of each zone refer to the procedure described in the preceding section Splitting the Keyboard to Play Different Sounds Split 6 Specify the sounds percussion instrument sounds that you want to play in each zone For the procedure refer to the procedure described in the preceding section Splitting the Keyboard to Play Di
167. LAYBACK SPEED Playback speed DISSOLVE TIME Dissolve time time over which the image switches AUDIO LEVEL Volume during audio playback COLOR CB Color Cb color difference signal COLOR CR Color Cr color difference signal BRIGHTNESS Brightness VFX1 Visual effects 1 VFX2 Visual effects 2 VFX3 Visual effects 3 VFX4 Visual effects 4 OUTPUT FADE Output fade Disk Related Functions Disk Mode Here you can load a project from disk into the internal work area B a SiC Disk Uti ity O pera tions Load or save the project that is in the work area Save You can also format a disk or copy files and folders 1 If you are using a PC card insert the appropriate PC card MEMO into the PC CARD slot In this chapter we will collectively refer to internal memory and 2 Press MODE to access the V SYNTH MODE MENU window PC cards as disks 3 Touch lt Disk gt The DISK UTILITY MENU screen appears About Disk Utility Disk Utility contains the following functions In the DISK UTILITY MENU screen you can select the desired function and execute it Save Clean is Project Project j i 5 Load Project d s This function loads project data from disk into the V Synth s work Import area p 84 Save Project This function saves project data to disk p 85 cI Project 4 Touch the button for the function that you want to execute can TRIS The screen for the function you intend to e
168. LUE NEUTRAL BROWN LIVE As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying the terminals in your plug proceed as follows The wire which is coloured GREEN AND YELLOW must be connected to the terminal in the plug which is marked by the letter E or by the safety earth symbol Dor coloured GREEN or GREEN AND YELLOW The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED USING THE UNIT SAFELY INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE PREVENTION OF FIRE ELECTRIC SHOCK OR INJURY TO PERSONS About N WARNING and N CAUTION Notices improperly Used for instructions intended to alert the user to the risk of injury or material damage should the unit be used improperly CAUTION Material damage refers to damage or other adverse effects caused with respect to the home and all its furnishings as well to domestic animals or pets Used for instructions intended to alert the user to the risk of death or severe NWARNING injury should the unit be used About the Symbols The A symbol alerts the user to important instructions or warnings The specific meaning of the symbol is determined by the design contained within the triangle In the case of the symbol at left it is used for general cautions
169. LY Roland Italy S p A Viale delle Industrie 8 20020 Arese Milano ITALY TEL 02 937 78300 NORWAY Roland Scandinavia Avd Kontor Norge Lilleakerveien 2 Postboks 95 Lilleaker N 0216 Oslo NORWAY TEL 2273 0074 POLAND P P H Brzostowicz UL Gibraltarska 4 PL 03664 Warszawa POLAND TEL 022 679 44 19 PORTUGAL Tecnologias Musica e Audio Roland Portugal S A Cais Das Pedras 8 9 1 Dto 4050 465 PORTO PORTUGAL TEL 022 608 00 60 ROMANIA FBS LINES Piata Libertatii 1 RO 4200 Gheorghehi TEL 095 169 5043 RUSSIA MuTek 3 Bogatyrskaya Str 1 k 1 107 564 Moscow RUSSIA TEL 095 169 5043 SPAIN Roland Electronics de Espa a S A Calle Bolivia 239 08020 Barcelona SPAIN TEL 93 308 1000 SWEDEN Roland Scandinavia A S SWEDISH SALES OFFICE Danvik Center 28 2 tr S 131 30 Nacka SWEDEN TEL 0 8 702 00 20 SWITZERLAND Roland Switzerland AG Landstrasse 5 Postfach CH 4452 Itingen SWITZERLAND TEL 061 927 8383 UKRAINE TIC TAC Mira Str 19 108 P O Box 180 295400 Munkachevo UKRAINE TEL 03131 414 40 UNITED KINGDOM Roland U K Ltd Atlantic Close Swansea Enterprise Park SWANSEA SA7 9FJ UNITED KINGDOM TEL 01792 702701 MIDDLE EAST BAHRAIN Moon Stores No 16 Bab Al Bahrain Avenue P O Box 247 Manama 304 State of BAHRAIN TEL 211 005 CYPRUS Radex Sound Equipment Ltd 17 Diagorou Street Nicosia CYPRUS TEL 022 66 9426 IRA
170. Level 0 127 00 1C 00aa aaaa OSC 1 Level Keyfollow 44 84 I I 200 200 00 1D Oaaa aaaa OSC 1 Level LFO Depth 1 127 I I 63 63 ijo 00 1E 0000 aaaa OSC 1 Analog Waveform 0 8 I I SAW SQUARE TRIANGLE SINE RAMP JUNO I I HQ SAW HQ SQUARE NOISE 00 1F 00aa aaaa OSC 1 Impact 0 40 I I 0 0 4 0 00 20 Oaaa aaaa OSC 1 Pulse Width 1 127 I 63 63 00 21 00aa aaaa OSC 1 Pulse Width Keyfollow 44 84 I I 200 200 00 22 Oaaa aaaa OSC 1 Pulse Width LFO Depth 1 127 I I 63 63 00 23 Oaaa aaaa OSC 1 Pulse Width Envelope Depth 1 127 I I 63 63 00 24 Oaaa aaaa OSC 1 Fat 0 127 00 25 00aa aaaa OSC 1 Fat Keyfollow 44 84 I I 200 200 00 26 Oaaa aaaa OSC 1 Fat LFO Depth 1 127 I I 63 63 00 27 Oaaa aaaa OSC 1 Fat Envelope Depth 1 127 I I 63 63 00 28 0000 aaaa 0000 bbbb 0000 cccc 0000 dddd OSC 1 Wave Number 0 999 I I OFF 1 999 00 2C 0000 aaaa 0000 bbbb 0000 cccc 0000 dddd 0000 eeee 0000 ffff 0000 gggg 0000 hhhh OSC 1 Start Offset I I 0000000h FFFFFFFh 00 34 Oaaa aaaa OSC 1 Time 1 127 I I 63 63 00 35 00aa aaaa OSC 1 Time Keyfollow 44 84 I I 200 200 00 36 Oaaa aaaa OSC 1 Time LFO Depth 1 127 I 63 63 00 37 0aaa aaaa OSC 1 Time Envelope
171. MA FAT I I OSC1 LVL I I OSCI PENV ATK OSCI PENV DCY OSC1 PENV REL I I OSCI TENV ATK OSCI TENV DCY OSC1 TENV REL I I OSCI FENV ATK OSCI FENV DCY OSC1 FENV REL OSCI AENV ATK OSCIl AENV DCY OSCI AENV REL I OSCI LFO RATE OSCI LFO PCH OSC1 LFO TM PW I OSCI LFO FR FT OSCI LFO LVL I I OSC2 PITCH OSC2 TIME PW OSC2 FORMA FAT I OSC2 LVL I OSC2 PENV ATK OSC2 PENV DCY OSC2 PENV REL OSC2 TENV ATK OSC2 TENV DCY OSC2 TENV REL I I OSC2 FENV ATK OSC2 FENV DCY OSC2 FENV REL I I OSC2 AENV ATK OSC2 AENV DCY OSC2 AENV REL OSC2 LFO RATE OSC2 LFO PCH OSC2 LFO IM PW I OSC2 LFO FR FT OSC2 LFO LVL I I CSM1 PRM1 CSM1 PRM2 I CSMI ENVI ATK CSMI ENV1 DCY CSM1 ENV1 REL I I CSMI ENV2 ATK CSM1 ENV2 DCY CSM1 ENV2 REL I CSMI LFO RATE CSM1 LFO PRM1 CSM1 LFO PRM2 I CSM2 PRM1 CSM2 PRM2 I CSM2 ENV1 ATK CSM2 ENV1 DCY CSM2 ENVI REL I I CSM2 ENV2 ATK CSM2 ENV2 DCY CSM2 ENV2 REL l CSM2 LFO RATE CSM2 LFO PRMl CSM2 LFO PRM2 I I TVA LVL I TVA ENV ATK TVA ENV DCY TVA ENV REL I TVA LFO RATE TVA LFO LVL TVA LFO PAN I MFX SEND CHO SEND REV SEND I I MFX PRM1 MFX PRM2 MFX PRM3 00 60 Oaaa aaaa Matrix Control 5 Sens 1 1 127 I 63 63 00 61 Oaaa aaaa Matrix Control 5 Dest 2 0 77 I OFF I OSCI PITCH OSCI TIME PW OSCI FORMA FAT I I OSCI LVL MEN Appendices MIDI Implementation OSCI AENV ATK OSC1 LFO RATE
172. MIDI controller number that will be transmitted by movements in the X horizontal direction when the Time Trip pad is in Time Trip mode Value OFF No message will be transmitted CC01 31 33 95 Controller numbers 1 31 33 95 Y Assign TT Y Assign Time Trip Specifies the MIDI controller number that will be transmitted by movements in the Y vertical direction when the Time Trip pad is in Time Trip mode Value OFF No message will be transmitted CC01 31 33 95 Controller numbers 1 31 33 95 lt For details on control change messages refer to MIDI Implementation p 153 Settings Common to All Modes System Mode Knob 1 2 Assign Specifies the MIDI controller number that will be transmitted by movements in the ASSIGNABLE CONTROL knob Value OFF No message will be transmitted CC01 31 33 95 Controller numbers 1 31 33 95 IS For more information about Control Change messages please refer to MIDI Implementation p 153 Beam SYSTEM Ctrl Beam hd 1AssignL 2RssignL 3AssignL 4RssignL CETT cc1s CC19 1 ssignR 2 Rssign R 3 Rssign R 4RssignR Cont F common U LINK Init Write D Beam Sens L R D Beam Sensitivity L R This sets the D Beam Controller s sensitivity Sens L is the left side The higher the value set the more readily the D Beam Controller goes into effect Normally you will leave this at 1
173. Mode OFF gt gt Fade Time The time over which the LFO amplitude will reach the minimum after the Delay Time has elapsed Delay Time The time that the LFO will continue after the keyboard is released Setting Effects for a Patch Effect PATCH Edit EffectRouting INIT sian SE v Routing larva E ond To DIRECT OUT MFX Send SSS nor MEX O ul E 127 MULTI E 1 cho Output To CHO T Jj TeREU a Assign m We ux REU CHO Send E REV Send O Tupe 81 x cR REV rj fRoom 127 mm osci IE Mop eos I Uu ME Effect MFX Send MFX Send Level x Sets the level of the signal sent to tMFX Value 0 127 CHO Send Chorus Send Level x Sets the level of the signal sent to chorus Value 0 127 REV Send Reverb Send Level x Sets the level of the signal sent to reverb Value 0 127 Output Assign Sets the direct sound s output method Value MULTI Output in stereo through MFX You can also apply chorus or reverb to the sound that passes through MFX MAIN Output to the MAIN OUT jacks in stereo without passing through MEX DIR Output to the DIRECT OUTjacks in stereo without passing through MEX Make this setting when you want to use external effects MFX MFX On Off Switch Switches MFX on and off value E OFF EF on MFX Type Use this parameter to select from among the 41 available MFX For d
174. N MOCO INC No 41 Nike St Dr Shariyati Ave Roberoye Cerahe Mirdamad Tehran IRAN TEL 021 285 4169 ISRAEL Halilit P Greenspoon amp Sons Ltd 8 Retzif Ha aliya Hashnya St Tel Aviv Yafo ISRAEL TEL 03 6823666 JORDAN AMMAN Trading Agency 245 Prince Mohammad St Amman 1118 JORDAN TEL 06 464 1200 KUWAIT Easa Husain Al Yousifi Est Abdullah Salem Street Safat KUWAIT TEL 243 6399 LEBANON Chahine S A L Gerge Zeidan St Chahine Bldg Achrafieh P O Box 16 5857 Beirut LEBANON TEL 01 20 1441 QATAR Al Emadi Co Badie Studio amp Stores P O Box 62 Doha QATAR TEL 4423 554 SAUDI ARABIA aDawliah Universal Electronics APL Corniche Road Aldossary Bldg 1st Floor Alkhobar SAUDI ARABIA P O Box 2154 Alkhobar 31952 SAUDI ARABIA TEL 03 898 2081 SYRIA Technical Light amp Sound Center Khaled Ebn Al Walid St Bldg No 47 P O BOX 13520 Damascus SYRIA TEL 011 223 5384 TURKEY Barkat muzik aletleri ithalat ve ihracat Ltd Sti Siraselviler Caddesi Siraselviler Pasaji No 74 20 Taksim Istanbul TURKEY TEL 0212 2499324 U A E Zak Electronics amp Musical Instruments Co L L C Zabeel Road Al Sherooq Bldg No 14 Grand Floor Dubai U A E TEL 04 3360715 NORTH AMERICA CANADA Roland Canada Music Ltd Head Office 5480 Parkwood Way Richmond B C V6V 2M4 CANADA TEL 604 270 6626 Roland Canada Music Ltd Toronto Off
175. NG or ENSEMBLE Creating and Editing Samples Sample Mode Automatically Detecting Events By specifying the Depth you can automatically detect and W mark locations where there is a strong attack i e locations where the volume changes abruptly Such marked locations are called events SAMPLE Encode v PREVIEW F Current ooooooo EJ ES pene EN m Depth Encode Depth In the SAMPLE Encode screen move the cursor to Depth and set the value The higher the value you set the more events will be assigned Value 0 127 MEM If the Playback Mode p 43 is STEP the sample will play to the next event and then stop each time you play the key When the Playback Mode is set to EVENT the sample will be divided at event locations and assigned to each key nore If you set Depth to a high value a large number of events may be detected If you encode in such a state the interval between events will be too short and the expected result will not be obtained when you play back in event units If you change the location of an event after encoding you must re encode the sample When you encode the newly detected event locations will take effect Deleting and Adding Events Setting the Encode Depth and automatically detecting events does not guarantee that the events will be added at the locations that you expect If necessary you can
176. NV1 REL CSM1 2 ENV2 ATK CSM1 2 ENV2 DCY CSM1 2 ENV2 REL CSM1 2 LFO RATE CSM1 2 LFO PRM1 CSM1 2 LFO PRM2 TVA LVL TVA ENV ATK TVA ENV DCY TVA ENV REL TVA LFO RATE TVA LFO LVL TVA LFO PAN MFX SEND CHO SEND REV SEND MFX PRM1 3 TVA PAN 102 Parameter List OSC1 OSC2 Group p 42 Parameter Value Oscillator Switch OFF ON OSC Type Oscillator Type ANALOG PCM EXT IN Wave Gain 12 12 dB Waveform Analog Oscillator Waveform SAW SQR TRI SINE RAMP JUNO HQ SAW HO SQR NOISE Impact Analog Oscillator Impact 0 0 4 0 Time Trip Sw Time Trip Switch OFF ON Beat Keep Time Trip Beat Keep OFF ON Waveform PCM Oscillator Waveform Vari Sw PCM OmBcillator Vari Switch OFF ON Start Offset PCM Oscillator Start Offset oos Playback Mode PCM Oscillator Playback Mode RETRIGGER LEGATO STEP EVENT Loop PCM Oscillator Loop Switch OFF ON Robot Voice PCM Oscillator Robot Voice Switch OFF ON Tempo Sync PCM Oscillator Tempo Sync Switch OFF ON Pitch Pitch Oscillator Pitch 63 63 Pitch KF Oscillator Pitch Key Follow 200 200 Coarse Oscillator Coarse Tune 48 48 Fine Oscillator Fine Tune 50 50 Random Oscillator Random Pitch Depth 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1100 1200 Pit LFO Dp Oscillator Pitch LFO Depth 63 63 Velocity Cu
177. OSC2 TENV ATK OSC2 TENV DCY OSC2 TENV REL 32 127 ASCII I I OSC2 FENV ATK OSC2 FENV DCY OSC2 FENV REL l 00 08 Oaaa aaaa Patch Name 9 32 127 l l l OSC2 AENV ATK OSC2 AENV DCY OSC2 AENV REL I I 32 127 ASCII OSC2 LFO RATE OSC2 LFO PCH OSC2 LFO IM PW 00 09 Oaaa aaaa Patch Name 10 32 127 OSC2 LFO FR FT OSC2 LFO LVL 32 127 ASCII I l l CSM1 PRM1 CSM1 PRM2 I 00 OA Oaaa aaaa Patch Name 11 32 127 l l I CSMI ENV1 ATK CSMI ENV1 DCY CSMI ENVI REL j 32 127 ASCII l I l CSMI ENV2 ATK CSMI ENV2 DCY CSMI ENV2 REL 00 OB Oaaa aaaa Patch Name 12 32 127 l l j CSMI LFO RATE CSMI LFO PRM1 CSMI LFO PRM2 I I 32 127 ASCII I I I CSM2 PRM1 CSM2 PRM2 CSM2 ENVI ATK CSM2 ENV1 DCY CSM2 ENVI REL 00 0C 0aaa aaaa reserved 0 127 l l CSM2 ENV2 ATK CSM2 ENV2 DCY CSM2 ENV2 REL I CSM2 LFO RATE CSM2 LFO PRM1 CSM2 LFO PRM2 I 00 OD Oaaa aaaa Patch Coarse Tune 16 112 TVA LVL I I 48 48 TVA ENV ATK TVA ENV DCY TVA ENV REL 00 OE Oaaa aaaa Patch Fine Tune 14 114 l l l TVA LFO RATE TVA LFO LVL TVA LFO PAN 50 50 1 I MFX SEND CHO SEND REV SEND 00 OF 0000 Oaaa Octave Shift 61 67 l MFX PRM1 MFX PRM2 MFX PRM3 I 3 3 I 00 4C Oaaa aaaa Matrix Control 1 Sens 1 1
178. Oaaa LFO 3 Offset 0 4 I 0000 dddd COSM Parameter 16 12768 52768 I I I 100 50 0 50 100 I I I 20000 20000 I 00 14 0aaa aaaa LFO 3 Delay Time 0 127 I I 00 15 0000 O0aa LFO 3 Fade Mode 0 3 00 00 00 42 Total Size ON IN ON OUT OFF IN OFF OUT 166 OPatch Controller Offset Address Description 00 00 0000 Oaaa Beam Type 0 4 OFF 1 4 I 00 01 0000 000a Pad Mode Io 1 X Y TIME TRIP 00 02 0000 000a Pad Hold 0 1 OFF ON I 00 03 0000 000a Arpeggio Switch 0 1 OFF ON 00 04 0000 000a Arpeggio Hold 0 1 OFF ON 00 05 Oaaa aaaa Arpeggio Motif 0 7 l l l UP DOWN UP amp DOWN RANDOM NOTE ORDER RHYTHM PHRASE AUTO 00 06 Oaaa aaaa Arpeggio Duration 0 100 00 07 Oaaa aaaa Arpeggio Shuffle Rate 0 100 00 08 0000 000a Arpeggio Shuffle Resolution 10 3 16TH 8TH 00 09 Oaaa aaaa Arpeggio Keyboard Velocity 0 127 l j l REAL 1 127 00 OA 0000 0aaa Arpeggio Octave Range 61 67 I 3 48 00 OB 0000 Oaaa Arpeggio Grid 0 5 l l l QUARTER 8TH 8TH T 16TH 16TH T 32TH 00 OC 000a aaaa Arpeggio End Point 0 31 I 1 32 j 00 00 00 OD Total Size OPatch Arpeggio e Offset Address
179. PITCH Oscillator Pitch p 43 OSC1 2 TIME PW Time Pulse Width p 44 0SC1 2 FORMA FAT Formant Fat p 44 p 45 OSC1 2 LVL Level p 45 OSC1 2 PENV ATK Pitch Envelope Attack Time p 48 OSC1 2 PENV DCY Pitch Envelope Decay Time p 48 OSC1 2 PENV REL Pitch Envelope Release Time p 48 OSC1 2 TENV ATK Time Envelope Attack Time p 48 OSC1 2 TENV DCY Time Envelope Decay Time p 48 OSC1 2 TENV REL Time Envelope Release Time p 48 OSC1 2 FENV ATK Formant Envelope Attack Time p 48 OSC1 2 FENV DCY Formant Envelope Decay Time p 48 OSC1 2 FENV REL Formant Envelope Release Time p 48 OSC1 2 AENV ATK Oscillator TVA Envelope Attack Time p 48 OSC1 2 AENV DCY Oscillator TVA Envelope Decay Time p 48 OSC1 2 AENV REL Oscillator TVA Envelope Release Time p 48 OSC1 2 LFO RATE Oscillator LFO Rate p 49 OSC1 2 LFO PCH Oscillator Pitch LFO Depth p 43 OSC1 2 LFO TM PW Time Pulse Width LFO Depth p 44 p 44 OSC1 2 LFO FR FT Formant Fat LFO Depth p 44 p 45 OSC1 2 LFO LVL Oscillator Level LFO Depth p 45 CSM1 2 PRM1 p 111 CSM1 2 PRM2 p 111 Creating a Patch CSM1 2 ENV1 ATK COSM Envelope Attack Time p 48 CSM1 2 ENV1 DCY COSM Envelope Decay Time p 48 CSM1 2 ENV1 REL COSM Envelope Release Time p 48 CSM1 2 ENV2 ATK COSM Envelope Attack Time p 48 CSM1 2 ENV2 DCY COSM Envelope Decay Time p 48 CSM1 2 ENV2 REL COSM Envelope Release Time p 48 CSM1 2 LFO RATE COSM LFO Rate p 49
180. POLY Mode 2 OMNI ON MONO O Yes Mode 3 OMNI OFF POLY Mode 4 OMNI OFF MONO X No 171 Specifications V Synth Synthesizer Keyboard Keyboard 61 keys with velocity and channel aftertouch Sound Generator Configuration Oscillator envelope x 4 LFO x 1 x 2 Modulator x 1 OSM envelope x 2 LFO x 1 x 2 TVA envelope x1 LFO x 1 x1 Methods by Which Oscillators Produce Sound Analog Modeling PCM VariPhrase Preset waveforms Sampling waveforms External Input Modulator 4 types MIX COSM 15 types THRU Zones Splits 16 Parts 16 Maximum Polyphony 24 voices Varies depending on the load placed on the sound generator Internal Memory Project 1 Patches 512 Waves 999 Wave memory RAM 50 M bytes When the unit ships from the factory 30 M bytes of this is taken up by the preset waves Sample storage memory FLASH 10 M bytes External Storage Device PC CARD slot Can be used Microdrive SmartMedia or CompactFlash with PC card adapter Effects MFX Multi effects 41 sets Chorus 8 sets Reverb 10 sets System EQ 4 bands Sampling Frequency Internal 44 1 kHz Digital Audio IN OUT 96 48 44 1 kHz Signal Processing Internal processing Sound generating section 32 bits floating point Effects section 24 bits fixed point DA Conversion 24 bits AD Conversion 24 bits Nominal Output Level MAIN OUT 4 dBu DIRECT OUT 4 d
181. PUT L R GAIN MIC LINE DIGITAL AUDIO INTERFACE OPTICAL IN COAXIAL IN Use the input jack that is appropriate for your situation e Monaural sampling from a mic gt INPUT L R GAIN MIC e Sampling from an analog source gt INPUT L R GAIN LINE Sampling from a digital source OPTICAL IN or COAXIAL IN von Howling could be produced depending on the location of microphones relative to speakers This can be remedied by 1 Changing the orientation of the microphone s 2 Relocating microphone s at a greater distance from speakers 3 Lowering volume levels When sampling you must make sure that the following two items are set correctly If these two settings are incorrect the sample will not be recorded as you intend e What type of sample are you recording stereo or mono In the SAMPLING General screen set Sampling Type Which input are you sampling from select the input jack gt In the SAMPLING General screen set Input Source MEMO If you have set the metronome p 62 the metronome sound will be output from the DIRECT OUT jack during sampling However the sound that is assigned to the DIRECT OUT jack p 50 will not be output Press MODE The V SYNTH MODE MENU window appears FACTORY RESET SYNTH MODE MENU SAMPLE 2 Touch lt SAMPLE gt The SAMPLE Top screen appears 9907 123 FrmtSea SAMPLE Top y BROWSER
182. Patch Deleting Patches PATCH Delete Delete unneeded patches from the internal memory 1 Touch lt Y gt in the upper right of the screen A pulldown menu appears MadOrchestra 2 01 Zone DataTransfer Info y Beep PATCH Name PATCH Write PATCH Init PATCH Copy PATCH Delete 2 In the pulldown menu touch PATCH Delete gt The PATCH Delete List window appears PATCH PLAY Madorchestra rz 011 PATCH Delete List Xr 032 e HH ceo J 043 ime Warrer 011 LetThemPray nae nit ELA E team 064 rip of Time 12 Noizs LOOP A shonin anit 080 des now T coi 096 eedback Osc O14 VARI ARP sh 112 oixBulsares ei5 Earth Temple fn dra m ME 005 Jet Bass ostinsGrit D16 Runnins Away 3 From the list select the patch that you want to delete Either turn the VALUE dial or use INC DEC to select a patch You can also select a patch by touching it on the display Each screen in the PATCH Delete List window shows a group of 16 patches To view other patches touch lt 017 032 gt lt 241 256 gt located at either side of the screen To view higher numbered patches touch lt 257 512 gt located at the bottom of the screen 4 Touch lt Execute gt The selected patch will be deleted 5 If you want to continue deleting other patches repeat steps 3 and 4 6 Press EXIT The PATCH Delete List window closes Functions of Patch Par
183. Problem Cause Action Power does not turn on Is the AC cord connected correctly to the V Synth and to an AC outlet Check the AC cord connections No Sound Volume is low Is the power of the connected devices turned on Make sure that the power of your amp or mixer system is turned on Is the volume turned down Check the volume of the V Synth and of the connected amp or mixer Is there sound in the headphones If there is sound in the headphones it is possible that the connection cables are broken or that the amp or mixer is malfunctioning Check the connection cables and your other equipment once again Is the Demo Song playback selected Press EXIT to exit Demo Song playback mode Quick Start p 8 Is the Local Switch turned OFF Turn the Local Switch ON p 78 Is the Patch level set too low Check the Level parameter setting p 47 Are the Effect settings correct Check the Effect settings ON or OFF in the Effect Bal ance or Level p 50 Are the settings for the output destination correct Check the output assign settings p 50 Have volume messages been received from an external MIDI device to lower the volume Check the volume Could the oscillator be off Press OSC1 or OSC2 to turn on the oscillator Could the V Synth be set to USB communication in Storage mode Cancel USB communication p 92 p 94 The volume l
184. Ps Hi Gain 15 415 dB Gain of the high range 127 MEN Appendices 23 Analog Phaser This effect features two analog type phasers arranged in parallel making it stereo compatible The sound as it cyclically drifts in and out of phase is added to the source sound creating the modulation with the characteristic of phasers Analog Phaser Parameter Value Description Shift Mode 4STAGE 8STAGE Sets the number of stages in the phase shift circuit four 4STAG or eight SSTAGE Setting this to eight stages 8STAGE increases the number of the frequency points that sound is canceled giving a sharper effect Level 4 stage Freq Level 8 stage YY YY Freq Center Freq 1 0 127 Sets the center frequency to which the phaser effect is ap plied Increasing this value moves the effect point of the phaser into higher frequency ranges Resonance 0 127 Amount of feedback Increasing this value gives a more distinctive sound to the ef fect LFO 1 2 Rate 0 02 5 00 Hz note Sets the rate of the swelling sound LFO 1 2 Depth 0 127 Specifies the depth of modula tion LFO 1 2 Phase NORM INV Sets the phase of both left and right swelling NORM The left and right phase will be the same INV The left and right phase will be opposite 128 24 Digital Phaser Phaser is an effect that adds a phase shifted so
185. Roland Before using this unit carefully read the sections entitled IMPORTANT SAFETY OWNER S MANUAL Thank you and congratulations on your choice of the Roland V Synth INSTRUCTIONS Owner s Manual p 2 USING THE UNIT SAFELY Owner s Manual p 3 and IMPORTANT NOTES Owner s Manual p 4 These sections provide important information concerning the proper operation of the unit Additionally in order to feel assured that you have gained a good grasp of every feature provided by your new unit the Quick Start Owner s Manual and Sound List should be read in their entirety These manuals should be saved and kept on hand as a convenient reference Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation Windows is known officially as Microsoft Windows operating system Macintosh are registered trademark of Apple Computer Inc MacOS is a trademark of Apple Computer Inc All product names mentioned in this document are trademarks or registered trade marks of their respective owners Roland SIN Copyright 2002 ROLAND CORPORATION All rights reserved No part of this publication may be reproduced in any form without the writ
186. SCI TENV ATK OSCI TENV DCY OSC1 TENV REL I I OSCI FENV ATK OSCI FENV DCY OSC1 FENV REL I I OSCI AENV ATK OSCI AENV DCY OSC1 AENV REL I I OSCI LFO RATE OSCI LFO PCH OSCI LFO IM PW I OSCI LFO FR FT OSCI LFO LVL I OSC2 PITCH OSC2 TIME PW OSC2 FORMA FAT OSC2 LVL I OSC2 PENV ATK OSC2 PENV DCY OSC2 PENV REL I I OSC2 TENV ATK OSC2 TENV DCY OSC2 TENV REL I I OSC2 FENV ATK OSC2 FENV DCY OSC2 FENV REL I OSC2 AENV ATK OSC2 AENV DCY OSC2 AENV REL I OSC2 LFO RATE OSC2 LFO PCH OSC2 LFO IM PW I I OSC2 LFO FR FT OSC2 LFO LVL I I CSM1 PRM1 CSMI1 PRM2 I I CSM1 ENV1 ATK CSMI ENV1 DCY CSM1 ENV1 REL I I CSMI ENV2 ATK CSM1 ENV2 DCY CSM1 ENV2 REL CSMI LFO RATE CSM1 LFO PRM1 CSM1 LFO PRM2 CSM2 PRM1 CSM2 PRM2 I CSM2 ENV1 ATK CSM2 ENV1 DCY CSM2 ENVI REL I I CSM2 ENV2 ATK CSM2 ENV2 DCY CSM2 ENV2 REL l I CSM2 LFO RATE CSM2 LFO PRMl CSM2 LFO PRM2 TVA LVL TVA ENV ATK TVA ENV DCY TVA ENV REL I TVA LFO RATE TVA LFO LVL TVA LFO PAN I I MFX SEND CHO SEND REV SEND I MFX PRMl MFX PRM2 MFX PRM3 00 5D Oaaa aaaa Matrix Control 4 Sens 2 1 127 63 63 00 5E Oaaa aaaa Matrix Control 5 Source 0 108 I I OFF CC01 CC31 CC33 CC95 BEND AFT I I PAD X PAD Y PAD X PAD Y TRIP R I BEAM L BEAM R KNOB1 KNOB2 VELO KEYF 00 5F Oaaa aaaa Matrix Control 5 Dest 1 0 77 OFF OSCI PITCH OSC1 TIME PW OSCI FOR
187. SM2 PRM1 CSM2 PRM2 CSM2 ENV1 ATK CSM2 ENV1 DCY CSM2 ENV1 REL CSM2 ENV2 ATK CSM2 ENV2 DCY CSM2 ENV2 REL CSM2 LFO RATE CSM2 LFO PRM1 CSM2 LFO PRM2 TVA LVL TVA ENV ATK TVA ENV DCY TVA ENV REL TVA LFO RATE TVA LFO LVL TVA LFO PAN MFX SEND CHO SEND REV SEND MFX PRM1 MFX PRM2 MFX PRM3 00 6F Oaaa aaaa Matrix Control 8 Sens 1 Ii 127 63 63 00 70 Oaaa aaaa Matrix Control 8 Dest 2 0 7225 OFF OSCI PITCH OSCI TIME PW OSC1 FORMA FAT OSCI LVL OSC1 PENV ATK OSC1 PENV DCY OSC1 PENV REL OSCI TENV ATK OSCI TENV DCY OSC1 TENV REL OSCI FENV ATK OSC1 FENV DCY OSC1 FENV REL OSC1 AENV ATK OSC1 AENV DCY OSC1 AENV REL OSCI LFO RATE OSCI LFO PCH OSC1 LFO TM PW OSCI LFO FR FT OSC1 LFO LVL OSC2 PITCH OSC2 TIME PW OSC2 FORMA FAT OSC2 LVL OSC2 PENV ATK OSC2 PENV DCY OSC2 PENV REL OSC2 TENV ATK OSC2 TENV DCY OSC2 TENV REL OSC2 FENV ATK OSC2 FENV DCY OSC2 FENV REL OSC2 AENV ATK OSC2 AENV DCY OSC2 AENV REL OSC2 LFO RATE OSC2 LFO PCH OSC2 LFO TM PW OSC2 LFO FR FT OSC2 LFO LVL CSM1 PRM1 CSM1 PRM2 CSM1 ENV1 ATK CSM1 ENV1 DCY CSM1 ENVI REL CSM1 ENV2 ATK CSM1 ENV2 DCY CSM1 ENV2 REL CSM1 LFO RATE CSM1 LFO PRM1 CSMI1 LFO PRM2
188. Scale Tune feature produce equal temperament OJust Temperament Tonic of C The principal triads resound much more beautifully than with equal temperament but this benefit can only be obtained in one key If transposed the chords tend to become ambiguous The example given involves settings for a key in which C is the keynote OArabian Scale By altering the setting for Scale Tune you can obtain a variety of other tunings suited for ethnic music For example the settings introduced below will set the unit to use the Arabian Scale Example Settings Note name Equal Temperament Just Temperament Key tone C Arabian Scale C 0 0 6 CH 0 8 45 D 0 4 2 Eb 0 16 12 E 0 14 51 F 0 2 8 F 0 10 43 G 0 2 4 G 0 14 47 A 0 16 0 Bb 0 14 10 B 0 12 49 The values in the table are given in cents Convert these values to hexadecimal and transmit them as Exclusive data For example to set the tune C B of the Part 1 Arabian Scale send the following data FO 41 10 42 12 40 11 40 3A 6D 3E 34 0D 38 6B 3C 6F 40 36 OF 76 F7 HASCII Code Table Patch Name and Performance Name etc of MIDI data are described the ASCII code in the table below 4 t 4 4 t t D H Char D H Char D H Char 4 4 t t 4 32 20H SP 64 40H 96 60H 3 3 21H t 65 41H A 97 61H
189. Specifies the operating mode of the Time Trip pad Value E XY mode The effect will be applied when you move your finger up down left right on the Time Trip pad ES Time Trip mode The effect will be applied when you move your finger in a circle over the Time Trip pad Hold Time Trip Pad Hold Switch Specifies whether the current value will be maintained ON when you remove your finger from the Time Trip pad or not maintained OFF Value OFF ON E For details on settings for the Time Trip effect refer to Matrix Ctrl p 38 and TT Pad Knob p 80 MEMO In the screen X Y and Time Trip indicate the effect that is assigned and the location of the pad that your finger touched Matrix Ctrl PATCH Edit Com Matrix Ctrl INIT PATCH 2 011 v Control 1 Sems Destinationt Source i El 4 E Destination2 T ALE vi Arpe ne Sew Destinationt EJ Pr Source Tune aly PAD Y comen uu IE MOD som COSM2 TUR erect Sens Destination2 7 OFF Matrix Control Ordinarily if you wanted to change tone parameters using an external MIDI device you would need to send System Exclusive messages MIDI messages designed exclusively for the V Synth However System Exclusive messages tend to be complicated and the amount of data that needs to be transmitted can get quite large
190. T bar Assign TT V LINK Assign Time Trip Specify the V Link function that will be controlled when you operate the Time Trip pad in Time Trip mode Value OFF The time trip pad will not be used TIME TRIP Time trip Knob 1 2 Local Sw V LINK Knob1 2 Local Switch Specify whether the assignable controller knobs 1 or 2 will be disconnected from the internal sound generator in V Link mode OFF or not disconnected ON Value OFF ON 80 Settings Common to All Modes System Mode Knob 1 2 Assign V LINK Knob1 2 Assign Specify the V Link function that will be controlled when you turn the ASSIGNABLE CONTROL knob Value OFF The assignable controller will not be used PLAYBACK SPEED Playback speed DISSOLVE TIME Dissolve time time over which the image switches AUDIO LEVEL Volume during audio playback COLOR CB Color Cb color difference signal COLOR CR Color Cr color difference signal BRIGHTNESS Brightness VFX1 Visual effects 1 VFX2 Visual effects 2 VFX3 Visual effects 3 VFX4 Visual effects 4 OUTPUT FADE Output fade Beam SYSTEM V LINK Knob Bean hd s D Beam Local Su peg a E Beam e inso AEN ass or0F 2AsgnL OFF 2 sgnR OFF 3AsgnL OFF SAsonR OFF 4AsgnL OFF 4ASgnR OFF mm Ira init write Beam Local Sw V LINK D Beam Local Switch Specify whether the D Beam controller will be disconnected from the internal sound generator in V Link mode
191. TCH OSC1 TIME PW OSCI FORMA FAT I OSCI LVL I OSCI PENV ATK OSCI PENV DCY OSC1 PENV REL I I OSCI TENV ATK OSCI TENV DCY OSC1 TENV REL I OSCI FENV ATK OSC1 FENV DCY OSCI FENV REL I OSCI AENV ATK OSCI AENV DCY OSC1 AENV REL OSCI LFO RATE OSCI LFO PCH OSC1 LFO TM PW I I OSCI LFO FR FT OSCI LFO LVL OSC2 PITCH OSC2 TIME PW OSC2 FORMA FAT I I OSC2 LVL OSC2 PENV ATK OSC2 PENV DCY OSC2 PENV REL I I OSC2 TENV ATK OSC2 TENV DCY OSC2 TENV REL I I OSC2 FENV ATK OSC2 FENV DCY OSC2 FENV REL I I OSC2 AENV ATK OSC2 AENV DCY OSC2 AENV REL I OSC2 LFO RATE OSC2 LFO PCH OSC2 LFO TM PW I I OSC2 LFO FR FT OSC2 LFO LVL I I CSMI PRM1 CSM1 PRM2 l CSMI ENVI ATK CSMI ENV1 DCY CSM1 ENV1 REL I CSMI ENV2 ATK CSM1 ENV2 DCY CSM1 ENV2 REL I I CSMI LFO RATE CSM1 LFO PRM1 CSM1 LFO PRM2 I CSM2 PRM1 CSM2 PRM2 I I CSM2 ENVI ATK CSM2 ENV1 DCY CSM2 ENVI REL I CSM2 ENV2 ATK CSM2 ENV2 DCY CSM2 ENV2 REL I I CSM2 LFO RATE CSM2 LFO PRMl CSM2 LFO PRM2 I TVA LVL TVA ENV ATK TVA ENV DCY TVA ENV REL I TVA LFO RATE TVA LFO LVL TVA LFO PAN I I MFX SEND CHO SEND REV SEND l l MFX PRM1 MFX PRM2 MFX PRM3 00 5B Oaaa aaaa Matrix Control 4 Sens 1 1 127 I 63 63 00 5C Oaaa aaaa Matrix Control 4 Dest 2 0 77 OFF I I OSCI PITCH OSC1 TIME PW OSC1 FORMA FAT I l OSCI LVL I OSCI PENV ATK OSCI PENV DCY OSC1 PENV REL I I O
192. TRP S amp H CHAOS Offset LFO Offset 100 50 0 50 100 Key Sync LFO Key Sync Switch OFF ON Delay Time LFO Delay Time 0 127 Rate LFO Rate 0 127 note Fade Mode LFO Fade Mode ON lt lt ON gt gt OFF lt lt OFF gt gt Fade Time LFO Fade Time 0 127 Thirty second note Sixteenth note b Eighth note triplet A Dotted sixteenth note Eighth note 4 Quarter note triplet Dotted eighth note J Quarter note Jg Half note triplet J Dotted quarter note J Half note og Whole note triplet J Dotted half note Whole note es Double note triplet Dotted whole note ou Double note Mod Group p 46 Parameter Value Modulator Switch OFF ON Mod Type Modulator Type MIX RING FM ENV RING OSC SYNC Original Level Modulator Original Level 0 127 Attack Modulator Attack Time 0 127 Release Modulator Release Time 0 127 COSM1 COSM2 Group p 46 Parameter Value COSM Switch OFF ON COSM Type COSM Type THRU OD DS W SHAPE AMP SPEAKER RESONATOR SBF1 2 COMB DUAL TVF DYN TVF COMP LIMITER F SHIFT LO FI LFO Waveform LFO Waveform SIN TRI SAW SOR RND TRP S amp H CHAOS Offset LFO Offset 100 50 0 50 100 Key Sync LFO Key Sync Switch OFF ON Delay Time LFO Delay Time 0 127 Rate LFO Rate 0 127 note Fade Mode LFO Fade Mode ON lt lt ON gt g
193. Tb 006 119 SPctSea 3 FrmtSea 905 120 vox Seat 3 Select the sample that you wish to edit For details on making this selection refer to Sampling Procedure p 56 Creating and Editing Samples Sample Mode 4 Touch lt Edit gt The SAMPLE Loop FWD screen appears ERPEEEEEE Sign 4 4 20000703 4 Meas Beat E Current 00090009 126 6 gt 120 0 5 Touch one of the tabs in the left side of the screen to access the desired editing screen lt Edit gt Edit the sample of the specified region p 66 Loop FWD Specify the loop region for forward playback p 68 Loop BWD Specify the loop region for backward playback p 68 EN For details on each editing operation refer to the corresponding page 6 When you have finished making settings press EXIT to return to the SAMPLE Top screen Functions Common to All Editing Screens Start End and Current Settings The V Synth uses seven terms to indicate locations within a sample Sample Start Beginning of the sample Sample End End of the sample Loop Start Loop End When the Loop Play is ON the region between these two points will be played repeatedly Edit Start Edit End Editing will affect the region between these two points Current This is the currently selected location of the sample Move the cursor to Start End or Current to select
194. Trip pad vertical direction TRIP R Time Trip pad center from the circumference BEAM L D Beam controller left BEAM R D Beam controller right KNOB1 Assignable Controller C1 KNOB2 Assignable Controller C2 VELO Velocity pressure you press a key with KEYF Note Number Sens Matrix Control Sens Sets the amount of the Matrix Control s effect that is applied If you wish to modify the selected parameter in a positive direction i e a higher value toward the right or faster etc from its current setting select a positive value If you wish to modify the selected parameter in a negative direction i e a lower value toward the left or slower etc from its current setting select a negative value When both positive and negative are selected the changes are greater as the value increases Set it to 0 if you don t want this effect Value 63 63 Destination 1 2 Matrix Control Destination 1 2 Specifies the parameters that will be controlled by the matrix controllers When not controlling parameters with the Matrix Control set this to OFF Up to two parameters can be specified for each Matrix Control and controlled simultaneously Value You can control the following parameters For details on each parameter refer to the corresponding reference page MEMO In this manual Parameters that can be controlled using the Matrix Control are marked with a H OSC1 2
195. Value 63 63 Pitch KF Oscillator Pitch Key Follow This specifies the amount of pitch change that will occur when you play a key one octave higher i e 12 keys upward on the keyboard If you want the pitch to rise one octave as on a conventional keyboard set this to 100 If you want the pitch to rise two octaves set this to 200 Conversely set this to a negative value if you want the pitch to fall With a setting of 0 all keys will produce the same pitch Value 200 200 Key Coarse Oscillator Coarse Tune Adjusts the pitch of the oscillator up or down in semitone steps 4 octaves Value 48 48 Fine Oscillator Fine Tune Adjusts the pitch of the oscillator up or down in 1 cent steps 50 cents Value 50 50 MEMO One cent is 1 100th of a semitone Random Oscillator Random Pitch Depth This specifies the width of random pitch deviation that will occur each time a key is pressed If you do not want the pitch to change randomly set this to 0 These values are in units of cents 1 100th of a semitone Value 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1100 1200 Pit LFO Dp Oscillator Pitch LFO Depth x Specifies how deeply the LFO will affect pitch Value 63 63 ES In this screen you can make settings for the envelope that affects the pitch For detail
196. Volume of the pitch shift A or B Mod Pre Delay 0 50 0 ms Adjusts the delay time from the sound direct sound until the chorus or Pan A B L63 63R Pan of the pitch shift A or B flanger sound is heard sound Mod Feedback 98 98 Adjusts the proportion of the ef Direct Level 0 127 Volume of the direct sound fect sound that is fed back into Feedback 3 98 98 Adjusts the proportion of the the effect Negative settings pitch shift sound that is fed back will invert the phase into the effect Negative set Xover LowFreq 50 4000 Hz Attenuates the effect in the tings will invert the phase range below the specified fre Low Damp Freq 50 4000 Hz Adjusts the frequency below quency which sound fed back to the ef Xover Low Gain 36 0 dB Specifies how greatly the low fect will be cut range will be attenuated The Low Damp function damps Xover HiFreq 2000 20000 Hz Attenuates the effect in the the low frequency band of the range above the specified fre pitch shift sound quicker than quency other bands Xover Hi Gain 36 0 dB Specifies how greatly the high Low Damp 36 0 dB Degree of Low Damp range will be attenuated Gain Mod Level 0 127 Volume of the chorus or flanger Hi Damp Freq 2000 20000 Hz Adjusts the frequency above sound which sound fed back to the ef Ps Low Freq 50 4000 Hz Frequency of the low range fect will be cut Ps Low Gain 15 415 dB Gain of the low range High Damp by attenuating the Ps Hi Freq 2000 2
197. WET Delay Pan Type Values Dly 1 Dly 2 Diy 3 Dly 4 Dly 5 L63 L32 0 32R 63R L63 32R L32 63R 0 L63 63R L32 32R 0 32R L32 L63 0 63R 63R L63 L32 32R L32 32R L63 63R 0 0 63R L63 32R L32 0 63R L32 32R L63 XO CO NIA OT m O Lj Al 0 32R L32 63R L63 o 63R 32R 0 L32 L63 124 16 Analog Delay gt Chorus This effect reproduces the sound of the BOSS CE 1 Chorus Ensemble To reproduce the sound of the unit at the time a monaural analog type delay is first inserted in series Analog Chorus Parameter Value Description Dly Sw OFF ON Turns the delay on off Dly Repeat Rate 0 127 Corresponds to the delay time in 1 a delay effects Dly Intensity 2 0 127 Corresponds to the feedback set ting in a delay effects Dly Level 0 127 Sets the volume of the delay sound Chorus Sw OFF ON Turns chorus or vibrato on off Chorus Mode CHORUS VI Switches the sound between BRATO chorus and vibrato modes Chorus Intensi 0 127 When Chorus Mode is CHO ty 3 RUS this sets the pitch vibrato speed Vibrato Depth 0 127 When Chorus Mode is VIBRA TO this sets the pitch vibrato depth Vibrato Rate 0 127 When Chorus Mode is VIBRA TO this sets the pitch vibrato speed Chorus Out MONO ST 1 Switches the output format
198. Wave 999 System Save i Computer Project The largest unit of memory used by the V Synth is the project A project contains up to 512 patches up to 999 waves and various system settings The V Synth uses one project at a time Internal Memory The V Synth has internal memory that stores a project When the V Synth is shipped from the factory this memory already contains patch and wave data but you are free to overwrite any of this You can always restore the memory to the factory set contents Factory Reset Work Area Temporary Area When you turn on the power of the V Synth or when you load a project in Disk mode the project data is placed in temporary memory called the work area Sampling and sample editing operations modify the data that is in the work area The currently playable patch data is then further placed from the work area into a location called the temporary area This means that even after editing a patch you can return to the unedited condition by once again recalling that patch Since sample data and patch data that you edit will disappear if you simply turn off the power you must save SAVE WRITE it if you want to keep your changes PC Cards Internal memory can hold only one project but you can use commercially available PC cards to store additional projects Sampling Memory The amount of memory you can use for sampling will depend on the state of the project that
199. While playing the keyboard to produce sound place your hand over the D Beam and slowly move it up and down Effects will be applied to the sound according to the button you pressed in step 2 4 To turn off the D Beam controller once again press the button that you pressed in step 2 so its indicator goes out HINT The D Beam controller settings are saved with each patch This means that you can create patches that contain D Beam settings you like By assigning a MIDI controller number to the D Beam controller you can use the D Beam to control an external MIDI device that is connected For details refer to Beam p 79 The usable range of the D Beam controller The following diagram shows the usable range of the D Beam controller Waving your hand outside this range will produce no effect The D BEAM indicator will light when the D Beam controller is responding The D BEAM indicator will not light if you are outside the valid range of the D Beam controller The usable range of the D Beam controller will become extremely small when used under strong direct sunlight Please be aware of this when using the D Beam controller outside 29 Patch Mode ing in ee Pla y Playing in Patch Mode Applying an Effect by Turning a Knob Assignable Controller You can turn the ASSIGNABLE CONTROL knobs to modify the sound in real time The assignable controllers use matrix control to apply effects to the soun
200. Width LFO Depth 63 63 Amount of LFO applied to 3 bandwidth For details on LFO settings refer to Making LFO Settings p 49 For details on envelope settings refer to Making Envelope Settings p 48 Dual Filter Two filters can be connected in series or parallel i Detune Detune 2 0 127 Detune Dyn Env 63 63 Envelope depth for the in put sound Detune LFO 63 63 Amount of LFO applied to Depth 4 detune For details on envelope settings refer to Making Envelope Settings p 48 LFO For details on LFO settings refer to Making LFO Settings p 49 Parameter Value Description COSM Type Filter Type LPF HPF LPF Type of filter gt HPF BPF BPF Filter1 2 Freq 1 2 0 127 Cutoff frequency of the fil ter Freq KF 200 200 Key follow setting for filter cutoff frequency Reso 0 127 Resonance Freq LFO Depth 63 63 Amount of LFO applied to 33 94 filter cutoff frequency For details on envelope settings refer to Making Envelope Settings p 48 LFO For details on LFO settings refer to Making LFO Settings p 49 113 MEN Appendices COSM List A TVF Cuts off a specific frequency band to change a sounds brightness thickness and other qualities DHT VF Dynamic TVF Cuts off a specific frequency band t
201. XECUTE gt MOVE FILE FOLDER Are You Sure The file s or folder s will be moved from the disk Is it OK to execute To cancel the operation touch CANCEL To exe cute the operation touch lt EXECUTE gt OTHER SAMPLE EXISTS Number Already Contains a Sample Clear Existing Sample A different sample already exists in the selected sample number ett To cancel the operation touch lt CANCEL gt If you wish to overwrite the sample of the selected num ber touch lt EXECUTE gt Copy Buffer Not Avail Are You Sure PROJECT NOT FOUND Cannot find the project specified as the current Touch lt ACCEPT gt to erase the message Internal Project Was Loaded project The internal project was loaded SAMPLE EDIT When you perform the Cut or Clear sample editing To cancel the operation touch CANCEL If you operation the data is simultaneously copied as well However this message indicates that in this case there is insufficient memory remaining to copy the data Do you still want to execute the Cut or Clear Since a copy will not be made you will be unable to restore the data simply by pasting it back The Cut or Clear operation can still be carried out though also want to Copy the data shorten the range being Cut or Cleared p 66 or delete unneeded samples from the V Synth p 60 To execute the Cut or Clear operation touch lt EXECUTE gt SAMPLE EXISTS Overwrite Exist
202. a LFO 1 Key Sync 0 1 I I I 20000 20000 OFF ON LE 00 2E 0000 aaaa I I I 0000 bbbb I I 00 08 0000 Oaaa LFO 2 Waveform 0 7 I 0000 cccc I SIN TRI SAW SQR RND TRP l 0000 dddd COSM Parameter 12 12768 52768 S amp H CHS l 20000 20000 D 00 09 0000 aaaa I is 00 32 0000 aaaa I I 0000 bbbb LFO 2 Rate 0 144 I 0000 bbbb I 0 127 MUSICAL NOTES 0000 cccc I 00 OB 0000 Oaaa LFO 2 Offset 0 4 I 0000 dddd COSM Parameter 13 12768 52768 I I I 100 50 0 50 100 I I I 20000 20000 I 00 OC Oaaa aaaa LFO 2 Delay Time 0 127 D 00 36 0000 aaaa I I 00 OD 0000 00aa LFO 2 Fade Mode 0 3 I 0000 bbbb I ON IN ON OUT OFF IN OFF OUT 0000 cccc l I OO OE Oaaa aaaa LFO 2 Fade Time 0 127 I 0000 dddd COSM Parameter 14 12768 52768 I 00 OF 0000 000a LFO 2 Key Sync 0 1 I I I 20000 20000 OFF ON LE 00 3A 0000 aaaa I I 0000 bbbb I I 00 10 0000 Oaaa LFO 3 Waveform 0 7 I 0000 cccc I SIN TRI SAW SQR RND TRP l 0000 dddd COSM Parameter 15 12768 52768 S amp H CHS l 20000 20000 D 00 11 0000 aaaa I 14 00 3E 0000 aaaa I I 0000 bbbb LFO 3 Rate 0 144 I 0000 bbbb I 0 127 MUSICAL NOTES 0000 cccc I 00 13 0000
203. aaa aaaa Part 9 Bank Select MSB CC 0 0 127 00 2D 000a aaaa EQ Low Gain 0 30 l 00 19 Oaaa aaaa Part 9 Bank Select LSB CC 32 0 127 I 15 15 dB 00 1A Oaaa aaaa Part 9 Program Number PC 0 127 00 2E 000a aaaa EQ Mid 1 Freq 0 26 l 00 1B Oaaa aaaa Part 10 Bank Select MSB CC 0 0 127 I 50 20000 Hz 00 1C Oaaa aaaa Part 10 Bank Select LSB CC 32 0 127 00 2F 0000 Oaaa EQ Mid 1 Q 0 5 l 00 1D Oaaa aaaa Part 10 Program Number PC 0 127 0 5 8 0 00 1E Oaaa aaaa Part 11 Bank Select MSB CC 0 0 127 00 30 000a aaaa EQ Mid 1 Gain 0 30 00 1F Oaaa aaaa Part 11 Bank Select LSB CC 32 0 127 I I 15 15 dB 00 20 Oaaa aaaa Part 11 Program Number PC 0 127 00 31 000a aaaa EQ Mid 2 Freq 0 26 00 21 Oaaa aaaa Part 12 Bank Select MSB CC 0 0 127 I 50 20000 Hz l 00 22 0aaa aaaa Part 12 Bank Select LSB CC 32 0 127 00 32 0000 Oaaa EQ Mid 2 Q 05 00 23 Oaaa aaaa Part 12 Program Number PC 0 127 I I I 0 5 8 0 00 24 Oaaa aaaa Part 13 Bank Select MSB CC 0 0 127 00 33 000a aaaa EQ Mid 2 Gain 0 30 l 00 25 Oaaa aaaa Part 13 Bank Select LSB CC 32 0 127 15 15 dB l 00 26 Oaaa aaaa Part 13 Program Number PC 0 127
204. aaaa TVA Level Keyfollow 44 84 I I I 200 200 I 00 09 Oaaa aaaa TVA Level LFO Depth 1 127 I I I 63 63 I 00 OA Oaaa aaaa TVA Pan 0 127 I I I L64 63R I 00 OB 00aa aaaa TVA Pan Keyfollow 44 84 I I I 200 200 I 00 OC Oaaa aaaa TVA Pan LFO Depth 1 127 I I I 63 63 I I 00 OD Oaaa aaaa MEX Send Level 0 127 I 00 OE Oaaa aaaa Chorus Send Level 0 127 l 00 OF Oaaa aaaa Reverb Send Level 0 127 I 00 10 0000 00aa Output Assign 0 2 MULTI MAIN DIR I 00 11 0000 000a OSC 1 Switch 0 1 OFF ON I 00 12 0000 00aa OSC 1 Type 0 2 ANALOG PCM EXTIN I 00 13 000a aaaa OSC 1 Wave Gain 52 76 I I I 12 12 dB I 00 14 Oaaa aaaa OSC 1 Pitch 1 127 I I I 63 63 I 00 15 00aa aaaa OSC 1 Pitch Keyfollow 44 84 I I I 200 200 I 00 16 Oaaa aaaa OSC 1 Pitch LFO Depth 1 127 I I I 63 63 I 00 17 Oaaa aaaa OSC 1 Pitch Envelope Depth 1 127 I I I 63 63 I 00 18 Oaaa aaaa OSC 1 Coarse Tune 16 112 I I 48 48 I 00 19 Oaaa aaaa OSC 1 Fine Tune 14 114 I I I 50 50 cent I 00 1A 000a aaaa OSC 1 Random Pitch Depth 0 30 I I I I I I 20 30 40 50 60 80 I I 90 100 200 300 400 500 I I 600 700 800 900 1000 1100 I I 1200 00 1B Oaaa aaaa OSC 1
205. aaaa Zone 4 Range Upper 0 127 REAL 1 127 I c 1 G9 00 03 0000 OOaa Keyboard Sens 0 2 I 00 25 Oaaa aaaa Zone 5 Range Upper 0 127 I LIGHT MEDIUM HEAVY I I c 1 G9 l 00 04 000a aaaa Aftertouch Sens 0 20 00 26 0aaa aaaa Zone 6 Range Upper 0 127 0 200 Cal Soo mal 00 27 0aaa aaaa Zone 7 Range Upper 0 127 00 05 000a aaaa Patch Transmit Channel 0 17 I I I c 1 G9 I 1 16 RX CH OFF 00 28 0aaa aaaa Zone 8 Range Upper 0 127 I csm 69 00 06 OOOa aaaa Beam Sens L 0 20 00 29 0aaa aaaa Zone 9 Range Upper 0 127 0 200 p yo49 d I 00 07 OOOa aaaa Beam Sens R 0 20 00 2A Oaaa aaaa Zone 10 Range Upper 0 127 l 0 200 l l c 1 69 00 08 Oaaa aaaa Beam 1 Assign L 0 95 00 2B Oaaa aaaa Zone 11 Range Upper 0 127 OFF CC01 CC31 CC33 CC95 I I I C 1 G9 I 00 09 Oaaa aaaa Beam 1 Assign R 0 95 l 00 2C Oaaa aaaa Zone 12 Range Upper 0 127 I OFF CC01 CC31 CC33 CC95 I l I c 1 G9 I 00 OA Oaaa aaaa Beam 2 Assign L 0 95 l 00 2D Oaaa aaaa Zone 13 Range Upper 0 127 l OFF CC01 CC31 CC33 CC95 I I C 1 G9 I 00 OB Oaaa aaaa Beam 2 Assign R 0 95 00 2E 0aaa aaaa Zone 1
206. al is raised until it reaches a fixed volume Value 0 127 Attack Attack Time Specifies the attack time of the input sound Value 0 127 Tone Adjusts the tone quality of the compressor Value 50 50 Level Output Level Adjusts the output volume Value 0 24 dB 61 HE Creating and Editing Samples Sample Mode Creating and Editing Samples Sample Mode B Limiter Thres Threshold Level Specifies the level threshold level at which the limiter will begin to function Value 60 0 dB Release Release Time Specifies the time from when the input level drops below the threshold level until the limiter turns off Value 0 127 Tone Adjusts the tonal quality of the limiter Value 50 50 Level Output Level Adjusts the output volume Value 0 24 dB Ratio Specifies the compression ratio Value 1 5 1 2 1 4 1 100 1 B Noise Suppressor Threshold Threshold Level Specifies the level at which the noise suppressor will begin to operate When the signal falls below the specified level it will be muted Value 60 0 dB Release Release Time Specifies the time from when the noise suppressor begins to operate until the volume reaches 0 Value 0 127 Metronome Settings Metronome SAMPLING Metronome v S REMAIH TIME Metro yr Level 22 6 Sec Type Ly O ER ECA Count In us esse 1 Ks N Tempo Beat 120 0 KOEK Temp Pre Metro Metro Type Metronome Type
207. alue 00H 7FH 0 127 157 MEE Appendices MIDI Implementation Program Change Status 2nd byte CnH ppH 0H FH ch 1 16 00H 7FH prog 1 prog 128 n MIDI channel number pp Program number These messages are transmitted when Patch is selected But not transmitted when Transmit Program Change parameter SYSTEM Com MIDI USB is OFF Channel Pressure Status 2nd byte DnH vvH OH FH ch 1 16 00H 7FH 0 127 n MIDI channel number vv Channel Pressure e Pitch Bend Change Status 2nd byte 3rd byte EnH HH mmH OH FH ch 1 16 00 00H 40 00H 7F 7FH 8192 0 8191 n MIDI channel number mm 11 Pitch Bend value System Realtime Messages G Active Sensing Status FEH This message is transmitted at intervals of approximately 250 msec This message is not sent when Transmit Active Sensing parameter SYSTEM Ctrl Tx is OFF mSystem Exclusive Messages Universal Non realtime System Exclusive Message and Data Set 1 DT1 are the only System Exclusive messages transmitted by the V Synth Universal Non realtime System Exclusive Message Oldentity Reply Message Receiving Identity Request Message the V Synth send this message Status Data byte Status FOH 7EH dev 06H 02H 41H 53H 01H F7H 00H 00H 00H 01H 00H 00H Byte Explanation FOH Exclusive status 7EH D number Universal Non realtime Message dev Device ID dev 10H 1FH 06H Sub ID 1 Gene
208. ameter for matrix control Destination These correspond as follows 1 Destination CSM1 2 PRM1 2 Destination CSM1 2 PRM2 3 Destination CSM1 2 LFO PRM1 4 Destination CSM1 2 LFO PRM2 Overdrive Distortion Overdrive produces a natural sounding distortion amp similar to that produced by a vacuum tube amplifier Distortion produces a more intense distortion than the overdrive effect Parameter Value Description COSM Type Drive Type OD DS Selects whether to use over drive OD or distortion DS Output Level 0 127 Output Level Drive Drive 1 0 127 Degree of distortion Drive LFO Depth 63 63 Amount of LFO applied to 3 distortion For details on envelope settings refer to Making Envelope Settings p 48 Tone Tone 2 0 127 Tonal character Tone KF 200 200 Key follow setting for tone Tone LFO Depth 63 63 Amount of LFO applied to 4 tone For details on envelope settings refer to Making Envelope Settings p 48 LFO For details on LFO settings refer to Making LFO Settings p 49 mraji Wave Shape F You can use a variety of waveforms to create and distort the sound Parameter Value Description COSM Type Shape Type 1 6 Type of waveform Output Level 0 127 Output Level Drive Drive 1 0 127 Degree of distortion Drive LFO Depth 63 63 Amount of LFO applied to
209. ameters This section explains the functions the different patch parameters have as well as the composition of these parameters MEMO Parameters marked by A can be controlled by specific MIDI messages Matrix Control In the PATCH Edit Com Matrix Ctrl screen you can specify how the parameter will be controlled p 38 Parameters marked by 4 can be controlled by panel buttons or knobs Settings Common to the Entire Patch Common General PATCH Edit Com General INIT PATCH 2 01 v Sua OO II Mode Type OFF NormAL PE RA TIME cij Mg Eg J Mono Poly Legato Time Time Velo Sens 8 Structure Type Specifies how the various sound creating elements will be combined Value TYPE1 This is the most conventional structure Different sounds from OSC1 and OSC2 are mixed by MOD processed by COSMI to create the tonal character e g using SBF Side Band Filter and then processed by COSM2 to adjust the tone e g using TVF TYPE2 This structure connects OSC1 and OSC2 asymmetrically This is effective when using a modulation that has the modulator set to anything other than MIX Typically you will use OSC1 and COSMI to create the basic sound then select the OSC2 sound and MOD settings to add variation and finally select TVF in COSM2 to adjust the tone TYPES In this structure OSC1 is paired with COSM1 and OSC2 is paired with COSM2 You can use a controller such as the Ti
210. an artificial reverberation that is quite different than naturally occurring reverberation 10 Delay This is a stereo delay Depending on the length of the delay you set you can get long echoes thick sounds or spatial sounds Parameter Value Description Parameter Value Description Pre Low Freq 50 4000 Hz Frequency of the low range Mode MONO STE Switches stereo monaural or al Pre Low Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the low range REO ALTER ternate Pre Mid Freq 50 20000 Hz Frequency of the middle NATE MONO This is a single input range dual output delay Stereo sound Pre Mid Q 0 5 0 7 1 0 2 0 Gain of the middle range left and right are mixed before 4 0 8 0 Set a higher value for Q to being input a narrow the range to be af STEREO This is a dual input fected dual output delay The delay Pre Mid Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the middle range sound 3s ipe bead me ai Pre Hi Freq 2000 20000 Hz Frequency of the high a Peon ety s _ ical ot E ALTERNATE The left and right Pre Hi Gain 15 15 dB an of the high range delay sound output alternately Pre Dly Time 0 200 0 ms Adjusts the delay time from Alternate delay the direct sound until the Delay Time 0 1300 ms Adjusts the delay time from the delay sound is heard MONO 0 650 direct sound until the delay Density 0 99 Density of the reverb ms STEREO
211. applied to the range be reflected sound low this frequency and by Release Density 0 99 Density of the sound that the Hi Rev Time to the reaches the listener after range above this frequency many repeated reflections Pre Dly Time 0 200 0 ms Adjusts the delay time from Low Damp Freq 50 4000 Hz Adjusts the frequency be the direct sound until the low which sound fed back delay sound is heard to the effect will be cut Density 0 99 Density of the reverb The Low Damp function Room Size 5 6 32 6 m Size of the room which is damps the low frequency simulated band of the reverb sound Early Ref Level 0 99 Volume level of the initial quicker than other bands reflected sound Low Damp Gain 36 0 dB Degree of Low Damp Release Density 0 99 Density of the sound that Hi Damp Freq 2000 20000 Hz Adjusts the frequency reaches the listener after above which sound fed many repeated reflections back to the effect will be Low Damp Freq 50 4000 Hz Adjusts the frequency be cut low which sound fed back High Damp by attenuating to the effect will be cut the higher frequencies first The Low Damp function Hi Damp Gain 36 0 dB Degree of High Damp damps the low frequency Post HC Freq 160 15000 Hz Frequency at which the band of the reverb sound THRU high cut filter will begin to quicker than other bands take effect THRU no filter Low Damp Gain 36 0 dB Degree of Low Damp is used Hi Damp Freq 2000 20000 Hz Adjusts the frequency above which sound fed back to
212. at can be transmitted at one time is fixed for each type of data And data requests must be made with a fixed starting address and size Refer to the address and size given in Parameter Address Map p 159 For the checksum refer to p 169 Not received when the Receive Exclusive parameter SYSTEM Com MIDI USB is OFF 156 ODataSeti DT1 12H Status Data byte Status FOH 41H dev 00H 53H 12H aaH bbH FH ccH ddH eeH ffH sum Byte Explanation FOH Exclusive status 41H ID number Roland dev Device ID dev 00H 1FH 7FH 00H Model ID 1 V Synth 53H Model ID 2 V Synth 12H Command ID DT1 aaH Address MSB upper byte of the starting address of the data to be sent bbH Address upper middle byte of the starting address of the data to be sent ccH Address lower middle byte of the starting address of the data to be sent ddH Address LSB lower byte of the starting address of the data to be sent eeH Data the actual data to be sent Multiple bytes of data are transmitted in order starting from the address ffH Data sum Checksum F7H EOX End Of Exclusive The amount of data that can be transmitted at one time depends on the type of data and data will be transmitted from the specified starting address and size Refer to the address and size given in Parameter Address Map p 159 Data larger than 256 bytes will be divided into packets of 256 bytes or less and each packet will
213. ate a new patch The sound of a patch is created by six sections of parameters When editing a patch you need to be aware of how each section affects the overall sound Four Tips for Editing Patches Select a patch that is similar to the sound you wish to create It s hard to create a new sound that s exactly what you want if you just select a patch and modify its parameters at random It makes sense to start with a patch whose sound is related to what you have in mind Check the Structure setting The structure type is an important parameter which determines how the six sections are combined Before you actually begin editing you should understand how the sections are related to each other Decide which section s you will use When creating a patch it is very important to decide which section s you will use In the Edit screen of each section use the on off switch to specify whether that section will be used on or not used off You can also use the on off buttons located in the STRUCTURE section of the V Synth s panel Turn Effects off Since the V Synth effects have such a profound impact on its sounds turn them off to listen to the sound itself so you can better evaluate the changes you re making Since you will hear the original sound of the patch itself when the effects are turned off the results of your modifications will be easier to hear Actually sometimes just changing effects settings
214. attern Edit KBD Velo Duration if S REAL 100 common 051 IE moD oos E TUR eee In this screen you can set the following arpeggiator parameters Arpeggio Switch Switches the Arpeggiator on off Hold Switch between Hold On Hold Off for the Arpeggiator performance Shuffle Rate Patch Tempo Specify the tempo of an arpeggio Octave Range Specify the range of the arpeggio performance in octave units KBD Velo Specify the note strength of the keys you play Accent Rate Vary the strength and note length of the accents to modify the rhythmic feel groove of the performance Motif Specifies how the arpeggio will be sounded Shuffle Duration Create shuffle rhythms by modifying the timing at which notes are sounded Shuffle Resolution Specify the timing of the notes in terms of note value iS For details regarding each parameter refer to Arpeggio p 40 gs Arpeggiator settings can be saved with each patch as part of the patch settings This means that you can create patches that contain the most effective settings Creating an Original Arpeggio Pattern Pattern Edit You can create your own arpeggio pattern that specifies how an arpeggio will be sounded This gives you even more interesting ways to use arpeggios An arpeggio pattern is a set of data that can be up to 32 steps horizontally x 16 lines vertically hin An arpeggio pattern can be saved for an individual
215. ave command or the Disk mode s Save Project command to save the project 7 Use the Disk mode s Tools menu Tools p 87 to delete the data you copied in step 2 The V Synth s File Structure As seen from your computer the V Synth s file structure is as follows Do not perform operations on your computer to erase format or rename these folders or files If the V Synth stops operating correctly break the USB connection between the computer and the V Synth p 92 p 94 and then execute the Factory Reset command p 98 This will erase all the data that has been saved on the V Synth As a precaution against such occurrences we recommend that you always make a backup of your data p 94 Internal Memory V SYNTH Internal prj V Synth System s00 V Synth Template s00 V Synth Palette s00 PATCH 001 oooooxxxxxx p00 002 xxxxxxxxxxxx p00 512 XXXXXXXXXXXX p00 WAVE 001 xxXXXXXXXXXX Wav 002 XXXXXXXXXXXX w00 999 XXXXXXXXXXXX WaV PC Card PC CARD Project prj V Synth System s00 V Synth Template s00 V Synth Palette s00 PATCH 001 xxxxxxxxxxxx p00 002 xxxxxxxxxxxx p00 512 XXXXXXXXXXXX p00 WAVE 001 XXXXXXXXXXXX WAav 002 xxxxxxxxxxxx w00 999 XXXXXXXXXXXX WaV Project2 prj 95 MU Connecting to Your Computer via USB USB Mode Connecting to Your Computer via USB USB Mode Exchanging MIDI Messages with Your Computer MIDI Mode Driver Installation an
216. be sent at an interval of about 20 ms Regarding the checksum please refer to p 169 Not received when the Receive Exclusive parameter SYSTEM Com MIDI USB is OFF Status Data byte Status FOH 41H dev 42H 12H aaH bbH ccH F7H ddH eeH sum Byte Explanation FOH Exclusive status 41H ID number Roland dev Device ID dev 10H 1FH 7FH 42H Model ID GS 12H Command ID DT1 aaH Address MSB upper byte of the starting address of the transmitted data bbH Address middle byte of the starting address of the transmitted data ccH Address LSB lower byte of the starting address of the transmitted data ddH Data the actual data to be transmitted Multiple bytes of data are transmitted starting from the address eeH Data sum Checksum F7H EOX End Of Exclusive Theamount of data that can be transmitted at one time depends on the type of data and data will be transmitted from the specified starting address and size Refer to the address and size given in Parameter Address Map p 159 Data larger than 256 bytes will be divided into packets of 256 bytes or less and each packet will be sent at an interval of about 20 ms Regarding the checksum please refer to p 169 Notreceived when the Receive Exclusive parameter SYSTEM Com MIDI USB is OFF 2 Data Transmission MIDI Implementation Channel Voice Messages e Note Off Status 2nd byte 3rd byte 8nH kkH vvH n MIDI channel number 0H
217. becomes higher Filter Reso 0 127 nance Resonance level of the filter Raising the setting increases res onance near the cutoff frequen cy giving the sound a special characteristic Parameter Value Description Filter Gain 0 24 dB Compensates for the volume dropped in the cut frequency range with some filters The level of compensation in creases as the value is increased and raise the volume 41 Pseudo Stereo Spreads the components of the monaural input sound to left and right creating an artificial sense of stereo output L Pseudo Stereo R Parameter Value Description Depth 1 0 15 Spaciousness of the sound field 137 MEN Appendices Chorus Parameters The functions of Chorus parameters are explained Chorus Type 01 Chorus 1 This conventional chorus effect adds spaciousness and depth to the sound Slow modulation frequency with less depth 02 Chorus 2 This conventional chorus effect adds spaciousness and depth to the sound Rapid modulation frequency with less depth 03 Chorus 3 This conventional chorus effect adds spaciousness and depth to the sound Slow modulation frequency with more depth 04 Chorus 4 This conventional chorus effect adds spaciousness and depth to the sound Rapid modulation frequency with more depth 05 Feedback Chorus This chorus offers a flanger like effect creating a soft sound
218. cale Tune for B 28 228 100 100 I Offset I 00 4A Oaaa aaaa Matrix Control 1 Source 0 108 I Address Description I I OFF CC01 CC31 CC33 CC95 BEND AFT I I l PAD X PAD Y PAD X PAD Y TRIP R 00 00 Oaaa aaaa Patch Name 1 qaa m Tak e BEAM L BEAM R KNOB1 KNOB2 VELO KEYF 32 127 ASCII 00 4B Oaaa aaaa Matrix Control 1 Dest 1 0 77 I 00 01 Oaaa aaaa Patch Name 2 32 127 I I I OFF 32 127 ASCII l l j OSCI PITCH OSCI TIME PW OSC1 FORMA FAT I 00 02 Oaaa aaaa Patch Name 3 32 127 I OSCI LVL 32 127 ASCII OSCI PENV ATK OSCI PENV DCY OSCI PENV REL 00 03 Oaaa aaaa Patch Name 4 32 127 l l l OSC1 TENV ATK OSCI TENV DCY OSCI TENV REL I 32 127 ASCII OSCI FENV ATK OSCI FENV DCY OSCI FENV REL 00 04 Oaaa aaaa Patch Name 5 32 12 79 11 l l OSCI AENV ATK OSCI AENV DCY OSCI AENV REL 32 127 ASCII I I OSC1 LFO RATE OSCI LFO PCH OSCI LFO IM PW 00 05 Oaaa aaaa Patch Name 6 Sao Sy LATS OSCI LFO FR FT OSCI LFO LVL 32 127 ASCII I I l OSC2 PITCH OSC2 TIME PW OSC2 FORMA FAT 00 06 Oaaa aaaa Patch Name 7 32 Awy OSC2 LVL 32 127 ASCII OSC2 PENV ATK OSC2 PENV DCY OSC2 PENV REL 00 07 Oaaa aaaa Patch Name 8 32 1273 l l l
219. cd 18 23 FOCH S occ reete tenter pese rte ente nte nap godes 18 23 Numerics HT KeA MEE EAE EPEA SEE teta cesse eec 13 22 4 Band EQ acu tte Pet Ue et qaa lag w 75 4 Band equalizer switch sse 75 A Au a E AEE E BPP EU EDD ATT ERE TOREM A m YaNa Ke TE E A NT ADSR Attack i ADSR Decay ADSR Release 5i ADSRS Statfi neto tee ntes nte asi ed e ERR Neg After ASSIST M After Local Sw After Sens Aftertouch sensitivity Analog oscillator impact U 42 Analog oscillator waveform a 42 Arabian scale gt DNI P AARE Sahata ATDeEglO a cause ee dece Alis Arpeggio duration a S a u u ush Arpeggio hold switch u Arpeggio keyboard velocity a Arpeggio motif a a a um nina nuusan u Arpeggio octave range eomocononcnnoncnnnncncnrannncnranannncnrannncananan cn cnnan on cn ranannos Arpeggio shuffle rate Arpeggio shuffle resolution gt Arpeggio SWITCH u usaha aia ASSIGNABLE DB EON 12 29 Time trip pad 12 28 Assignable controller sss 30 Assigning a name Files Bolde rs aura eiecit ren een en nel e ce cde 89 ril doe Sample e A irent RRR EERE 63 Assigne LT esa desta A m te Ene ir ett 80 Attack eec sito o nte e eic ee etr dere 46 61 Attack time it AA oe eras 61 PRU OY n us subni o Ei cen 80 B BANK a O 13 Be tn u oas uama
220. ch lt Beep gt to add a check mark v With this setting the beep tone will be heard If you perform the same procedure once again the check mark will be cleared and the beep tone will no longer be heard MEMO If you have turned off the beep tone a V appears in the title area at the top of the screen when you touch a valid point on the touch screen CE Y fer ay adOrchestra 19 Es Overview of the V Synth Overview of the V Synth Moving the Cursor A single screen or window displays multiple parameters or items for selection To edit a parameter s value move the cursor to the value To select an item move the cursor to the item The cursor is a black rectangle and the parameter value or item you select with the cursor is highlighted displayed in inverted colors Cursor PATCH Edit CL orchestra CZ 011 v T j Lefel Leveikr LuILFODp Pan PankF PanLFODP meee Oe o Nx 9 A Curve Sens R Sen D Sens R Sens ZO ves JE e ENVELOPE m 0sC1 E s MOD COSM2 EZZ Cursor Buttons Press A Y L lt or 9 the cursor buttons to move the cursor A lt LJ ey E A moves the cursor up V moves the cursor down lt moves the cursor to the left gt moves the cursor to the right Touch Screen Directly touch a parameter value to move the cursor PATCH Edit TYA MadOrchestra Z 011
221. connect the V Synth via USB and wake up my com puter from Suspend it stops functioning On some computers waking up the computer from the Suspend state while a powered up V Synth is connect ed via USB will cause the computer to freeze Before you Suspend your computer power down the V Synth using the procedure described on p 92 V Synth driver is not mounted in Windows XP If a network drive is mounted in Windows XP that drive number may conflict with the V Synth drive causing the V Synth drive to not be recognized Change the assignment of the network drive Find new hardware wizard does not execute automati cally The Insert Disk dialog box does not appear Find new hardware wizard ends before the process is completed t may take about 15 seconds or more after the USB cable is connected for the V Synth to be detected Is the USB cable connected correctly Make sure that the V Synth and your computer are cor rectly connected via a USB cable Is USB enabled on your computer Refer to the operation manual for your computer and make sure that USB is enabled Does your computer meet the USB specifications If you are using a computer that does not fulfill the electrical requirements of the USB specifications oper ation may be unstable In this case you may be able to solve the problem by connecting a USB hub If the above actions do not solve the problem it is pos s
222. creen appears SYSTEM Com MIDI USB v Clock Source MIDI Device ID Pos M EXTERNAL 2 au o MIDI Rx PC RxBank RxSus Ex TXEdit Clock Out USB E ON ON ON USB Setup Tont romer U LINK 4 Touch lt USB Setup gt The SYSTEM Com USB Setting window appears SYSTEM Com MIDI USB ww SYSTEM Com USB Setting These parameters are reflected after pressing 0K USE Mode Storage USB MIDI Thru Sw OFF 5 Touch USB Mode lt Storage gt USB Storage mode will be selected 6 Touch lt OK gt 7 Ifa WARNING window like the following appears touch lt ACCEPT gt to close the window CHANGE USB MODE USB Mode Will Be Chansed ACCEPT 8 In the lower right of the SYSTEM Com MIDI USB screen touch lt Write gt to save the system settings For the rest of the procedure read either Windows Me 2000 XP users or Macintosh users as appropriate Windows users Continue reading from this page Macintosh users Read from page 93 W Windows Users O Windows 98 98SE Users You must install the driver from the included CD ROM into your computer Be sure to read the Readme file on the CD ROM before installation gt Storage Wn98 Readme_e htm O Windows XP 2000 Me or later Users Installation is completely automatic Connecting to Your Computer via USB USB Mode Connecting
223. ctly if a driver for I O Data Cor poration s USB CD R drive is installed In this case dis able ISD 200 BOTBridge or other driver file by moving it out of the Extensions folder located within the system folder When the computer returns from the Sleep state an indi cation of MIDI off line ap pears The V Synth s USB MIDI driver does not support the Sleep functionality of Mac OS Do not use the Sleep functionality of Mac OS When you use the V Synth open the Energy Saver control panel and specify Never as the period of inactivity before the system goes to sleep 148 Message List The V Synth displays a variety of messages There are three types of message screen ERROR screen WARNING screen Message box This will appear when caution is necessary operation could not be executed correctly Messages are listed here alphabetically for each type of message screen ERROR Screens This will appear if you attempt to perform an incorrect operation or if an operation could not be executed correctly This informs you of the current status It will also appear if you attempt to perform an incorrect operation or if an If an ERROR screen appears touch lt ACCEPT gt to erase the message Message Meaning Action DISK The media is full and no further writing is possible Delete unneeded files from the media p 88 Alter Disk Full natively provide other media that has free
224. cussion instrument sounds are not usually used to play melodies you do not need to be able to use the keyboard to play a scale E 1 A he PATCH PLAY screen and select the patch ou ICCC ccess the p whose settings you wish to modify p 21 99 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 E s If you want to create all your patches from the ground up rather 5 Touch lt 01 gt than the patches that have already been prepared carry out the Zone 01 will be selected and the top note number of zone 01 will Initialize operation p 33 Be displayed inthe upper ight t the sereen 2 Touch lt Y gt in the upper right of the screen 6 Specify the split point between zones 01 and 02 Either turn A pulldown menu appears the VALUE dial or use INC DEC to specify the note number You can also specify the note number by dragging ii Te Divs a Paw Ch TX RAZRX 1 4 2 120 0 Trans C 0 001 MadOr SERE TNR UR Info to left or right on the keyboard graphic in the touch screen If you want to divide the keyboard into three zones lower the YB PATCH Name top note of zone 02 and specify the split point between zones 02 um PI rite and 03 By lowering the top note of the highest zone in this way PRTCH Init PRTCH Copy you can add more zones You can specify a maximum of sixteen PRTCH Delete zones 7 Touch lt OK gt The zones will be established and you will return to the PATCH 3
225. d This means that you will need to make matrix control settings separately Set the matrix control Source to KNOB1 or KNOB2 and specify the parameter to be controlled in Destination For details on this setting refer to Matrix Ctrl p 38 1 Access the PATCH PLAY screen p 21 2 While playing the keyboard to produce sound turn the ASSIGNABLE CONTROL knobs C1 C2 The sound will change according to the function assigned to each knob ASSIGNABLE CONTROL c1 ca dau vul HINT The assignable controller settings are saved with each patch This means that you can create patches that contain assignable controller settings you like By assigning MIDI controller numbers to the assignable controllers you can turn C1 or C2 to control an external MIDI device that is connected For details refer to TT Pad Knob p 80 Synchronizing Music and Video While You Play the V Synth V LINK The V Synth lets you use the pitch bend modulation lever Time Trip pad D Beam controller and C1 C2 knobs to control an externally connected video device that supports V LINK This means that your performance on the V Synth can control not only sound but also images producing sound and video effects that are linked to your playing dy
226. d Settings In order to use the V Synth as a USB MIDI device from your computer you must first install the USB MIDI driver The USB MIDI driver is on the included V Synth Driver CD ROM What is the USB MIDI Driver The USB MIDI Driver is a software which passes data between the V Synth and the application sequencer software etc that is running on the USB connected computer The USB MIDI Driver sends data from the application to the V Synth and passes data from the V Synth to the application Application USB connector USB cable Computer USB connector PH teh V synth In order to use USB in MIDI mode you must install the driver from the included CD ROM into your computer The correct driver and the installation procedure will depend on your system and on the other programs you are using Be sure to read the Readme file on the CD ROM before installation Windows XP 2000 gt Midi Usb_xp2k Readme_e htm Windows Me 98 98SE gt Midi Usb_me98 Readme_e htm Mac OS 9 9 04 or later gt OS_9 English Readme_OMS E HTM gt OS_9 English Readme_FM E HTM Mac OS X OS_X Readme E HTM Other Functions Transmitting Data to an External MIDI Device Data Transfer Patch setup and system settings will be transmitted to an external MIDI device This operation i
227. d external input For example since the PCM oscillators provide VariPhrase functionality you can change the waveform playback speed in the forward or reverse directions Approximately 300 different preset waveforms are built in In addition you can use waveforms that you sampled from the analog or digital input The powerful analog modeling sound generator creates a waveform by internal calculation and is great for creating unique tonal changes such as adding fatness or more of an edge to your sound COSM processing for creating unique sounds The COSM section uses a rich variety of processing in addition to the usual TVF to vary the sound in extreme ways For example you can use a sideband filter to give a metallic resonance to simple white noise You can use a resonator to add the body resonances of a musical instrument Processes such as wave shaper and guitar amp modeling are also provided Since these effects are independent for each voice you can play chords while preserving the sense of pitch O Carefully selected effects Three types of carefully selected effects are built in MFX multi effects chorus and reverb Also included is a newly developed Pseudo Stereo effect that adds a sense of stereo to monaural sample data allowing you to create a variety of sound fields 10 E An interface that gives life to the sound O Intuitive user interface The V Synth provides a rich variety of controllers for hands on
228. ddH eeH F7H FOH System Exclusive Message status ii ID number an ID number manufacturer ID to indicate the manufacturer whose Exclusive message this is Roland s manufacturer ID is 41H ID numbers 7EH and 7FH are extensions of the MIDI standard Universal Non realtime Messages 7EH and Universal Realtime Messages 7FH dd ee data 00H 7FH 0 127 F7H EOX End Of Exclusive Of the System Exclusive messages received by this device the Universal Non realtime messages and the Universal Realtime messages and the Data Request RQ1 messages and the Data Set DT1 messages will be set automatically Universal Non realtime System Exclusive Messages Oldentity Request Message Status Data byte Status FOH 7EH dev 06H 01H F7H Byte Explanation FOH Exclusive status 7EH ID number Universal Non realtime Message dev Device ID dev 10H 1FH 7FH 06H Sub ID 1 General Information 01H Sub ID 2 Identity Request F7H EOX End Of Exclusive When this message is received Identity Reply message p 158 will be transmitted Universal Realtime System Exclusive Messages OMaster Volume Status Data byte Status FOH 7FH 7FH 04H 01H IIH mmH F7H Byte Explanation FOH Exclusive status 7FH ID number universal realtime message 7FH Device ID Broadcast 04H Sub ID 1 Device Control 01H Sub ID 2 Master Volume 1H Master Volume lower byte mmH Master Volume upper byte F7H EOX End Of Exclusive
229. dddd COSM Parameter 1 12768 52768 01 23 0000 Oaaa Env 13 Velocity Curve 0 7 20000 20000 FIXED 1 7 D 00 06 0000 aaaa I I 01 24 Oaaa aaaa Env 13 Velocity Sens 1 127 0000 bbbb I l l 63 463 0000 cccc I I 01 25 Oaaa aaaa Env 13 Attack Velocity Sens 1 127 0000 dddd COSM Parameter 2 12768 52768 I I I 63 63 I I I 20000 20000 I 01 26 Oaaa aaaa Env 13 Decay Velocity Sens 1 127 14 00 0A 0000 aaaa 63 63 I 0000 bbbb I I 01 27 Oaaa aaaa Env 13 Release Velocity Sens 1 127 0000 ccce I I 63 63 I 0000 dddd COSM Parameter 3 12768 52768 I 01 28 00aa aaaa Env 13 Time Keyfollow 44 84 I DEGERE OA cn 200 4200 D 00 OE 0000 aaaa I I 0000 bbbb i 00 00 01 29 Total Size I l 0000 cece E P I 0000 dddd COSM Parameter 4 12768 52768 I I I 20000 20000 4 00 12 0000 aaaa I ENV 1 OSC1 Pitch I I 0000 bbbb I ENV 2 OSC1 Time Pulse Width 0000 cccc I ENV 3 0SC1 Formant Fat I I 0000 dddd COSM Parameter 5 12768 52768 ENV 4 OSC1 Level I I I I 20000 20000 ENV 5 OSC2 Pitch I E 00 16 0000 aaaa I ENV 6 OSC2 Time Pulse Width I 0000 bbbb I ENV 7 OSC2 Formant Fat I I 0000 cccc I ENV 8 OSC2 Level I
230. e De vice Driver is not installed correct ly Can t install delete use the Did you log on to Windows as a user with administra In order to install delete re install the driver in Win driver in Windows XP 2000 tive privileges dows XP 2000 you must be logged into Windows as a user with administrative privileges such as Adminis trator For details please contact the system adminis trator for your computer system Did you make Driver Signing Options In order to install re install the driver you must make Driver Signing Options Windows XP 2000 displays a Did you make Driver Signing Options In order to install re install the driver you must make Hardware Installation or the settings described in Driver Signing Options Digital Signature Not Found dialog box Deleting Incorrect Device Information Use the following procedure to re install the driver 1 Turn off the power of your computer and start up Windows with all USB cables disconnected except for keyboard and mouse After Windows restarts use a USB cable to connect the V Synth to your computer Turn on the power of V Synth Click the Windows Start button and from the menu that appears choose Settings Control Panel Double click the System icon The System Properties dialog box will appear o av B Me Click the Device Manager tab In Windows XP select the System Properties Hardware tab and click Device Manager
231. e Sound Generator section are located The controls on the left side are mainly those of the Controller section Sound Generator Section The sounds you play on the V Synth are called patches Each patch consists of a structure an arrangement of its six sections zones which allow for sixteen individual setups for sixteen key ranges and three effects Patch Zone 15 Zone 1 STRUCTURE 1 O MOD COSM1 COSM2 TVA oec ED m u STRUCTURE osc1 COSM1 sm cosm2 TVA oe ma O STRUCTURE 3 CHORUS REVERB mmm Osca COSM1 Se WA osce cosa J CJ m m Section name Function OSC1 OSC2 This section generates the sound on which a patch is based The sound is produced ei ther by built in preset waves or sampled waves or by calculating an analog model ing waveform An external audio input source can also be used MOD This section mixes and modulates the two audio signals COSM1 COSM2 This section applies a wide variety of pro cessing including filtering This differs from the effects in that effects are applied to the final mix of the sound COSM is applied to each individual note TVA This section creates time variant changes in volume and sets the pan position Effects function MFX The multi effects are multi purpose effects that can completely change the nature of the patch s sound There are 41 different ef fects types select and use the type that suit
232. e Type LITE original t 120 0 v Beep Sampling Type MONO Tempo TMPL TMPL TMPL Pitch Mic Cine optical ResampT TMPL TMPL TMPL TMPL Sampling Input Pre FX Metro Trigger MONORAL ANALOG OFF REC MANUAL v9 sae or Bs information for the sample 3 In the pulldown menu touch Template Name gt Encode type p 70 The SAMPLING Template Name window appears Template Name FWD Loop Start 00000000 FWD Loop End 00002655 C 4 o BND Loop Start 00000000 Ea one Ea Way BMDLoopEnd 99002655 END LOOP MODE E Time Signature 4 4 Way nate In the SAMPLE Information screen you can check the following Sampling type p 60 Loop point location Loop Start Loop End p 68 SAMPLING Template Vv SAMPLING Template Name AG Li c Tr EN E CEN ad CN EN EM E eee po pner one m as Time signature p 69 Original tempo p 69 Original pitch Original fine tune MEMO Original Tempo Original Pitch and Original Fine Tune can be modified in this screen note If you want to set an accurate original tempo make settings in 4 Touch the on screen alphabetic or numeric keys to enter the new name in the text box the sample editing screen p 69 The on screen keys have the following functions O riginal Pitch lt lt gt lt gt Move the cursor in the text box to the desired input Specifies th
233. e V Synlh 16 How the V Synth Is Organized paseri eea eni per n dite ei atap erre aya ss hace 16 Basic Str cE re aluminio iate etit nb tle id aaa aan q Hire spetta 16 POLY PHONY amet eee rire eret Sit ORIS Tren eH oa EE ur S AEE 16 About Multitimbral Performance M entente tenens 16 Memory i bcd iatis tlg abes ede bassi em hash aqui bu ded toate iege tfe 17 Memory Structure veias acid ie ina tetris 17 Basic Operation of the V Synth iiie venda coda ii tede a cee 18 Changing Operating Modes MODE ua 18 Basic Touch Screen Operation uenis aceti be pss eroe ra adhd Urge ue ck neta 19 Moving the Cursomes acshclalitas terial stings eii dle e a e prede a HM e ertet 20 Editing a Values nee eta oe ep eet AA E aE EEES 20 Playing in Patch Mode ere eia eth neto ee eene 21 About the PATCH PLAY Screemu eset testes desert ee arb eee Eth inae Doe uyu na ss 21 Displaying PATCH PLAY Screen inem etre tete trier eid ente a e e ei ita des 21 Selecting a Patches aa daa aaa iii 21 Selecting Favorite Patches Patch Palette nnn 22 Selecting Patches from the List nennen 22 Transposing the Keyboard in Semitone Steps Transpose a 22 Transposing the Keyboard in Octave Units Octave Shift 23 Playing Single Notes MONO seein a E tnnt tenente tenente ttt n nennen 23 Creating Smooth Pitch Changes P
234. e frequency MID HIGH middle and high range frequency ALL all ranges Sweep Wave form TRL SAWUP SAWDN SOR LFO waveform TRI Triangle wave SAWUP Sawtooth Wave SAWDN Sawtooth Wave SOR Square wave SAWUP SAWDN AAA NINN Sweep Rate 0 05 10 0 Hz Frequency of the LFO modula note tion Sweep Depth 0 127 Modulation depth of the LFO Balance DRY100 0WET Volume balance between the di DRYO0 100WET rect sound DRY and the effect sound WET 117 NENNEN Appendices 04 Isolator and Filter A 3 band isolator filter and low booster are connected in stereo in series Isolator is an equalizer which cuts the volume greatly allowing you to add a special effect to the sound by cutting the volume in varying ranges The filters allow you to modify the frequency response of the input sound widely and give sound a character The low booster emphasizes the bottom to create a heavy bass Parameter Value Description Filter Slope 12 24 dB O Filter s attenuation slope 24 dB per octave steep 12 dB per octave gentle Filter Cutoff 0 127 Cutoff frequency of the filter The closer to zero it is set the lower the cutoff frequency be comes set it closer to 127 and the cutoff frequency becomes higher Filter Reso nance 0 127 Resonance level of the filter Raising the setting increases res o
235. e func AP Mid Level 0 127 tion for the Middle frequency ranges The parameters are the same as for the Low frequency ranges Filter Type THRU LPF Type of filter BPF HPF THRU no filter is used NOTCH LPF Passes frequencies below the Cutoff BPF Passes frequencies near the Cutoff HPF Passes frequencies above the Cutoff NOTCH Passes frequencies other than those near the Cutoff LPF Level HPF NOTCH L lt Overdrive Distortion R lt Parameter Value Description Input Mode MONO STE Selects whether to input in ste REO reo or in monaural If MONO is selected the left and right sound will be mixed and input as monaural Distortion OD DS Selects whether to use overdrive Mode OD or distortion DS Drive 1 0 127 Degree of distortion Amp Sim Sw OFF ON Turns the Amp Simulator on off Amp Type SMALL Type of guitar amp BUILT IN 2 SMALL small amp STACK 3 BUILT IN single unit type amp STACK 2 STACK large double stack amp 3 STACK large triple stack amp Output Level 0 127 Output Level Ps Low Freq 50 4000 Hz Frequency of the low range Ps Low Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the low range Ps Hi Freq 2000 20000 Hz Frequency of the high range Ps Hi Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the high range 118 06 Amp Simulator Guitar Amp Simulator This is an effect that simulates an guitar amp Speaker Simulator Simulator
236. e key that will play the sample at the pitch at which it location was sampled lt SHIFT gt Turn this on when you want to input uppercase letters Value C 1 0 G9 127 or symbols lt Insert gt Turn this on when you want to insert a character at the O riginal Fine Tune cursor location Adjusts the current pitch in one cent steps 1 100 of a semitone over lt Clear gt Erases all characters in the text box a range of 1 2 semitone upward or downward lt Delete gt Deletes the character at the cursor location Value 50 50 lt Back gt Deletes the character that precedes the cursor location 3 When you have finished viewing the information touch lt OK gt to close the window You can also move the input location cursor by pressing the LOOP MODE lt P gt cursor buttons Pressing A will change the character at the cursor location to uppercase and pressing Y One Shot The sample will not loop regardless of the Loop Switch will change it to lowercase p 43 setting of the patch One Way If the Loop Switch p 43 of the patch is on the sample will loop in the forward direction between LOOP START and LOOP END Alternate If the Loop Switch p 43 of the patch is on the sample will loop alternately backward and forward between the LOOP START and LOOP END 5 When you have finished inputting touch OK to finalize the template name 63 BE Creating and Editing Samples Sa
237. e middle range fected Pre Hi Freq 2000 20000 Hz Frequency of the high Pre Mid Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the middle range range Pre Hi Freq 2000 20000 Hz Frequency of the high Pre Hi Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the high range range Reverb Time 0 06 64 0 sec Duration time of the re Pre Hi Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the high range verb Reverb Time 0 06 64 0 sec Duration time of the re Pre Dly Time 0 200 0 ms Adjusts the delay time from verb the direct sound until the Pre Dly Time 0 200 0 ms Adjusts the delay time from delay sound is heard the direct sound until the Density 0 99 Density of the reverb delay sound is heard Room Size 1 10 Size of the room which is Density 0 99 Density of the reverb simulated Room Size 1 8 Size of the room which is Early Ref Level 0 99 Volume level of the initial simulated reflected sound Early Ref Level 0 99 Volume level of the initial Low Damp Freq 50 4000 Hz Adjusts the frequency be reflected sound low which sound fed back Release Density 0 99 Density of the sound that to the effect will be cut reaches the listener after The Low Damp function many repeated reflections damps the low frequency Low Damp Freq 50 4000 Hz Adjusts the frequency be band of the reverb sound low which sound fed back quicker than other bands to the effect will be cut Low Damp Gain 36 0 dB Degree of Low Damp The Low Damp function Hi Damp Freq 2000 20000 Hz Adjusts the frequency damps the low frequency above which sound fed band of the r
238. e to have any sound you want to hear through the headphones set to MIX PARALLEL Output according to each Output Assign settings Output Gain This adjusts the output gain from the V Synth s Analog Out and Digital Out When for example there are relatively few voices being sounded boosting the output gain can let you attain the most suitable output level for recording and other purposes Value 12 12 dB Digital Output Freq Digital Output Frequency Sets the sampling frequency of the digital output Value 44 1 48 96 KHz Settings Common to All Modes System Mode bd Low MID 1 MID 2 HIGH TOTAL a 89 X 9 7 0 7 MEN s22 2000 seee Oo O O O a E E E Tont romer U LINK 4 Band EQ 4 Band Equalizer Switch Switch the 4 Band equalizer on off Value OFF ON LOW Freq Low Frequency Selects the frequency of the low range Value 50 63 80 100 125 160 200 250 315 400 500 630 800 1000 1250 1600 2000 2500 3150 4000 Hz LOW Gain Adjusts the gain of the low frequency Positive settings will emphasize the low frequency range Value 15 15 dB MID1Q Adjusts the width of the middle range 1 Set a higher value for Q to narrow the range to be affected Value 0 5 0 7 1 0 2 0 4 0 8 0 MID 1 Freq Mid 1 Frequency Selects the frequency of the middle range
239. eFxCS Tone 0 0 0 0 PreFxCS Lvl 0 0 0 0 PreFxLM Thr 48 48 48 48 PreFxLM Rel 0 0 0 0 PreFxLM Rati 0 0 0 0 PreFxLM Tone 0 0 0 0 PreFxLM Lvl 0 0 0 0 PreFxNS Thr 60 60 60 60 PreFxNS Rel 0 0 0 0 CountIN 1 1MES 0 OMES 0 OMES 1 1MES MetroType 1 REC 1 REC 1 REC 1 REC 55 HIRS IGI IIIG Creating and Editing Samples Sample Mode Creating and Editing Samples Sample Mode Setup Comp Limiter NoiseSup MIDI SamplingType 0 Stereo O Stereo 0 Stereo 0 Stereo InputSource 0 Analog 0 Analog 0 Analog 0 Analog TriggerMode 0 Manual 0 Manual 0 Manual 1 MIDI TriggerLevel 12 dB 12 dB 12 dB 12 dB PreTrigger 0 Omsec 0 Omsec 0 Omsec 0 Omsec PreGain 0 OdB 0 OdB 0 OdB 0 OdB PreFxType 1 COMP 2 LIMIT 3 NS 0 off PreFxCS Sus 64 0 0 0 PreFxCS Atk 12 0 0 0 PreFxCS Tone 0 0 0 0 PreFxCS Lvl 0 0 0 0 PreFxLM Thr 48 36 48 48 PreFxLM Rel 0 80 0 0 PreFxLM Rati 0 2 0 0 PreFxLM Tone 0 0 0 0 PreFxLM Lvl 0 0 0 0 PreFxNS Thr 60 60 30 60 PreFxNS Rel 0 0 22 0 CountIN 1 1MES 1 1MES 1 1MES 0 MES MetroType 1 REC 1 REC 1 REC 1 REC Sampling Procedure Here s how to input a sound from the input jacks and sample it For resampling refer to the following section The V Synth has the following input jacks IN
240. eam CALIBRATION L L u Lu a SS 100 D Beanceorntroll ra Qn tai 29 D B am Sens L Re AR 79 D beam sensitivity L R aaa 79 D Beam type xis iDiBeam Bender l DA eee eere NU drain 37 Data Transfer ree eerta crest eere reed 97 DEC suse DEC Delay Time ks Delete 52 u aysa ebbe ee Potes era eem o IEEE ERE Files Pole a 88 Demo play mode 19 Depth Destination 1 2 s DETUNPB 4er de o i re et c eh itasha Device ID aaa atadas Device ID number BE DIGITAL AUDIO INTERFACE connector eere 15 Digital Output Fr ier pen a ra iieiea 74 Digital output frequency aa 74 DIRECT OUT jack cider O Aaa 15 Disk Format M Disk Load Project eee metri eget 84 Disk mode ii etis 18 83 Disk Tools 87 89 Disk utility 83 DISK UTILITY MENU 83 DA D 53 Drum Patel cerdito ee ee PEOR re ERR e 53 Encode depth Encoding type A eue Ino eee es A O Env Time KF Envelope attack time 48 Envelope attack time velocity sensitivity s Envelope decay time ssssssssssssseeeeneneneeneenenes 48 Envelope depth eter eterne en tapis tenian 48 Envelope release time Envelope release time velocity sensitivity Envelope settings Envelope sustain level a Envelope velocity curve cococoncononcnnnnonenneninnecinnernnnanannnnannanannarannornananass E
241. ears BROWSER SAMPLE Name SAMPLE Copy SAMPLE Move SAMPLE Exchange SAMPLE Delete SAMPLE Copy SAMPLE Move SAMPLE Exchange SAMPLE Delete top E da TEs Info Prevw mptu The SAMPLE Move window appears 3 In the pulldown menu touch SAMPLE Exchange gt 3 In the pulldown menu touch SAMPLE Move The SAMPLE Exchange window appears SAMPLE Top SAMPLE Move SAMPLE Top Source Lera 001 108 ca ltd SAMPLE Exchange Source bm 001 108 MrphSyn List y m Destination 001 108 MrphSyn m Destination 001 108 Lene ee 4 Move the cursor to Source and select the move source sample 4 Move the cursor to Source and select the exchange 5 Move the cursor to Destination and select the move source sample destination sample 5 Move the cursor to Destination and select the exchange EN destination sample When you touch lt List gt the Sample List window will appear Hint allowing you to select the sample from the list When you touch lt List gt the Sample List window will appear 6 Touch lt Execute gt to execute the move operation allowing you to select the sample from the list 7 Press EXIT 6 Touch lt Execute gt to execute the exchange operation The SAMPLE Move window closes 7 Press EXIT The SAMPLE Exchange window closes 59 MU Creating and Editing
242. eating and Editing Samples Sample Mode Creating and Editing Samples Sample Mode Saving a Sample Samples that you sample or encode will be lost when you turn off the power If you want to keep these samples use the Disk Save Project screen in the Disk mode 1 Access the SAMPLE Top screen p 56 2 Touch lt Save gt Jump to the DISK Save Project screen in the Disk mode DISK Save Project mam 66 7MB Free Internal Current Intinternal prjs For details on operations in this screen refer to Saving Project on Disk Save Project p 85 Settings Common to All Modes System Mode Settings that affect the entire operating environment of the V Synth such as tuning and MIDI message reception are referred to as system functions This section explains how to make settings for the System functions and describes the functions of the different System parameters How to Make the System Function Settings 1 Press MODE The V SYNTH MODE MENU window appears 2 Touch lt SYSTEM gt The SYSTEM Com Master screen appears SYSTEM Com Master h Master Master Tune Master Key Shift Master Level i i G Patch Remain Powerup Mode OFF hs 3 The parameters are organized into several editing groups Touch one of the buttons at the bottom of the screen to select the edit group containing the parameters you want to set
243. edes the cursor location 162 r You can also move the input location cursor by pressing the lt P gt cursor buttons Pressing A will change the character at the cursor location to uppercase and pressing V will change it to lowercase 5 When you have finished inputting touch lt OK gt to finalize the patch name Saving Patches PATCH Write Changes you make to sound settings are temporary and will be lost if you turn off the power or select another sound If you want to keep the modified sound you must save it in the internal internal memory When you modify the settings of a patch the PATCH PLAY screen will indicate EDITED Once you save the patch into internal memory the EDITED indication goes away nore When you perform the save procedure the data that previously occupied the save destination will be lost However the factory setting data can be recovered by performing the Factory Reset p 98 1 Make sure that the patch you wish to save is selected 2 Touch V in the upper right of the screen A pulldown menu appears Zone DataTransfer Info PI ame PRTCH write PATCH Init PATCH Copy PATCH Delete Common 0sC1 o E em COSM2 EZ ee 3 In the pulldown menu touch PATCH Write gt The PATCH Write window appears PRTCH PLRY PRTCH Write Source 74 Wy Patch Destination
244. editing int process faster and easier 1 Access the PATCH PLAY screen and select the copy destination patch Dest Patch p 21 For the Zone Copy Oscillator Copy COSM Copy and TVA Copy operations you can specify the currently selected patch as the copy source by setting SrcPatch to TEMP 7 Touch lt Execute gt to execute the copy operation 33 HE Creating a Patch Creating a Patch Naming a Patch PATCH Name Before you save the patch here s how to give it a new name 1 Make sure that the patch that you want to name is selected 2 Touch lt Y gt in the upper right of the screen A pulldown menu appears INIT PATCH 2 011 Zone DataTransfer Info v eer PATCH Name PATCH Write PATCH Init PATCH Copy PATCH Delete 3 In the pulldown menu touch lt PATCH Name gt The PATCH Name window appears INIT PATCH _rZ 011 4 Touch the on screen alphabetic or numeric keys to enter the new name in the text box The on screen keys have the following functions c 2 Move the cursor in the text box to the desired input location lt SHIFT gt Turn this on when you want to input uppercase letters or symbols lt Insert gt Turn this on when you want to insert a character at the cursor location lt Clear gt Erases all characters in the text box lt Delete gt Deletes the character at the cursor location lt Back gt Deletes the character that prec
245. ef fect will be cut The Low Damp function damps the low frequency band of the delay sound quicker than other bands which makes for a clearer delay effect Time Low Dam 36 0 dB D f Low D p egree of Low Damp T1 T2 T3 T4 Gain Feedback Time 0 1 1000 ms Delay time for the feedback Hi Damp Freq 2000 20000 Hz Adjusts the frequency above sound which sound fed back to the ef Feedback Level 0 99 Amount of feedback fect will be cut Post HC Freq 160 15000 Hz Frequency at which the High Damp by attenuating the THRU high cut filter will begin to higher frequencies first makes take effect THRU no filter the delay sound more natural is used Hi Damp Gain 36 0 dB Degree of High Damp 143 MEE Appendices Parameter Value Description Balance DRY100 0WET Volume balance between the di DRY0 100WET rect sound DRY and the delay sound WET Ps Low Freq 50 4000 Hz Frequency of the low range Ps Low Gain 15 415 dB Gain of the low range Ps Hi Freq 2000 20000 Hz Frequency of the high range Ps Hi Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the high range 144 Troubleshooting If the this unit does not function in the way you expect first check the following points If this does not resolve the problem consult your dealer or a nearby Roland Service Station Ifa message appears during operation consult the following section Message List p 149 Problems Related to the V Synth
246. ent theft of the PC card To install the PC card protector use the following procedure 1 Use a screwdriver to remove both of the screws from the bottom side of the PC CARD slot 2 Insert the PC card into the PC CARD card slot 3 Use the screws to fasten the PC card protector as shown below PC card PC card protector 178 For EU Countries This product complies with the requirements of European Directives EMC 89 336 EEC and LVD 73 23 EEC For the USA FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION RADIO FREQUENCY INTERFERENCE STATEMENT This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver Connec
247. er 6 Touch lt OK gt The Rename window appears Touch the on screen alphabetic or numeric keys to enter the new name in the text box The on screen keys have the following functions lt gt lt gt gt Move the cursor in the text box to the desired input location lt SHIFT gt Turn this on when you want to input uppercase letters or symbols lt Insert gt Turn this on when you want to insert a character at the cursor location lt Clear gt Erases all characters in the text box lt Delete gt Deletes the character at the cursor location lt Back gt Deletes the character that precedes the cursor location You can also move the input location cursor by pressing the lt gt cursor buttons Pressing A will change the character at the cursor location to uppercase and pressing Y will change it to lowercase When you have finished inputting touch lt OK gt to execute the operation 89 Kw Disk Related Functions Disk Mode Connecting to Your Computer via USB USB Mode About USB Functions The V Synth has two modes of USB functionality storage mode for transferring files and MIDI mode for sending and receiving MIDI messages You must switch between these two modes on the V Synth they cannot be used simultaneously MEMO Each mode can be used with the following operating systems Windows 98 or later Mac OS 9 04 or later yon The USB mode file
248. er This effect features a pair of the same flanger circuits used in the BOSS compact flangers connected in parallel for stereo input This adds a particular metallic sounding modulation to the source sound 22 Step Flanger This is a flanger in which the flanger pitch changes in steps The speed at which the pitch changes can also be specified in terms of a note value of a specified tempo R L Step 950 R Flanger al Parameter Value Description MN Type NORMAL HI Selects the model of flanger sim BAND ulated NORMAL Normal type BOSS Parameter Value Description BF 2 Pre Dly Time 0 50 0 ms Specifies the time delay from the HI BAND High Band type original sound until the flanger BOSS HF 2 Setting HI B raise sound is heard the flanging sound one octave Rate 1 0 05 10 0 Hz Specifies the modulation fre above that at the NORM note quency of the flanger sound Manual 0 127 Sets the center frequency for the Depth 0 127 Specifies the modulation depth effect of the flanger sound Depth 1 0 127 Sets the depth of the swelling of Feedback 98 98 Adjusts the proportion of the the flanger sound flanger sound that is fed back Rate 2 0 05 10 0 Hz Adjusts the modulation speed of into the effect Negative set note the flanger effect tings will invert the phase Resonance 0 127 Sets the intensity of the flanger s P
249. er to use overdrive Mode OD or distortion DS Drive 1 0 127 Degree of distortion Amp Sim Sw OFF ON Turns the amp simulator on off Amp Type SMALL Type of guitar amp BUILT IN 2 SMALL small amp STACK 3 BUILT IN single unit type amp STACK 2 STACK large double stack amp 3 STACK large triple stack amp Distortion Level 0 127 Volume of the overdrive or dis tortion sound Xover HiFreq 2000 20000 Hz Attenuates the effect in the range above the specified fre quency Xover Hi Gain 36 0 dB Specifies how greatly the high range will be attenuated Mod Level 0 127 Volume of the chorus or flanger sound Delay Time 0 1300 ms note Adjusts the delay time from the direct sound until the delay sound is heard Delay Feedback 98 98 Adjusts the proportion of the de lay sound that is fed back into the effect Negative settings will invert the phase Low Damp Freq 50 4000 Hz Adjusts the frequency below which sound fed back to the ef fect will be cut The Low Damp function damps the low frequency band of the delay sound quicker than other bands which makes for a clearer delay effect Low Damp Gain 36 0 dB Degree of Low Damp Hi Damp Freq 2000 20000 Hz Adjusts the frequency above which sound fed back to the ef fect will be cut High Damp by attenuating the higher frequencies first makes the delay sound more natu
250. ern input area When you touch lt Tie gt a tie will be input at the cursor location When inputting control changes A control change with the value shown on that button will be input at the cursor location within the pattern input area When you touch lt Clr gt the selected control change will be erased When you are editing these buttons modify the velocity of the note that is selected in the pattern input area or the value of the control change HINT You can also input the note velocity or control change value by using the VALUE dial or INC DEC Controller When you operate the Time Trip pad TTPadX Y D Beam controller DBeamL R or assignable controllers Ctrl 1 2 the value is shown here Grid Specifies the note value that will correspond to one step of the arpeggio pattern J Quarter note d Eighth note Dotted eighth note Sixteenth note Dotted sixteenth note N Thirty second note End Point Specifies the pattern length as a number of steps 1 32 Clear Erases the pattern data p 27 Real Rec Realtime Recording Use realtime recording to create a pattern p 26 Step Rec Step Recording Use step recording to create a pattern p 27 Creating a Pattern by Playing in Real Time Real Rec This method lets you create a pattern in a way similar to realtime recording on a sequencer Your playing on the V Synth s keyboard and your controller operations will be
251. es Creating a Patch This chapter explains how to create patches and describes what the patch parameters do and how they are composed Read this chapter when you wish to create patches Creating and Editing Samples Sample Mode This explains how to sample and how to edit and encode samples Read this when you want to sample sounds Settings Common to All Modes System Mode This chapter describes how the System parameters that determine the V Synth s operation environment work and how these parameters are organized Read it as necessary Disk Related Functions Disk Mode This chapter covers disk related operations such as saving data to disk and loading data from disk Read it as necessary Transferring Data USB Mode This explains how to connect the V Synth to your computer and transfer data such as patches and waves Read this as necessary Other Functions This explains how to transmit data to an external MIDI device Data Transfer and how to restore all data of the V Synth to the factory settings Factory Reset Read it as necessary Appendices This chapter contains a troubleshooting section for use when the V Synth is not functioning as expected There is also a list of messages that you can refer to if an message appears on the display A list of parameters and a MIDI implementation chart are also provided Notation Used in This Owner s Manual To make operation procedures easy to understand t
252. essed Delay high more Time Fade Time Pitch Cutoff Frequency Depth Level 4 ER an Note on low less Fade Mode ON Fade Time The time over which the LFO amplitude will reach the maximum after the Delay Time has elapsed Delay Time The time from when the keyboard is played until the LFO begins to be applied 49 HE Creating a Patch Creating a Patch Apply the LFO immediately when the key is pressed and then gradually begin to decrease the effect high more Pitch Cutoff Frequency Level Delay Time Fade Time low less Fade Mode ON gt gt Fade Time The time over which the LFO amplitude will reach the minimum after the Delay Time has elapsed Delay Time The time that the LFO will continue after the keyboard is played Apply the LFO gradually after the key is released Delay high h more Time Fade Time Pitch Cutoff Frequency f Depth Level Pan A A Note Note on off low less Fade Mode OFF Fade Time The time over which the LFO amplitude will reach the maximum after the Delay Time has elapsed Delay Time The time from when the keyboard is released until the LFO begins to be applied Apply the LFO from when the key is pressed until it is released and gradually begin to decrease the effect when the key is released high more v Fade Time Pitch Cutoff Frequency Level Pan low less y Noteon Note off Fade
253. essed properly MIDI Communication Error A MIDI hardware error has occurred If the same message appears repeatedly please con tact your dealer or a nearby Roland service center for service MIDI Offline The MIDI IN connection has been broken Check whether there is a problem with the MIDI ca ble connected to the V Synth s MIDI IN or whether the MIDI cable has been disconnected Please Wait a Minute Please wait a short time Processing The operation is being executed Transmitting The data is being transmitted Error Receiving Data MIDI message could not be received correctly If the same message appears repeatedly there is a problem with the content of the MIDI messages USB Offline USB cable is not connected Check whether there is a problem with the USB ca ble connected to the V Synth s USB connector or whether the USB cable has been disconnected Writing Data is being written 151 MEE Appendices About MIDI MIDI Musical Instruments Digital Interface is a standard specification that allows musical data to be exchanged between electronic musical instruments and computers MIDI With a MIDI cable connecting MIDI devices that are equipped with MIDI connectors you can play multiple instruments with a single keyboard have multiple MIDI instruments perform in ensemble program the settings to change automatically to match the performance as
254. etails on MFX parameters refer to MFX Parameters p 116 Value 00 Thru 41 MFX Master Level Adjusts the volume of the sound that has passed through the MFX Value 0 127 Creating a Patch MFX To CHO MFX Chorus Send Level Adjusts the amount of chorus for the sound that passes through MEX If you don t want to add the Chorus effect set it to 0 Value 0 127 MFX To REV MFX Reverb Send Level Adjusts the amount of reverb for the sound that passes through MEX If you don t want to add the Reverb effect set it to 0 Value 0 127 CHO Chorus On Off Switch Switches chorus on and off Value E OFF A on CHO Type Chorus Type Use this parameter to select from among the 8 available chorus For details on chorus parameters refer to Chorus Parameters p 138 Value 00 Off 08 CHO Master Level Chorus Master Level Adjusts the volume of the sound that has passed through chorus Value 0 127 CHO To REV Chorus Reverb Send Level Adjusts the amount of reverb for the sound that passes through chorus If you don t want to add the Reverb effect set it to 0 Value 0 127 REV Reverb On Off Switch Switches reverb on and off Value Z OFF IS cov REV Type Reverb Type Use this parameter to select from among the 10 available reverb For details on reverb parameters refer to Reverb Parameters p 138 Value 00 Off 10 REV Master Level Reve
255. eters are explained gt Explanations for each Reverb Type are given on the following pages 01 Room 1 02 Room 2 03 Room 3 04 Hall 1 05 Hall 2 06 Hall 3 07 Garage 08 Plate 09 Non Linear 10 Delay p 139 p 139 p 140 p 140 p 141 p 141 p 142 p 142 p 143 p 143 01 Room 1 Reverb which simulates the reverberation within a room It is standard room reverb 02 Room 2 This simulates the reverberation of a room It is suitable for simulating a fairly small room and produces a clear reverberation Parameter Value Description Parameter Value Description Pre Low Freq 50 4000 Hz Frequency of the low range Pre Low Freq 50 4000 Hz Frequency of the low range Pre Low Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the low range Pre Low Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the low range Pre Mid Freq 50 20000 Hz Frequency of the middle Pre Mid Freq 50 20000 Hz Frequency of the middle range range Pre Mid Q 0 5 0 7 1 0 2 0 Gain of the middle range Pre Mid Q 0 5 0 7 1 0 2 0 Gain of the middle range 4 0 8 0 Set a higher value for Q to 4 0 8 0 Set a higher value for Q to narrow the range to be af narrow the range to be af fected fected Pre Mid Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the middle range Pre Mid Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the middle range Pre Hi Freq 2000 20000 Hz Frequency of t
256. evel of the instru ment connected to INPUT Jacks is too low Could you be using a connection cable that contains a resistor Use a connection cable that does not contain a resistor Pitch is wrong Are the Pitch settings of the Oscillator section correct Check the Coarse Tune Fine Tune parameter settings p 41 Is the Master Tune setting correct Check the Master Tune parameter setting p 74 Has a Pitch Bend message been received from an exter nal device leaving the pitch hanging Try moving the pitch bend lever of the connected MIDI keyboard When you play the keyboard notes do not stop Is the pedal polarity of the Hold Pedal reversed Check the Hold Polarity parameter setting p 79 Sound is distorted Is an effect which distorts the sound being applied Check the effect settings p 116 Has the Patch level been turned up Check the Level parameter setting p 47 Effects do not apply MFX CHO or REV effect switches may have been turned off Turn them on Are the various effect settings correct If the send level of each effect is set to 0 the effect will not be applied Check the settings p 50 Even with send levels to each effect set at 0 effects are not applied if the MFX Master Level the Chorus Mas ter Level or the Reverb Master Level is set to 0 Check each setting p 50 If Output Assign is set to other than MULTI the
257. everb sound back to the effect will be quicker than other bands cut Low Damp Gain 36 0 dB Degree of Low Damp High Damp by attenuating Hi Damp Freq 2000 20000 Hz Adjusts the frequency the higher frequencies first above which sound fed Hi Damp Gain 36 0 dB Degree of High Damp back to the effect will be Post HC Freq 160 15000 Hz Frequency at which the cut THRU high cut filter will begin to High Damp by attenuating take effect THRU no filter the higher frequencies first is used Hi Damp Gain 36 0 dB Degree of High Damp Post HC Freq 160 15000 Hz Frequency at which the THRU high cut filter will begin to take effect THRU no filter is used 141 NENNEN Appendices 07 Garage This simulates the reverberation of a garage It produces the reverberation of a room surrounded by hard surfaced walls with many reflections 08 PLATE Simulates plate reverberation a reverb unit that uses the vibration of a metallic plate 142 THRU Parameter Value Description Parameter Value Description Pre Low Freq 50 4000 Hz Frequency of the low range Pre Low Freq 50 4000 Hz Frequency of the low range Pre Low Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the low range Pre Low Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the low range Pre Mid Freq 50 20000 Hz Frequency of the middle Pre Mid Freq 50 20000 Hz
258. f but it continues to sound the next time power is turned on The Power up Mode is set to Default Change it to Last Set and save the System settings p 74 Problems Related to the USB Driver Windows Problem Cause Action When start or restart my computer with the V Synth connected via USB it freezes at the startup screen and fails to work It has been found that on some computers starting or restarting the computer while the V Synth is powered up and USB is connected will cause the computer to freeze at the startup screen and fail to work Switch off the V Synth and then restart your computer When I turned off the power of the V Synth an error oc curred in Windows When using Windows Me powering down the V Synth without unmounting the drive may cause an er ror to occur in Windows You must cancel the USB connection p 92 before you turn off the power of the V Synth When attempt to exit Win dows while leaving the V Synth powered up the com puter does not turn off On some Windows computers it has been reported that the computer cannot be powered down if you exit Windows when the V Synth is still powered up with out unmounting the drive The shutdown process halts before the computer s power is switched off You must cancel the USB connection p 92 before you turn off the power of the V Synth before you exit Win dows When
259. f the high range Ps Hi Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the high range 131 MEN Appendices 31 Enh gt Cho Fig Enhancer Chorus Flanger This effect connects Enhancer and either Chorus or Flanger in series Parameter Value Description Enhan Sens 1 0 127 Sensitivity of the enhancer Enhan Frequen 0 127 Sets the lower limit of the fre cy quencies to which the enhance ment effect is added Enhan Mix Lev 0 127 Level of the overtones generated el by the enhancer Enhan Level 0 127 Volume of the enhancer sound Mod Mode CHORUS Selects whether to use chorus or FLANGER flanger Mod Rate 2 0 05 10 0 Hz Adjusts the speed of modulation note for the chorus or flanger Mod Depth 0 127 Adjusts the depth of modulation for the chorus or flanger Mod Phase 0 180 deg Sets how the chorus or flanger sound is spread Mod Pre Delay 0 50 0 ms Adjusts the delay time from the direct sound until the chorus or flanger sound is heard Mod Feedback 98 98 Adjusts the proportion of the ef fect sound that is fed back into the effect Negative settings will invert the phase Xover LowFreq 50 4000 Hz Attenuates the effect in the range below the specified fre quency Xover Low Gain 36 0 dB Specifies how greatly the low range will be attenuated Xover HiFreq 2000 20000 Hz Attenuates the effect in the range above the specified fre quency
260. fects the time For details on envelope settings refer to Making Envelope Settings p 48 Creating a Patch Formant PCM PATCH Edit OSC1 Formant INIT sce eae osc Formant Formant KF Energy Fmt LFO Depth Enu Depth Time KF Curve A Sens D Sens R Sens 9 9 9 EESTI IE ENVELOPE ADSR Attack Decay Sustain Release RG EG common oso osc2 MOD eos E TVA Erect The parameters of this screen are ignored when the Vari switch p 42 is off and when the Encode Type p 70 is BACKING or ENSEMBLE Formant x9 This sets the range of change in vocal quality formant Value 63 63 Formant KF Formant Key Follow Specifies the amount by which the formant value will be affected by the key you play Value 200 200 Energy Specifies how much the fundamental pitch will be emphasized in order to make the sound more well defined Set this to OFF if you do not want to use the Energy parameter Value OFF 1 127 Fmt LFO Depth Formant LFO Depth x Specifies how deeply the LFO will affect formant Value 63 63 iS In this screen you can make settings for the envelope that affects the formant For details on envelope settings refer to Making Envelope Settings p 48 OSC TVA PATCH Edit OSC1 OSC TYA INIT PATCH 2 01 Level KF Level LEO Depth Common o MoD ET COSM2 TVA ee Level x
261. ference signal COLOR CR Color Cr color difference signal BRIGHTNESS Brightness VFX1 Visual effects 1 VFX2 Visual effects 2 VFX3 Visual effects 3 VFX4 Visual effects 4 OUTPUT FADE Output fade Bend Local Sw V LINK Pitch Bend Local Switch Specify whether the pitch bend lever will be disconnected from the internal sound generator in V Link mode OFF or not disconnected ON Value OFF ON 81 MU Settings Common to All Modes System Mode Settings Common to All Modes System Mode Bend Assign V LINK Pitch Bend Assign Specify the V Link function that will be controlled when you operate the pitch bend lever Value OFF The pitch bend lever will not be used PLAYBACK SPEED Playback speed DISSOLVE TIME Dissolve time time over which the image switches AUDIO LEVEL Volume during audio playback COLOR CB Color Cb color difference signal COLOR CR Color Cr color difference signal BRIGHTNESS Brightness VFX1 Visual effects 1 VFX2 Visual effects 2 VFX3 Visual effects 3 VFX4 Visual effects 4 OUTPUT FADE Output fade After Local Sw V LINK Aftertouch Local Switch Specify whether keyboard aftertouch will be disconnected from the internal sound generator in V Link Mode OFF or will not be disconnected ON Value OFF ON After Assign V LINK Aftertouch Assign Specify the V Link function that will be controlled by keyboard aftertouch Value OFF The aftertouch will not be used P
262. fferent Sounds Split In this way you can create a patch that plays various percussion instrument sounds when you press different notes of the keyboard 7 To save the patch you created perform the Write operation p 34 Creating and Editing Samples Sample Mode In this chapter we will explain the procedures for Sampling p 55 Editing samples p 64 Converting samples so the VariPhrase function can be used Encoding p 69 E For details on loading samples refer to p 85 Sampling Settings Before You Sample What Is a Template A sampling template is something that holds a collection of settings for sampling the setup settings pre effect settings and metronome settings described below You can store eight different sampling templates When you sample you will always select one of these eight templates With the factory settings eight sampling templates are preset iS For details on modifying the settings refer to Sampling Procedure p 56 MEMO Sampling templates are system settings with the exception of some metronome parameters They are remembered even when you turn off the power If you wish to restore all eight sampling templates to the factory settings perform the Factory Reset operation p 98 Applications of Each Template The preset templates cover different input settings and pre effect types Mic Sample in mono from a mic Connect a mic t
263. fl No 112 Chung Shan N Road Sec 2 Taipei TAIWAN ROC TEL 02 2561 3339 THAILAND Theera Music Co Ltd 330 Verng NakornKasem Soi 2 Bangkok 10100 THAILAND TEL 02 2248821 VIETNAM Saigon Music 138 Tran Quang Khai St District 1 Ho Chi Minh City VIETNAM TEL 08 844 4068 AUSTRALIA Roland Corporation Australia Pty Ltd 38 Campbell Avenue Dee Why West NSW 2099 AUSTRALIA TEL 02 9982 8266 NEW ZEALAND Roland Corporation Ltd 32 Shaddock Street Mount Eden Auckland NEW ZEALAND TEL 09 3098 715 CEN TRAL LATIN AMERICA ARGENTINA Instrumentos Musicales S A Av Santa Fe 2055 1123 Buenos Aires ARGENTINA TEL 011 4508 2700 BRAZIL Roland Brasil Ltda Rua San Jose 780 Sala B Parque Industrial San Jose Cotia Sao Paulo SP BRAZIL TEL 011 4615 5666 COSTA RICA JUAN Bansbach Instrumentos Musicales Ave 1 Calle 11 Apartado 10237 San Jose COSTA RICA TEL 258 0211 CHILE Comercial Fancy II S A Rut 96 919 420 1 Nataniel Cox 739 4th Floor Santiago Centro CHILE TEL 02 688 9540 EL SALVADOR OMNI MUSIC 75 Avenida Norte y Final Alameda Juan Pablo II Edificio No 4010 San Salvador ELSALVADOR TEL 262 0788 MEXICO Casa Veerkamp s a de c v Av Toluca No 323 Col Olivar de los Padres 01780 Mexico D F MEXICO TEL 55 5668 6699 Roland Corporation PANAMA SUPRO MUNDIAL S A Boulevard Andrews Albrook Panama City REP DE PAN
264. g a Patch 2 Touch V in the upper right of the screen A pulldown menu appears PATCH PLAY MadOrchestra 2 011 y ECHPTXSEMZRXS 142 j120 0 mrans cil 001 MadOr D OT inar PRTCH Name PRTCH Write PRTCH Init PRTCH Copy PRTCH Delete 3 In the pulldown menu touch PATCH Copy The PATCH Copy window appears PRTCH PLRY MadOrchestra Z 011 v PATCH Copy Destination Zonet Sro Patch Dest Patch Temporary Cancel Execute 4 Touch a button in the left side of the screen to select the object you want to copy lt NAME gt Copy only the patch name lt ZONE gt Copy patch settings for one zone lt OSC gt Copy oscillator parameter settings Specify the copy source Source and copy destination Destination oscillator OSC1 OSC2 lt COSM gt Copy COSM parameter settings Specify the copy source Source and copy destination Destination COSM section COSM1 COSM2 lt TVA gt Copy TVA parameter settings lt MFX gt Copy MEX settings lt CHO gt Copy chorus settings lt REV gt Copy reverb settings lt ARP gt Copy arpeggiator settings 5 Specify the zone Zone 01 Zone 16 for the copy source Source and copy destination Destination Move the cursor to Zone and make your selection 6 Move the cursor to Src Patch and select the copy source patch number currently selected patch You can use this feature to make the
265. ghly with a soft dry cloth Never use benzine thinners alcohol or solvents of any kind to avoid the possibility of discoloration and or deformation Additional Precautions Please be aware that the contents of memory can be irretrievably lost as a result of a malfunction or the improper operation of the unit To protect yourself against the risk of loosing important data we recommend that you periodically save a backup copy of important data you have stored in the unit s memory on a PC card Unfortunately it may be impossible to restore the contents of data that was stored on a PC card once it has been lost Roland Corpo ration assumes no liability concerning such loss of data Use a reasonable amount of care when using the unit s buttons sliders or other controls and when using its jacks and connectors Rough handling can lead to malfunctions Never strike or apply strong pressure to the display When connecting disconnecting all cables grasp the connector itself never pull on the cable This way you will avoid causing shorts or damage to the cable s internal elements A small amount of heat will radiate from the unit during normal operation To avoid disturbing your neighbors try to keep the unit s volume at reasonable levels You may prefer to use headphones so you do not need to be concerned about those around you especially when it is late at night When you need to transport the unit package
266. gularity fect will be cut I Random 0 127 Random rotational irregularity The Low Damp function damps These settings determine the rotational irregularities of the record thelow frequency band of the player Set each of the Wow Flutter and Random levels to get a bal delay sound quicker than other ance the adjust the overall depth of the effect with the Total Wow bands which makes for a clearer Flutter control uc bii Balance DRY100 0WET Volume balance between the di LowDamp 36 0 dB Degree of Low Damp DRYO 100WET rect sound DRY and the effect Gain sound WET Hi Damp Freq 2000 20000 Hz Adjusts the frequency above which sound fed back to the ef fect will be cut i i High Damp by attenuating the 39 Ra d io Tuni ng higher frequencies first makes This effect reproduces the sound of an AM radio playing the delay sound more natural Hi Damp Gain 36 0 dB Degree of High Damp Delay Level 0 127 Volume of the delay sound Parameter Value Description Tuning 1 50 50 Adjusts the degree of noise that occurs when tuning a radio Noise Level 2 0 127 Sets the noise level Frequency 0 127 Sets the frequency response of Range 3 the radio Lowering the value worsens the frequency characteristics mak ing the sound appear to be com ing from a tiny radio speaker Balance DRY100 0WET Volume balance between the di DRYO0 100WET rect sound DRY and the effect sound WET 136
267. hase 0 180 deg Specifies the spaciousness of the effect flanger sound If the Feedback Mode is Step Rate 2 0 05 10 0 Hz Specifies the frequency of pitch CROSS this setting is note change ignored Flanger Level 0 127 Volume of the flanger sound Phase 0 180 deg Specifies the spaciousness of the Ps Low Freq 50 4000 Hz Frequency of the low range flanger sound Ps Low Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the low range Feedback Mode NORMAL Specifies the input destination to Ps Hi Freq 2000 20000 Hz Frequency of the high range CROSS which the flanger sound will be Ps Hi Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the high range returned NORMAL The left flanger sound will be returned to the left input and the right flanger sound to the right input CROSS The left flanger sound will be returned to the right in put and the right flanger sound to the left input Feedback 98 98 This setting makes the flanging sound of each of right and left channels return to the input of the opposite channel Negative settings will invert the phase When the Feedback Mode is set to NORMAL this setting will be ignored Cross Mix Level 100 100 This setting makes the flanging sound from each of the right and left channels mix it with the flanging sound of the opposite channel Negative settings will invert the phase Ps Low Freq 50 4000 Hz Frequency of the low range Ps Low Gain 15 415 dB Gain of the low range Ps Hi Freq 2000 20000 Hz Frequency of the high range
268. he V Synth contains an unsaved patch or sample If you need the patch or sample save it now Touch lt ACCEPT gt to erase the message FILE FOLDER EXISTS Overwrite Existing File Folder There is an identically named file or folder at the copy or move destination To cancel the operation touch CANCEL To exe cute the copying or moving operation touch EXE CUTE FORMAT All Data on the Disk Will Be Lost Are You Sure When you format all data on the disk will be lost Is it OK to execute To cancel the operation touch CANCEL To exe cute the formatting operation touch lt EXECUTE gt IMPORT FILE Are You Sure The file s will be imported from the disk Is it OK to execute To cancel the operation touch CANCEL To exe cute the importing operation touch lt EXECUTE gt INITIALIZE PATCH Are You Sure The patch will be initialized Is it OK to execute To cancel the operation touch CANCEL To exe cute the operation touch lt EXECUTE gt LOAD DEMO Replace All Data Are You Sure When you load the demo data all data in the VP 9000 will be lost Is it OK to execute the operation To cancel the operation touch CANCEL If you wish to load the demo data touch lt EXECUTE gt LOAD PROJECT Are You Sure Project will be loaded Is it OK to execute the oper ation To cancel the operation touch CANCEL If you wish to load the project touch lt E
269. he following notation system is adopted Characters and graphics in square brackets indicate buttons and knobs on the front panel For example MODE indicates the MODE button and A 1 V lt and gt indicates the cursor buttons Text or graphics enclosed in lt gt indicate objects in the screen touch screen that can be touched using your finger The manual will instruct you to touch the object shown in the touch screen p refers to pages within the manual Below are the meanings of the symbols preceding certain sentences in the text note These are notes Be sure to read them MEMO These are reference memos Read it as necessary HINT These are hints for operating the V Synth Read it as necessary E These provide information from related reference pages Read it as necessary note The display screens printed in this owner s manual are based on the factory settings However please be aware that in some cases they may differ from the actual factory settings Contents USING THE UNIT SAFE Voir 3 IMPORTANT NOTES sisas ide 4 How To Use This Manual esee eee 6 Notation Used in This Owner s Manual sse 6 ANA 10 Panel Descriptions osaa il 12 Front Paneles eene eerte ed eben eim ett ne Iaido es parts 12 Rear Paneli puya shasha t eren ite ege i e Heiner der feti dee ie er ade te Ban Hada saad 15 Overview of th
270. he high Pre Hi Freq 2000 20000 Hz Frequency of the high range range Pre Hi Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the high range Pre Hi Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the high range Low Rev Time 0 06 32 0 sec Duration time of the re Reverb Time 0 06 32 0 sec Duration time of the re verb for the low frequency verb band Pre Dly Time 0 200 0 ms Adjusts the delay time from Hi Rev Time 0 06 32 0 sec Duration time of the re the direct sound until the verb for the high frequency delay sound is heard band Density 0 99 Density of the reverb Xover Freq 160 15000 Hz The reverberation specified Room Size 1 10 Size of the room which is THRU by the Low Rev Time will simulated be applied to the range be Early Ref Level 0 99 Volume level of the initial low this frequency and by reflected sound the Hi Rev Time to the Low Damp Freq 50 4000 Hz Adjusts the frequency be range above this frequency low which sound fed back Pre Dly Time 0 200 0 ms Adjusts the delay time from to the effect will be cut the direct sound until the The Low Damp function delay sound is heard damps the low frequency Density 0 99 Density of the reverb band of the reverb sound Room Size 5 6 32 6 m Size of the room which is quicker than other bands simulated Low Damp Gain 36 0 dB Degree of Low Damp Early Ref Level 0 99 Volume level of the initial Hi Damp Freq 2000 20000 Hz Adjusts the frequency reflected sound above which sound fed Release Density 0 99 Density of the sound that back to the effect w
271. he sample to zero In the SAMPLE Edit Trim window specify the length that you want to trim This setting is made in terms of a number of samples Data in the V Synth is handled as 44 1 kHz data meaning that one second contains 44 100 data samples HINT For example trimming at 100 samples This will connect the first data sample and the one hundredth data sample by a smooth line of one hundred points Similarly the last data sample and the data sample one hundred samples before it will be connected by a smooth line of one hundred points Normalize The Normalize operation is used to uniformly increase or decrease the level of the entire sample without allowing it to distort This is used when you wish to make the volume consistent with other samples In the SAMPLE Edit Normalize window specify the degree of normalization that you want to use The value is specified in terms of a percentage HINT For example let s suppose that 100 is the maximum volume at which the volume does not distort Executing the Normal operation at a setting of 90 will make the maximum value of the sample be 90 67 MU Creating and Editing Samples Sample Mode Creating and Editing Samples Sample Mode yore If you normalize at a low setting and then normalize at a high setting the audio quality will deteriorate This means that if you intend to normalize several times you should start from the higher value and work downward Reverse The
272. he sound is modulated Phaser Rate 0 05 10 0 Hz note Specifies the frequency of mod ulation Phaser Depth 0 127 Specifies the depth of modula tion Phaser Reso nance 0 127 Specifies the amount of feed back for the phaser Higher settings will give the sound a stronger character Phaser Mix Lev el 0 127 Specifies the volume of the phase shifted sound relative to the direct sound Delay Time 0 1300 ms note Adjusts the delay time from the direct sound until the each delay sound is heard Fbk Dly Time 0 1300 ms note Adjusts the delay time for the feedback sound Dly Time Dev 0 1300 ms note Specifies the differences in delay time for each of the delay sounds Delay Level 0 127 Adjusts the volume of each de lay sound Delay Feedback 1 98 98 Adjusts the proportion of the de lay sound that is fed back into the effect Negative settings will invert the phase Delay Pan Type 1 10 Specifies the pan of each delay sound Ten settings are provided as var ious panning combinations of the delay sounds see below Parameter Value Description Delay Time 1 0 650 ms note Adjusts the delay time from the direct sound until the delay sound is heard Pre LPF Freq 500 15000 Hz Sets the filter s cutoff frequency THRU THRU no filter is used Mod Rate 0 05 1
273. her control gt p 79 Quick Start p 18 HOLD PEDAL Jack An optional pedal switch DP series can be connected to this jack for use as a hold pedal Quick Start p 18 INPUT T N Line Mie 3 Oo INPUT Jacks L R An external audio source such as a CD player can be connected to these jacks for sampling or external input GAIN Switch This selects the input gain of the INPUT jacks Set this to the MIC position if connecting a mic or to the LINE position if connecting any other type of device DIRECT our MAIN OUT R L MONO PHONES DIRECT sc acks vine R This jack is a stereo output of the sound unprocessed by onboard effects An external effects processor or other devices can be connected to these jacks MAIN OUT Jacks L MONO R These jacks output the audio signal to the connected mixer amplifier system in stereo For mono output use the L jack Quick Start p 3 PHONES Jack This is the jack for connecting headphones sold separately Quick Start p 3 15 Overview of the V Synth How the V Synth Is Organized Basic Structure Broadly speaking the V Synth consists of a controller section and a sound generator section Sound Generator Section ulla tum Controller Section controllers such as keyboard pitch bend lever etc The right side of the V Synth s front panel is where the controls for th
274. hy p 87 The path indicates the hierarchical level at which the file is located It is given together with the folder name DISK The PC card is not ready Insert another PC card PC Card Not Ready DISK This file contains waves for three or more channels Do not use this file Too Many Channels Cannot Load This Wave and cannot be loaded into the V Synth DISK This disk cannot be used by the V Synth Format the disk on the V Synth Unformatted Disk DISK A disk error of unknown causes has occurred Contact your dealer or a nearby Roland service cen Unknown Disk Error ter for service DISK The operation you attempted to execute does not Do not select this media for this operation You Cannot Use This Device support this media ENCODE For some reason encoding is not possible Change the encoding type and try again Encoding Error ENCODE Due to insufficient wave memory encoding is not Shorten the wave p 66 or delete unwanted sam Memory Full possible ples from the V Synth s memory p 60 IMPORT There are no vacant patches Delete unneeded patches from the V Synth p 36 No Room for Patches IMPORT There are no vacant samples Delete unneeded samples from the V Synth p 60 No Room for Samples SAMPLE EDIT There is not enough wave memory to execute the Shorten the range that will be copied p 66 or de Copy Buffer Not Allocated Copy lete unneeded
275. iPhsr p 128 25 Rotary Rotary p 129 26 Tremolo Auto Pan Trem Pan p 129 27 Stereo Pitch Shifter PitchSft p 130 28 OD DS gt Cho Flg OD gt Cho p 130 29 OD DS Delay OD gt Dly p 131 30 Cho Flg Delay Cho gt Dly p 131 31 Enh gt Cho Flg Enh gt Cho p 132 32 Enh gt Delay Enh gt Dly p 132 33 Vocal Multi VocalMt p 133 34 Guitar Multi GuitarMt p 133 35 Bass Multi BASS Mt p 134 36 Rhodes Multi RhodesMt p 135 37 Keyboard Multi Kbd Mt p 135 38 Phonograph Phonogrp p 136 39 Radio Tuning Radio p 136 40 Bit Rate Converter Bit Conv p 137 41 Pseudo Stereo PseudoSt p 137 116 01 Parametric EQ 03 Resonant Filter Parametric Equalizer This is a 4 band low range midrange x 2 high range stereo parametric equalizer L 4 Band EQ R Parameter Value Description Low Freq 50 4000 Hz Frequency of the low range Low Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the low range Mid 1 Freq 50 20000 Hz Frequency of the middle range 1 Mid 1Q 0 5 0 7 1 0 2 0 Width of the middle range 1 4 0 8 0 Set a higher value for Q to nar row the range to be affected Mid 1 Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the middle range 1 Mid 2 Freq 50 20000 Hz Frequency of the middle range 2 Mid 2Q 0 5 0 7 1 0 2 0 Width of the middle range 2 4 0 8 0 Set a higher value for Q to nar row the range to be affected Mid 2 Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the middle range 2 Hi Freq 2000 20000 Hz
276. ible that the V Synth has been incorrectly detected by the computer As described in Deleting Incorrect De vice Information p 147 delete the incorrect device information then re install the driver Found unknown device ap pears even though you in stalled the driver If your computer or USB hub has two or more USB con nectors and you connect the V Synth to a USB connec tor to which the V Synth has never been connected before the Unknown device dialog box may appear even on a computer onto which you have already in stalled the driver Refer to Readme file on the included CD ROM and in stall the driver once again This is not a malfunction If the Found unknown device dialog box appears even though the V Synth is connected to the same USB connector as before it is possible that the computer has detected the V Synth incorrectly As described in De leting Incorrect Device Information p 147 delete the incorrect device information then re install the driver 146 Troubleshooting Problem Cause Action An Unknown driver found _ It is possible that the computer has detected the V As described in Deleting Incorrect Device Informa dialog box appears and you Synth incorrectly tion p 147 delete the incorrect device information are unable to install the driver then re install the driver Device Manager shows 1 or USB Composit
277. ice 170 Admiral Boulevard Mississauga On L5T 2N6 CANADA TEL 905 362 9707 U S A Roland Corporation U S 5100 S Eastern Avenue Los Angeles CA 90040 2938 U S A TEL 323 890 3700 As of April 1 2003 Roland 03126812 03 6 AN
278. ie 12 Peak Indicator 12 Pedal 79 A O 79 Pedal 2 Polarity usss ps taria 79 PHONES jack s Pit LEO Dp A NE IBTEGET iet eim iine Wee Ea tu PUGH ostio NN Oscillator pitch payaa e dae Pitch bend range down T Pitch bend range up esce tenente eni retenir debe A het ERR Playback Mode Polyphony Portamento Port mento mode onte epe is Portamento switch l eene 36 Portamento time 37 Portamento time velocity sensitivity 37 Portamento type 37 POWEBRSwWiteli62z uy tiet dentes 15 Powerup Mode eieiei nardni deenen enaere aen en ren ni enai 74 Pre gain PHOT BOE Pre effect n e eee tede e e te re E ea CON pres8Of ucc A E a ASEN S AEE EE SEEN iR IRR ORNATO Noise suppressor a Pre effect typ eret teens Preset memory peas doeet ge ect ded cese pee nes PREVIEW Project Pulse Width Deut M 62 Receive bank select switch 75 Receive program change switch 75 Receive system exclusive switch esse Release e a e et ertet Release time ener eterne raj retine dor herede cog Remote KBD Sw 2 Remote keyboard switch sss 78 REMESAS OL 89 Resp cidcid 60 RESO 3t HR AS e 14 REV Master Level u aa una anp a aaa 51 REV S nd doe eed dais 50 REV Type 51 52 REVERB 14 Reverb master leve
279. ill be reaches the listener after cut many repeated reflections High Damp by attenuating Low Damp Freq 50 4000 Hz Adjusts the frequency be the higher frequencies first low which sound fed back Hi Damp Gain 36 0 dB Degree of High Damp to the effect will be cut Post HC Freq 160 15000 Hz Frequency at which the The Low Damp function THRU high cut filter will begin to damps the low frequency take effect THRU no filter band of the reverb sound is used quicker than other bands Low Damp Gain 36 0 dB Degree of Low Damp Hi Damp Freq 2000 20000 Hz Adjusts the frequency above which sound fed back to the effect will be cut High Damp by attenuating the higher frequencies first Hi Damp Gain 36 0 dB Degree of High Damp Post HC Freq 160 15000 Hz Frequency at which the THRU high cut filter will begin to take effect THRU no filter is used 139 MEN Appendices 03 Room 3 Reverb which simulates the reverberation within a room This is suitable for simulating a fairly large room and produces reverberation with a strong mid and low range 04 Hall 1 This simulates the reverberation of a concert hall It is a conventional hall reverb You can also apply a chorus effect to the reverberation to adjust the sense of spaciousness or to create a special effect 140
280. illator Vari Switch Switches whether the sound will be produced using Vari Phrase ON or linearly OFF Value OFF ON Start Offset PCM Oscillator Start Offset Specifies the starting address of the wave Value 0 Creating a Patch Playback Mode PCM Oscillator Playback Mode Specifies how the wave will be assigned to each key Value RETRIGGER The sample will play back from the beginning each time you play a key LEGATO When you play legato the playback point will be synchronized with the currently playing sound STEP Each time you play a key the sample will play back to the next event p 71 and then stop EVENT The sample will be divided at each event and assigned to separate keys Each time you press a key the sample will play from the beginning of the corresponding event Loop PCM Oscillator Loop Switch Specifies whether the wave will be played as a loop ON or not OFF Value OFF ON Robot Voice PCM Oscillator Robot Voice Switch Specifies whether the pitch of the wave will be held steady ON or not OFF Value OFF ON Tempo Sync PCM Oscillator Tempo Sync Switch Specifies whether the wave will be sounded in sync with the tempo clock ON or not OFF Value OFF ON Pitch PATCH Edit OSC1 Pitch INIT PATCH 2 011 v osc Type Pitch Env Time KF 0 Pitch Oscillator Pitch x Adjusts the pitch of the oscillator
281. increasingly further toward the right and negative settings will cause notes higher than C4 key center C to be panned toward the left Larger settings will produce greater change Value 200 200 Pan LFO Dp Pan LFO Depth x Specifies how deeply the LFO will affect the pan Value 63 63 iS In this screen you can make settings for the envelope that affects the TVA For details on envelope settings refer to Making Envelope Settings p 48 LFO PATCH Edit TVA LFO INIT PATCH 2 01 h TVA TUR o ASA am Keu Sunc Delau Time Rate al amp l x m E Fade on sss j 6 edo i mm osct IE mo eosin Ip EZ LFO In this screen you can make settings for the LFO that affects the TVA For details on LFO settings refer to Making LFO Settings p 49 47 OI UI I I GIIIE G E Creating a Patch Creating a Patch Making Envelope Settings This section explains the envelope setting screens A Curve Sens R Sen D Sens R Sens ADSR Attack Decay Sustain Release Env Env Depth Time KF E EE e ENVELOPE 127 Velocity Curve Envelope Velocity Curve Choose from the following seven curves to specify how your keyboard playing strength will affect the envelope depth If you don t want your keyboard playing strength to affec
282. ing Sample Sample exists in the copy or move destination To cancel the operation touch lt CANCEL gt To exe cute the copying or moving operation touch lt EXE CUTE gt SAVE PROJECT Are You Sure Project will be saved Is it OK to execute the opera tion To cancel the operation touch lt CANCEL gt To exe cute the operation touch lt EXECUTE gt 150 Message Boxes Message List Message boxes are displayed briefly and then disappear automatically Message Meaning Action Canceled The operation is canceled Cannot Delete This Event The events at the beginning and end of a wave can not be deleted Checksum Error The received system exclusive message has an in correct checksum value Correct the checksum value Completed The operation has been completed Connecting Now establishing a connection Disconnecting Now breaking the connection Event Doesn t Exist Here There is no event at the specified location Specify a location where there is an event Event Interval Too Narrow The event interval is too narrow for events to be placed in it Move the interval further from the nearest event Improper Name The folder name or volume label is blank Assign a name before you execute p 89 MIDI Buffer Full An excessive amount of MIDI data was received all at once and could not be proc
283. ing a Favorite Patch Patch Palette sese 35 Deleting Patches PATCH Delete tette cepe eei eripere 36 Functuonsorbateli Parametersu m u a ua kanpa aa n ap s 36 Settings Common to the Entire Patch Common U een 36 Modifying Waveforms OSC1 OSC2 ssteissi sisestati pe vineva Pe karsea ae Svaki REK 42 Mixing Modulating Two Sounds Mod sse 46 Applying Various Effects to Each Note You Play COSM1 COSM2 2 46 Adjusting the Volume and Pan TVA eren nens 47 Making Envelope Settings aieo sedie ote eden oae ideis fete ie eae ene 48 Making LEO Settings soot testi tied welt oido papain eds 49 Setting Effects for a Patch Effect ete eerte una n u asss 50 Zone Settings Zone aee eee oin toda e n lits Es 52 Splitting the Keyboard to Play Different Sounds Split sss 52 Creating a Drum Patch Drum intente tete etiatn dann 53 Creating and Editing Samples Sample Mode 55 Sampling usuyasa aa cs Sessile Sal cpn p assia dente B A 55 Settings Before You Sample What Is a Template sss 55 Sampling Procedure aan pasate pues 56 ResampldS ita oa alla iio totes 60 A eta req SNS RIEN ri detener Sapa I rr ed 60 Pre Effect Settings estt tee eee tae mette 61 Metronome Settings miis eee En ob epe eH peste de Ree ben Mei eia 62 Checking Sample Information etre e EO ahina AEEKO AKRO
284. input location cursor by pressing the lt P gt cursor buttons Pressing A will change the character at the cursor location to uppercase and pressing Y will change it to lowercase 5 When you have finished inputting touch lt OK gt to finalize the sample name Copying a Sample SAMPLE Copy 1 Access the SAMPLE Top screen p 56 2 Touch V in the upper right of the screen A pulldown menu appears SRHPLE Name SRHPLE Copy SAMPLE Hove SRHPLE Exchange SRHPLE Delete 3 In the pulldown menu touch SAMPLE Copy gt The SAMPLE Copy window appears SAMPLE Top SAMPLE Copy Source 001 108 MrphSyn List d m Destination 001 108 MrphSyn ES 4 Move the cursor to Source and select the copy source sample 5 Move the cursor to Destination and select the copy destination sample HINT When you touch lt List gt the Sample List window will appear allowing you to select the sample from the list 6 Touch lt Execute gt to execute the copy operation 7 Press EXIT The SAMPLE Copy window closes Creating and Editing Samples Sample Mode Moving a Sample SAMPLE Move Exchanging a Sample SAMPLE 1 Access the SAMPLE Top screen p 56 Excha nge 2 Touch V in the upper right of the screen 1 Access the SAMPLE Top screen p 56 A pulldown menu appears 2 Touch lt Y gt in the upper right of the screen A pulldown menu app
285. is recommended by Roland AN by Roland the rack or stand must be carefully placed so it is level and sure to remain stable If not using a rack or stand you still need to make sure that any location you choose for placing the unit provides a level surface that will properly support the unit and keep it from wobbling When using the unit with a rack or stand recommended Q The unit should be connected to a power supply only of the type described in the operating instructions or as AN marked on the unit Use only the attached power supply cord Q heavy objects on it Doing so can damage the cord producing severed elements and short circuits Damaged cords are fire and shock hazards Do not excessively twist or bend the power cord nor place S and headphones or speakers may be capable of producing sound levels that could cause permanent hearing loss Do not operate for a long period of time at a high volume level or at a level that is uncomfortable If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears you should immediately stop using the unit and consult an audiologist This unit either alone or in combination with an amplifier S pins or liquids of any kind water soft drinks etc to Do not allow any objects e g flammable material coins S penetrate the unit In households with small children an adult should provide supervision until the child is capable of following AN all the rules es
286. it Bank Select Switch Specifies whether Bank Select messages will be transmitted ON or not OFF Value OFF ON Tx Active Sens Transmit Active Sensing Switch Specifies whether Active Sensing messages will be transmitted ON or not OFF Value OFF ON 77 MU Settings Common to All Modes System Mode Settings Common to All Modes System Mode KBD SYSTEM Ctrl KBD v KBD Sens LIGHT sene HEAVY KBD Velocity After Sens a m 199 Local Sw Remote KBD Sw KBD Sens Keyboard Sensitivity Adjusts the keyboard s touch Value LIGHT Light weight synthesizer keyboard like MEDIUM Standard HEAVY Acoustic piano simulation Cont i mm V LIHK KBD Velocity Keyboard Velocity Specifies the velocity value that will be transmitted when you play the keyboard If you want actual keyboard velocity to be transmitted set this to REAL If you want a fixed velocity value to be transmitted regardless of how you play specify the desired value 1 127 Value REAL 1 127 After Sens Aftertouch Sensitivity Specifies the Aftertouch sensitivity Higher values will allow Aftertouch to be applied more easily Normally you will leave this at 100 Value 0 200 Local Sw Local Switch The Local Switch determines whether the internal sound generator is disconnected OFF from the controller section keyboard pitch bend modulation lever knobs buttons Time Trip Pad D Bea
287. it desee Velocity A Sens Velocity Curve Velocity R Sens Velocity Sens eie Tid e en n RD MIN nei st ut nd V LINK V LINK aftertouch assign sse 82 V LINK aftertouch local switch sse 82 V LINK assign time trip uu s u a a u eE VELINK audio SWiteh ke receta eter da EAS V LINK D beam local switch i V LINK D beam1 4 assign L R sss 81 V LINK knob1 2 assign 81 V LINK knob1 2 local switch 80 V LINK MIDI channel V LINK mode s 31 V LINK modulation assign sss 81 V LINK modulation local switch aa 81 V LINK patch palette local switch 80 V LINK pitch bend assign 82 V LINK pitch bend local switch we 81 V LINK time trip pad local switch sss 80 VEEINK Crede A 80 Volume slider sse tenen 12 W Mew 42 Waveform wee 42 WIDTH itte tette nne eene ate ee etd 14 lois e MM 17 X X assign time trip sse 78 X Assign TT X Assign XY Y Y assign time trip netten 78 A A t mem ID ERN 78 WASSIE XY 4 cocti RTI UR NRI FX tpe 78 80 Z Zero cross search ZeroX u luu 66 VE n E SY misa coh E tec aaa ua RN 16 52 Pec 66 Zoom DAT 4er telecamere eer st pee steer aee aee deus deussedastnesen 66 177 Installing the PC Card Protector The V Synth provides a PC card protector to prev
288. it in the box including padding that it came in if possible Otherwise you will need to use equivalent packaging materials Use only the specified expression pedal EV sold separately By connecting any other expression pedals you risk causing malfunction and or damage to the unit Use a cable from Roland to make the connection If using some other make of connection cable please note the following precau tions Some connection cables contain resistors Do not use cables that incorporate resistors for connecting to this unit The use of such cables can cause the sound level to be extremely low or impossible to hear For information on cable specifications contact the manufacturer of the cable Before Using Cards Using DATA Cards Carefully insert the DATA card all the way in until it is firmly in place MEMORY CARD Never touch the terminals of the DATA card Also avoid getting the terminals dirty Handling CD ROMs Avoid touching or scratching the shiny underside encoded surface of the disc Damaged or dirty CD ROM discs may not be read properly Keep your discs clean using a commercially available CD cleaner Copyright Unauthorized recording distribution sale lending public perfor mance broadcasting or the like in whole or in part of a work musical composition video broadcast public performance or the like whose copyright is held by a third party is prohibited by law When excha
289. ity Sens 1 127 I I I 363 S463 d I I 63 63 I 00 70 Oaaa aaaa OSC 2 Formant Envelope Depth Q 127 l 00 3F Oaaa aaaa Env 5 Release Velocity Sens 127 I I I 63 63 I I I 63 63 I 00 71 0000 000a OSC 2 Tempo Sync Sw 0 1 00 40 O0aa aaaa Env 5 Time Keyfollow 44 84 OFF ON 200 200 I 00 72 0000 000a OSC 2 Robot Voice Sw 0 1 I I I OFF ON it 00 41 0000 aaaa I 00 73 0000 OOaa OSC 2 Playback Mode 0 3 I 0000 bbbb Env 6 Attack Time 0 144 RETRIGGER LEGATO STEP EVENT l 0 127 MUSICAL NOTES I 00 74 0000 000a OSC 2 Loop Sw 0 1 E 00 43 0000 aaaa l I I I OFF ON I 0000 bbbb Env 6 Decay Time 0 144 I 00 75 0000 000a OSC 2 Vari Sw 0 1 I I I 0 127 MUSICAL NOTES I OFF ON I 00 45 Oaaa aaaa Env 6 Sustine 0 127 l 00 76 Oaaa aaaa OSC 2 Energy 0 127 l4 00 46 0000 aaaa I I I OFF 1 127 I 0000 bbbb Env 6 Release Time 0 144 00 77 0000 000a OSC 2 Time Trip Sw CO TS 0 127 MUSICAL NOTES I I I OFF ON I 00 48 0000 Oaaa Env 6 Velocity Curve 0 7 I 00 78 0000 000a OSC 2 Time Trip Beat Keep 0 1 I FIXED 1 7 I I I OFF ON 00 49 Oaaa aaaa Env 6 Velocity Sens 1 127 I l I 63 63 00 00 00 79 Total Size I 00 4A Oaaa aaaa Env 6 Attack Velocity Sens 1
290. k for the phaser Higher settings will give the sound a stronger character Phaser Mix Lev 0 127 Specifies the volume of the el phase shifted sound relative to the direct sound Mod Mode CHORUS Selects whether to use chorus or Parameter Value Description FLANGER flanger Ring Freq 0 127 Frequency at which modulation Mod Rate 0 05 10 0 Hz Adjusts the speed of modulation will be applied note for the chorus or flanger Ring Balance 1 DRY100 0WET Volume balance between the di Mod Depth 0 127 Adjusts the depth of modulation DRYO 100WET rect sound DRY and the ring for the chorus or flanger modulated sound WET Mod Phase 0 180 deg Sets how the chorus or flanger EQ Low Freq 50 4000 Hz Frequency of the low range sound is spread EQ Low Gain 15 15dB Gain of the low range Mod Pre Delay 0 50 0 ms Adjusts the delay time from the EQ Mid Freq 50 20000 Hz Frequency of the middle range direct sound until the chorus or EQ Mid Q 0 5 0 7 1 0 2 0 Gain of the middle range flanger sound is heard 4 0 8 0 Set a higher value for Q to nar Mod Feedback 98 98 Adjusts the proportion of the ef row the range to be affected fect sound that is fed back into EQ Mid Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the middle range the effect Negative settings EQ Hi Freq 2000 20000 Hz Frequency of the high range will invert the phase EQ Hi Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the high range Mod XoverLPF 500 15000 Hz Adjusts the cutoff frequency of PS Grade 15 Set
291. l s DL Reverb on off switch aa 51 Reverb send level e e desees 50 176 REVELAN PE i osea RR unata aan 51 52 Robot Voice 1s octets ado Tees 43 ROA das ema ene i Cease canes ict oce Steet EVA ARS Rx Bank Import Clear a noe Sasa suenevtice cd eed TA tee 67 Insert LR Mix Normalize akaun aati u m ied eeib ide cg 67 PAISTE keert e ee trei toe iier eap a sagu s CN aa Saha Region s RON Tr ricate aeta e EE aaie LOTO OS ES SAMPLE Encode 3 SAMPLE Information cn SAMPLE Loop FWD sese nee nennen Sample mode SAMPLE Name SAMPLE Top s honeste e SAMPLING General seen Sampling memory SAMPLING Pre Effect SAMPLING Template Sampling template tisori a a au a A a E Ea SAMPLING Template Name aaa 63 Sampling type 4 ce iii nee enu 60 Save Sample u qas eee eerte a Q Qu S u S a System Save Project sse tet tenet nennen Scale Tune nice teint teet ei Fat rne vean a eene oed Scale Tune C B Scale tune switch Sens Sira 39 SEIEET eese ee ee E c Re S 13 Shuffle R te ertet cet teen i enden 40 Shuffle Resolution 40 Sound generator section SOU CO 2 Splits adobe eise eines etd Mee poa ier d e eder Start Offset u Storage mode SECU CTL e E E O CO ON 36 S stai A A dd a 61 SYSTEM Com Ma
292. l be sounded in the order in which you pressed them By pressing the notes in the appropriate order you can produce melody lines Up to 128 notes will be remembered RHYTHM Unlike a conventional arpeggio the notes that you specified when inputting the pattern will always sound The keys that you press while performing will not affect the result the specified pattern will play regardless of the pitch of the keys you play This is suitable for playing a drum patch p 53 PHRASE Pressing a single key will sound the phrase based on the pitch of that key If multiple keys are pressed the last pressed key will be valid AUTO The timing at which the keys are sounded is assigned automatically starting at the lowest key that you pressed Shuffle Rate Arpeggio Shuffle Rate This setting lets you modify the note timing to create shuffle rhythms With a setting of 50 the notes will be spaced evenly As the value is increased the note timing will have more of a dotted shuffle feel Value 0 100 Shuffle Rate 50 Shuffle Rate 90 Shuffle Resolution Arpeggio Shuffle Resolution Specify the timing resolution in terms of a note value The note value can be specified as either an 16th note or a eighth note Value EN 40 Creating a Patch Tune PATCH Edit Com Tune INIT PATCH 2 01 bd Patch Tune Coarse Fine SANT Fig ue Ed 0 cu Eb FR Gt Bb ej 0 el 0 EAT 0 sj sed ed 0 c D E
293. l be turned off However if Hold 1 or Sostenuto is ON the sound will be continued until these are turned off OMNI OFF Controller number 124 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 7CH 00H n MIDI channel number 0H FH ch 1 16 The same processing will be carried out as when All Notes Off is received OMNI ON Controller number 125 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 7DH 00H n MIDI channel number 0H FH ch 1 16 The same processing will be carried out as when All Notes Off is received OMNI ON will not be turned on MIDI Implementation MONO Controller number 126 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 7EH mmH n MIDI channel number 0H FH ch 1 16 mm mono number 00H 10H 0 16 The same processing will be carried out as when All Notes Off is received e POLY Controller number 127 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 7FH 00H n MIDI channel number 0H FH ch 1 16 The same processing will be carried out as when All Notes Off is received mSystem Realtime Message Active Sensing Status FEH When Active Sensing is received the unit will begin monitoring the intervals of all further messages While monitoring if the interval between messages exceeds 420 ms the same processing will be carried out as when All Sounds Off All Notes Off and Reset All Controllers are received and message interval monitoring will be halted mSystem Exclusive Message Status Data byte Status FOH iiH
294. l l REST 1 127 TIE IE 00 1E 0000 aaaa 0000 bbbb Step 15 Velocity 0 128 l j l REST 1 127 TIE IE 00 20 0000 aaaa 0000 bbbb Step 16 Velocity 12B l l l REST 1 127 TIE IE 00 22 0000 aaaa 0000 bbbb Step 17 Velocity 0 128 l l REST 1 127 TIE E 00 24 0000 aaaa 0000 bbbb Step 18 Velocity 0 128 l l I REST 1 127 TIE 1 00 26 0000 aaaa 0000 bbbb Step 19 Velocity 10 128 l l j REST 1 127 TIE IE 00 28 0000 aaaa 0000 bbbb Step 20 Velocity We 128 l l l REST 1 127 TIE IE 00 2A 0000 aaaa 0000 bbbb Step 21 Velocity 0 128 l j l REST 1 127 TIE IE 00 2C 0000 aaaa 0000 bbbb Step 22 Velocity 0 128 l l l REST 1 127 TIE 1 00 2E 0000 aaaa 0000 bbbb Step 23 Velocity 10 128 l l l REST 1 127 TIE E 00 30 0000 aaaa 0000 bbbb Step 24 Velocity 0 128 l j l REST 1 127 TIE IE 00 32 0000 aaaa 0000 bbbb Step 25 Velocity 138 l l l REST 1 127 TIE IE 00 34 0000 aaaa 0000 bbbb Step 26 Velocity 0 1487 l REST 1 127 TIE IE 00 36 0000 aaaa 0000 bbbb Step 27 Velocity 0 128 l l REST 1 127 TIE IE 00 38 0000 aaaa 0000 bbbb Step 28 Velocity 0 128 l l REST 1 127 TIE IE 00 3A 0000 aaaa 0000 bbbb Step 29 Velocity 0 128 l l REST 1 127 TIE E 00 3C
295. l purpose controller 2 General purpose controller 3 General purpose controller 4 Breath type General purpose controller 1 General purpose controller 2 General purpose controller 3 General purpose controller 4 Hold 1 Portamento Sostenuto General purpose controller 5 General purpose controller 6 General purpose controller 7 General purpose controller 8 Reverb General purpose effects 1 Chorus General purpose effects 3 Pedal Knob D Beam TT Pad RPN LSB MSB Modulation Knob 1 Pedal 1 10 11 Control 16 Change 17 18 19 34 48 49 50 51 64 65 66 80 81 82 83 91 93 1 31 64 95 100 101 Pedal 2 D Beam1 L D Beam2 L D Beam3 L D Beam4 L Knob 2 D Beam1 R D Beam2 R D Beam3 R D Beam4 R Hold TT Pad XY X TT Pad XY Y TT Pad TT X TT Pad TT Y O XOXxXOOOOXxXOOOOOOOOOOOXOXxOOO O OXODOXXXXODOXXXXXXXXXOOOOOXXxO Program Change True Number kk kkk kkk kkk kk m N Program No 1 128 O e O System Exclusive Song Position Song Select Tune Request System Common System Clock Realtime Commands All Sound Off Aux Reset All Controllers Local On Off Messages All Notes Off Active Sensing System Reset 123 127 x Ox gt gt gt XOOXOO 1 OX is selectable 2 Recognized as M 1 even if Mz1 3 Transmits when Data Transfer is executed or RQ1 received Mode 1 OMNI ON
296. lation characteristic of these speakers can be simulated quite closely This effect is most suitable for electric organ Patches 26 Tremolo Auto Pan This is a stereo tremolo or auto pan effect Tremolo cyclically modulates the volume to add tremolo effect to the sound The Auto Pan effect cyclically modulates the stereo location of the sound Parameter Value Description Parameter Value Description Mode TREMOLO Selects whether to use tremolo Speed SLOW FAST Simultaneously switch the rota AUTO PAN or auto pan tional speed of the low frequen Waveform TRL SAWUP Selects the type of modulation cy rotor and high frequency SAWDN SOR TRI Triangle wave rotor SIN SAWUP SAWDN Sawtooth SLOW Slows down the rotation Wave to the Slow Rate SOR Square wave FAST Speeds up the rotation to SIN Sine wave the Fast Rate SAWUP SAWDN Low Slow Rate 0 05 10 0 Hz Slow speed SLOW of the low note frequency rotor AW ISIN Low Fast Rate 0 05 10 0 Hz Fast speed FAST of the low fre note quency rotor Rate 1 0 05 10 0 Hz Frequency of modulation Low Accelera 0 15 Adjusts the time it takes the low moe tion frequency rotor to reach the Depth 2 0 127 Depth of modulation newly selected speed when Balance DRY100 0WET Volume balance between the di switching from fast to slow or DRYO0 100WET rect sound DRY and the effect slow to
297. lification of the waveform Value 12 12 dB Waveform Analog Oscillator Waveform Selects the wave upon which the sound is to be based when using an analog oscillator Value Waveform Pulse Width Fat p 44 p 44 SAW Sawtooth wave O O SQR Square wave O O TRI Triangle wave O O SINE Sine wave O O RAMP Ramp wave O O JUNO Modulated sawtooth wave O O HQ SAW High quality sawtooth wave X X HQ SQR High quality square wave O X NOISE Noise wave O X O effective X ineffective Impact Analog Oscillator Impact Specifies the sharpness of the attack of the analog oscillator Higher settings will produce a sharper attack Value 0 0 4 0 Time Trip Sw Time Trip Switch Selects whether Time Trip will operate ON or not OFF Value OFF ON Beat Keep Time Trip Beat Keep After Time Trip is operated this selects whether you will chase to the beat location where you otherwise would have been if Time Trip had not been operated ON or whether this chase will not occur OFF Value OFF ON Waveform PCM Oscillator Waveform Selects the wave upon which the sound is to be based when using a PCM oscillator Value 1 999 wave number When you touch List the Wave List window will appear allowing you to select the wave from the list MEMO When you select a wave the wave name encoding type and stereo mono will also be displayed Vari Sw PCM Osc
298. ly longer times Larger settings will produce greater change Value 200 200 48 Creating a Patch Making LFO Settings This section explains the LFO setting screens finalos OSC Waveform SS Afro A Rai Key Sunc Delay 7 Rate Time ta gl amp mn 95 ON E on gt Heus LFO Waveform LFO Waveform Selects the waveform of the LFO Value SIN Sine wave TRI Triangle wave SAW Sawtooth wave SQR Square wave RND Random wave TRP Trapezoidal wave S amp H Sample amp Hold wave one time per cycle LFO value is changed CHAOS Chaos wave MEMO LFO in the lower right of the screen shows a wave graphic that corresponds to the current settings Offset LFO Offset Raises or lowers the LFO waveform relative to the central value Positive settings will move the waveform so that modulation will occur from the central value upward Negative settings will move the waveform so that modulation will occur from the central value downward Value 100 50 0 50 100 Key Sync LFO Key Sync Switch This specifies whether the LFO cycle will be synchronized to begin when the key is pressed ON or not OFF Value OFF ON Delay Time LFO Delay Time Delay Time LFO Delay Time specifies the time elapsed before the LFO effect is applied the effect continues after the key is pressed or released
299. m controller pedal and so on or not disconnected ON Normally this is left ON but if you wish to use the V Synth s keyboard and controllers to control only external sound modules set it to OFF Value OFF ON Remote KBD Sw Remote Keyboard Switch Set this parameter ON when you want to use an external MIDI keyboard instead of the V Synth s keyboard In this case the MIDI transmit channel of the external MIDI keyboard can be set to any channel Normally you will leave this parameter OFF Rint Turn this ON when you want to control the V Synth from an external MIDI device when performing with the Arpeggiator p 24 TT Pad Knob SYSTEM Ctrl TT Pad Knob v A Rssign XY X Assign TT CC8z Y Rssign XY Y Assign TT cc 1 ccos Knob w 1 Assign 2 Assign ccoz cc34 Cont E Common U LINK X Assign XY Specifies the MIDI controller number that will be transmitted by movements in the X horizontal direction when the Time Trip pad is in XY mode Value OFF No message will be transmitted CC01 31 33 95 Controller numbers 1 31 33 95 Y Assign XY Specifies the MIDI controller number that will be transmitted by movements in the Y vertical direction when the Time Trip pad is in XY mode Value OFF No message will be transmitted CC01 31 33 95 Controller numbers 1 31 33 95 X Assign TT X Assign Time Trip Specifies the
300. me Trip Pad to morph between the sound created by OSC1 and COSM1 and the sound created by OSC2 and COSM2 Portamento Porta mento Sw itch Specifies whether the portamento effect will be applied ON or not OFF Value OFF ON Creating a Patch Portamento Portamento is an effect which smoothly changes the pitch from the first played key to the next played key By applying portamento when the Mono Poly parameter is monophonic you can simulate slide performance techniques on a violin or similar instrument Mode Portamento Mode Specifies the performance conditions for which portamento will be applied Value NORMAL Portamento will always be applied LEGATO Portamento will be applied only when you play legato i e when you press the next key before releasing the previous key Type Portamento Type Specifies the type of portamento effect Value RATE The time it takes will depend on the distance between the two pitches TIME The time it takes will be constant regardless of how far apart in pitch the notes are Time Portamento Time When portamento is used this specifies the time over which the pitch will change Higher settings will cause the pitch change to the next note to take more time Value 0 127 Time Velo Sens Portamento Time Velocity Sensitivity This allows keyboard dynamics to affect the portamento Time If you want portamento Time to be speeded up for strongly played notes set this
301. mple Mode Creating and Editing Samples Sample Mode Importing a Sample To import samples you will use the Disk Save Project screen of Disk mode 1 Access the SAMPLE Top screen p 56 2 Touch lt Import gt Jump to the DISK Import Files screen in the Disk mode DISK Import Files mum 66 7MB Free 17 2items For details on operations in this screen refer to Importing Individual Patch or Wave Files Import Files p 85 Editing a Sample When you have finished sampling you can edit the sample data You can also edit samples that you loaded p 85 When editing a sample touching PREVIEW will play the sample so you can check whether it was edited as you expect note When the editing screens are displayed playing the keyboard will not produce sound It is not possible to edit two or more samples simultaneously With some exceptions editing a sample that has been encoded will cause the encoding data to be discarded In this case you must encode the data once again p 69 The factory set waves preset waves cannot be edited Common Procedure for Editing Displaying the Sample Edit Screen 1 Press MODE The V SYNTH MODE MENU window appears Y SYNTH MODE MENU 2 Touch lt SAMPLE gt The SAMPLE Top screen appears SAMPLE Top Y BROHSER Sameling Import 001 108 MrehSsn y a 002 058 VoxSwP an 004 157 PGSweer oe 6 Wave
302. n 2017 Johannesbourg SOUTH AFRICA TEL 011 403 4105 Paul Bothner PTY Ltd 17 Werdmuller Centre Main Road Claremont 7708 SOUTH AFRICA P O BOX 23032 Claremont 7735 SOUTH AFRICA TEL 021 674 4030 CHINA Roland Shanghai Electronics Co Ltd 5F No 1500 Pingliang Road Shanghai CHINA TEL 021 5580 0800 Roland Shanghai Electronics Co Ltd BEIJING OFFICE 10F No 18 Anhuaxili Chaoyang District Beijing CHINA TEL 010 6426 5050 HONG KONG Tom Lee Music Co Ltd Service Division 22 32 Pun Shan Street Tsuen Wan New Territories HONG KONG TEL 2415 0911 INDIA Rivera Digitec India Pvt Ltd 409 Nirman Kendra Mahalaxmi Flats Compound Off Dr Edwin Moses Road Mumbai 400011 INDIA TEL 022 2493 9051 INDONESIA PT Citra IntiRama J1 Cideng Timur No 15 150 Jakarta Pusat INDONESIA TEL 021 6324170 KOREA Cosmos Corporation 461 9 Seocho Dong Seocho Ku Seoul KOREA TEL 02 3486 8855 MALAYSIA BENTLEY MUSIC SDN BHD 40 amp 142 Jalan Bukit Bintang 55100 Kuala Lumpur MALAYSIA TEL 03 2144 3333 PHILIPPINES G A Yupangco amp Co Inc 339 Gil J Puyat Avenue Makati Metro Manila 1200 PHILIPPINES TEL 02 899 9801 SINGAPORE Swee Lee Company 150 Sims Drive SINGAPORE 387381 TEL 6846 3676 CRISTOFORI MUSIC PTE LTD Blk 3014 Bedok Industrial Park E 02 2148 SINGAPORE 489980 TEL 6243 9555 TAIWAN ROLAND TAIWAN ENTERPRISE CO LTD Room 5 9
303. nance near the cutoff frequen cy giving the sound a special characteristic Filter Gain 0 24 dB Compensates for the volume dropped in the cut frequency range with some filters The level of compensation in creases as the value is increased and raise the volume LowBoost Level 15 15 dB Increasing this value gives youa heavier low end Depending on the Isolator and filter settings this effect may be hard to distinguish 05 Distortion OD Distortion Overdrive Overdrive produces a natural sounding distortion similar to that produced by a vacuum tube amplifier Distortion produces a more intense distortion than the overdrive effect sound L a Filter R Isolator Booster Parameter Value Description Low Band Level 60 4 dB These specify each level of the 1 Low Mid and High frequency Mid Band Level ranges 2 At 60 dB the sound becomes in Hi Band Level audible 0 dB is equivalent to the 3 input level of the sound AP Low Sw OFF ON Turns the Anti Phase function onand off for the Low frequency ranges When turned on the counter channel of stereo sound is in verted and added to the signal AP Low Level 0 127 Adjusts the level settings for the Low frequency ranges Adjusting this level for certain frequencies allows you to lend emphasis to specific parts This is effective only for stereo source AP Mid Sw OFF ON Settings of the Anti Phas
304. nce the V Synth is connected you can transfer files by operating your computer nore Do not perform the following actions while Access the access indicator in the USB Storage screen is blinking Doing so may cause your computer to freeze and may also damage the files in the drive Do not disconnect the USB cable Do not remove the PC card while it is being accessed Do not sleep restart or shut down your computer Do not turn off the power of V Synth Switching the Connected Drive When USB connected here s how to switch between Internal the V Synth s internal memory and PC Card the PC card inserted in the V Synth 1 In the V Synth s USB Storage screen make sure that Access the access indicator is not blinking 2 Select the V Synth drive icon on your desktop and either choose Eject from the Special menu or drag the icon into the trash 3 In the V Synth s USB Storage screen touch lt Internal gt or lt PC Card gt to change drives 93 MM Connecting to Your Computer via USB USB Mode Connecting to Your Computer via USB USB Mode Closing the USB Storage Screen 1 In the V Synth s USB Storage screen make sure that Access the access indicator is not blinking 2 Select the V Synth drive icon on your desktop and either choose Eject from the Special menu or drag the icon into the trash 3 Press EXIT The USB Storage sc
305. ncel gt Discard the sample that you just recorded and return to the SAMPLING Template screen lt Decide gt Finalize the sample that you just recorded and register it in the sample list lt RETRY gt Discard the sample that you just recorded and sample once again 57 HE Creating and Editing Samples Sample Mode Creating and Editing Samples Sample Mode Naming a Sample SAMPLE Name Assign a new name to the sample You can assign a name consisting of up to twelve characters 1 Access the SAMPLE Top screen and select the sample that you want to name p 56 2 Touch V in the upper right of the screen A pulldown menu appears SAMPLE Name SAMPLE Copy SAMPLE Move SAMPLE Exchange SAMPLE Delete 3 In the pulldown menu touch SAMPLE Name gt The SAMPLE Name window appears SAMPLE Top 4 Touch the on screen alphabetic or numeric keys to enter the new name in the text box The on screen keys have the following functions lt gt lt gt gt Move the cursor in the text box to the desired input location lt SHIFT gt Turn this on when you want to input uppercase letters or symbols lt Insert gt Turn this on when you want to insert a character at the cursor location lt Clear gt Erases all characters in the text box lt Delete gt Deletes the character at the cursor location lt Back gt Deletes the character that precedes the cursor location You can also move the
306. ncy at the frequency characteristics which the sound is modulated making the sound resemble that Phaser Rate 0 05 10 0 Hz Specifies the frequency of mod from an older system note ulation Disk Type LP EP SP Sets the turntable rotation Phaser Depth 0 127 Specifies the depth of modula speed tion LP 33 1 3 r p m Phaser Reso 0 127 Specifies the amount of feed EP 45 r p m nance back for the phaser SP 78 r p m Higher settings will give the Total Noise 1 0 127 Total noise level sound a stronger character Scratch 0 127 Scratches on the record Phaser Mix Lev 0 127 Specifies the volume of the Dust 0 127 Dust on the record el phase shifted sound relative to Hiss 0 127 Continuous hissing noise the direct sound These settings add the typical record s noise The noises increase as Delay Time 0 650 ms note Adjusts the delay time from the the values are raised Set each of the Scratch Dust and Hiss noise direct sound until the delay levels to get a balance the adjust the overall amount of noise with the sound is heard Total Noise Level control Delay Feedback 98 98 Adjusts the proportion of the de Total Wow 0 127 Total wow and flutter lay sound that is fed back into Flutter 2 the effect Negative settings Wow 0 127 Wow long cycle rotational ir will invert the phase regularity Low Damp Freq 50 4000 Hz Adjusts the frequency below Flutter 0 127 Flutter short cycle rotational ir which sound fed back to the ef re
307. nd voice characteristics formant on a real time basis Allows easy synchronization to tempo and pitch 3 A single sample covers an extended range of keys compared to conventional digital samplers Retains sound quality while implementing the above three advantages VariPhrase overcomes many problems that conventional samplers and digital recorders have with audio phrases Typical issues with Digital Samplers and Digital recorders Changing tempo affects Pitch Changing the pitch of phrases affects tempo and formant of the sound Limited control of audio phrases You cannot adjust a partial section of a sound in real time Most samplers require multiple samples over limited key ranges for realistic playback of a sound Samples of the same tempo must be available for performing chords otherwise the notes of the chord will be out of sync Pitch or tempo changes on Digital samplers tends to degrade audio quality VariPhrase solves all of these problems 11 Panel Descriptions Front Panel Volume Slider Adjusts the overall volume that is output from the rear panel MAIN OUT jacks and PHONES jack Quick Start p 4 E INPUT PEAK Peak Indicator This will light when the input volume is too high LEVEL Adjusts the volume of the signal input through the INPUT jacks on the rear panel p 57 E D BEAM You can apply a variety of effects to sounds simply by moving your hand gt
308. ne Steps Transpose Transpose changes keyboard pitch in units of semitones This function is useful when you play transposed instruments such as trumpet or clarinet following a printed score 1 Press TRANSPOSE to light indicator This turns Transpose on 2 While holding down TRANSPOSE press OCT or OCT to transpose the keyboard Pressing OCT once while holding down TRANSPOSE will raise the keyboard one semitone Pressing OCT once while holding down TRANSPOSE will lower the keyboard one semitone The specified Transpose setting will be shown in the Trans indication of PATCH PLAY screen PRTCH PLRY MadOrchestra rtZ 011 v Ch TX RX RxX 1 J 120 y e Zone a1 I MadUrchestra 03c1 0sc2 MOD cos costa TUR ere Common Alternatively you can move the cursor to Trans in the PATCH PLAY screen and turn the VALUE dial or use INC DEC to make the setting You can also do this by dragging on the touch screen 3 To turn off Transpose press TRANSPOSE once again so that its indicator goes off The Transpose setting you make will be maintained nore There is a single Transpose setting Setup parameter for the entire V Synth The changed setting will be remembered even if you switch patches Playing in Patch Mode Transposing the Keyboard in Octave Units Octave Shift The Octave Shift function transposes the pitch of the keyboard in 1 octave
309. nergy 0 127 Fmt LFO Depth Formant LFO Depth 63 63 Velocity Curve Envelope Velocity Curve 0 7 Velocity Sens Envelope Velocity Sensitivity 63 63 Velocity A Sens Envelope Attack Time Velocity Sensitivity 63 63 Velocity D Sens Envelope Decay Time Velocity Sensitivity 63 63 Velocity R Sens Envelope Release Time Velocity Sensitivity 63 63 ADSR Attack Envelope Attack Time 0 127 note ADSR Decay Envelope Decay Time 0 127 note ADSR Sustain Envelope Sustain Level 0 127 ADSR Release Envelope Release Time 0 127 note Env Depth Envelope Depth 63 63 Env Time KF Envelope Time Key Follow 200 200 OSC TVA Level 0 127 Level KF Level Key Follow 200 200 Level LFO Dp Level LFO Depth 63 63 Velocity Curve Envelope Velocity Curve 0 7 Velocity Sens Envelope Velocity Sensitivity 63 63 Velocity A Sens Envelope Attack Time Velocity Sensitivity 63 63 Velocity D Sens Envelope Decay Time Velocity Sensitivity 63 63 Velocity R Sens Envelope Release Time Velocity Sensitivity 63 63 ADSR Attack Envelope Attack Time 0 127 note ADSR Decay Envelope Decay Time 0 127 note ADSR Sustain Envelope Sustain Level 0 127 ADSR Release Envelope Release Time 0 127 note Env Time KF Envelope Time Key Follow 200 200 104 Parameter List Parameter Value LFO Waveform LFO Waveform SIN TRI SAW SQR RND
310. nging audio signals through a digital connection with an external instrument this unit can perform recording without being subjected to some of the restrictions of the Serial Copy Management System SCMS This is because the unit is intended solely for musical production and is designed not to be subject to restrictions as long as it is used to record works such as your own compositions that do not infringe on the copyrights of others SCMS is a feature that prohibits second generation and later copying through a digital connection It is built into MD recorders and other consumer digital audio equipment as a copyright protection feature Do not use this unit for purposes that could infringe ona copyright held by a third party We assume no responsibility whatsoever with regard to any infringements of third party copyrights arising through your use of this unit How To Use This Manual This owner s manual is organized as follows Before you start reading it we d like to suggest going through the Quick Start manual For details on all the patches and waves that the V Synth contains refer to the separate Sound List Overview of the V Synth This explains the structure of the V Synth and basic operation Reading it is essential for understanding V Synth operational procedures Playing in Patch Mode This explains how to play the V Synth in Patch mode Reading it is essential for understanding V Synth operational procedur
311. nput dual output delay Stereo sound left and right are mixed before being input STEREO This is a dual input dual output delay The delay sound output features the same stereo placement as that of the input ALTERNATE The left and right delay sound output alternately Alternate delay Ps Low Freq 50 4000 Hz Frequency of the low range Ps Low Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the low range Ps Hi Freq 2000 20000 Hz Frequency of the high range Ps Hi Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the high range 0 1300 ms MONO 0 650 ms STEREO ALTERNATE note Delay Time Adjusts the delay time from the direct sound until the delay sound is heard L R Shift 0 650 ms note Of the left and right delay sounds the delay time will be increased for only one side If the L R order is L gt R the R sound will be later In the case of RL the L sound will be later When the mode is set to MONO or ALTERNATE this setting will be ignored L R Order LR R gt L In STEREO or ALTERNATE mode this setting determines which of the left or right sides has the delay sound before the other LR The left side is expressed first RL The right side is expressed first In MONO mode this setting will be ignored 122 12 Multi Tap Delay The effect has five delays Each of the Delay Time parameters can be specified as a note length of the selected tempo You can al
312. nsmit patches from the work area Use the FROM TO fields to specify the range of patch numbers 001 512 that will be transmit lt TEMP gt Transmit patch from the temporary area Set the external MIDI device so that it will be ready to receive data and touch lt Execute gt to execute data transmission While the data is being transmitted the display will indicate Transmitting When COMPLETED is displayed the transmission has been completed Kw Other Functions 97 Other Functions Reset to Default Factory Settings Factory Reset This restores all data in the V Synth to the factory set condition Factory Reset von If there is important data you ve created that s stored in the V Synth s internal memory all such data is discarded when a Factory Reset is performed If you want to keep the existing data save it on a PC card p 85 USB backing up onto a computer p 94 or transmit it to an external MIDI device and save it p 97 1 Press MODE The V SYNTH MODE MENU window appears Y SYNTH MODE MENU FACTORY RESET 2 Touch lt FACTORY RESET gt The Factory Reset screen appears Factory Reset This will clear all the internal memory contents and recall factory presets CANCEL EXECUTE 3 Touch lt Execute gt to execute the Factory Reset When the display indicates COMPLETED the factory reset operation has been completed
313. ntation 1 Receive Data Channel Voice Messages Not received in Multitimbre mode or Performance mode when the Receive Switch parameter MULTITIMBRE MIDI or PERFORM MIDI is OFF Note Off Status 2nd byte 3rd byte 8nH kkH vvH 9nH kkH 00H n MIDI channel number 0H FH ch 1 16 00H 7FH 0 127 00H 7FH 0 127 kk note number vv note off velocity Note On Status 2nd byte 3rd byte 9nH kkH vvH n MIDI channel number 0H FH ch 1 16 00H 7FH 0 127 01H 7FH 1 127 kk note number vv note on velocity Polyphonic Key Pressure Status 2nd byte 3rd byte AnH kkH vvH n MIDI channel number 0H FH ch 1 16 00H 7FH 0 127 00H 7FH 0 127 kk note number vv Polyphonic Key Pressure e Control Change If the corresponding Controller number is selected for the Patch Control Source 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 or 8 parameter PATCH Edit Com Matrix Ctrl the corresponding effect will Occur OBank Select Controller number 0 32 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 00H mmH BnH 20H 1H n MIDI channel number 0H FH ch 1 16 mm ll Bank number 00 00H 7F 7FH bank 1 bank 16384 Not received when the Receive Bank Select SYSTEM Com MIDI USB is OFF The Patches corresponding to each Bank Select are as follows BANK SELECT PROGRAM PATCH MSB LSB NUMBER NUMBER 4 4 4 087 000 001 128 001 128
314. nvelope velocity sensitivity o NUMERORUM S S x E n n a au Qa u uu epe EG a das a Sa ETT S Delete el A NO External Input Types siseorganite keen eare anra 74 F Factory Reset aaa e e a a a e 98 Factory reset mode ssir S NE A E ee 19 Fade Mode Emt EFO Depth OO 45 FORMANT Formant Formant KF A A O e Re PREITY DOOR ac dms G GAINSWICCH envios soria intactas 15 Coneral m Et etai deceptos daa deco s 36 H High Freg ees reote tom re ddl et un ahis ist ees 75 High frequency 75 HIGH G iti Cau maaa yasa ete sets 75 HOLD ArpeggiatOr EATEN AA D a aa as S 12 24 Time trip pad 12 29 Hold 38 40 HOLD PEDAL jack sse teens 15 Hold pedal polarity erranei ra 79 Hold Polarity y n sss tet tentent 79 l OP E ttt 42 Import Files INC 13 20 Info 22A Peverre rier a n 98 Initialize Disk A a a 86 Me T nala NARRO 33 RR INPUT jack masay a aaa tede RR ERRARE e TN Input SOUTE ec nex en A ATE acti Internal memory Just temperament sse 41 K BO ense e REED aaa sa aasan Yams 78 quac 78 KBD Velezsugsn NS es 40 KBD Velocity aeiee reretia senas rooh iaee seeni Eit ee sasa sassa 78 Key Follow Batch level L iei 47 Key follow Envelope time uuu ied A u ge nee eed 48 Fat 44 Formant we 45 Oanl h EY e a level 2 E E 45 DE sp tere ener an 43 Pan
315. o change a sounds brightness thickness and other qualities A wah effect can be applied by using the volume of the input sound to vary the center frequency Parameter Value Description COSM Type Filter Type LPF BPF HPF Type of filter NOTCH PEAK db Octave 24dB oct 12dB Amount of attenuation per Oct 6dB oct Octave Cutoff Freq 1 0 127 Cutoff frequency of the fil ter Freq KF 200 200 Key follow setting for filter cutoff frequency LFO Dp 3 63 63 Amount of LFO applied to filter cutoff frequency For details on envelope settings refer to Making Envelope Settings p 48 Resonance Reso 2 0 127 Resonance R LFO Depth 4 63 63 Amount of LFO applied to resonance Parameter Value Description COSM Type Filter Type LPF BPF HPF Type of filter NOTCH PEAK db Octave 24dB oct 12dB Amount of attenuation per oct 6dB oct octave Cutoff Freq 1 0 127 Cutoff frequency of the fil ter Freq KF 200 200 Key follow setting for filter cutoff frequency Dyn 63 63 Envelope depth for the in put sound LFO Dp 4 63 63 Amount of LFO applied to filter cutoff frequency For details on envelope settings refer to Making Envelope Settings p 48 For details on envelope settings refer to Making Envelope LFO 49 For details on LFO settings refer to Making LFO Settings p
316. o the rear panel INPUT jack and set GAIN switch to MIC Line Sample in stereo from a CD Connect your CD player to the rear panel INPUT jacks and set GAIN switch to LINE Optical Sample a digital signal Connect your audio device to the rear panel OPTICAL IN connector Resampl Play a sample on the V Synth and sample the result This is called resampling For details on resampling refer to p 60 Comp Use the compressor pre effect The sample will be re corded from the rear panel INPUT jacks Limiter Use the limiter pre effect The sample will be recorded from the rear panel INPUT jacks Noise Use the noise suppressor pre effect The sample will be Sup recorded from the rear panel INPUT jacks MIDI Start sampling when a sequencer start system realtime message FA is received The sample will be recorded from the rear panel INPUT jacks Factory Settings of Each Template Setup Mic Line Optical Resampl SamplingType 1 MIX 0 Stereo O Stereo 0 Stereo InputSource 0 Analog 0 Analog 1 Optical 3 Resam pling TriggerMode 0 Manual 2 Level 2 Level 3 Note TriggerLevel 12 dB 12 dB 24 dB 12 dB PreTrigger 0 Omsec 0 Omsec 0 Omsec 0 Omsec PreGain 0 OdB 0 OdB 0 OdB 0 OdB PreFxType 0 off 0 off 0 off 0 off PreFxCS Sus 0 0 0 0 PreFxCS Atk 0 0 0 0 Pr
317. off Panel Descriptions El KEYBOARD Here you can change the pitch range of the keyboard TRAN SPOSE Specifies transposing the keyboard in semitone steps p 22 Pressing this button while holding down OCT or OCT allows you to set the desired amount of transposition OCT OCT These buttons adjust the pitch of the keyboard in octave steps gt p 23 E PATCH PALETTE Here you can register and recall your favorite patches NUMBER 1 8 These buttons let you select register your favorite patches BANK You can change the Patch Palette bank by holding down this button and pressing NUMBER 1 8 PATCH ASSIGN You can register the currently selected patch as a favorite patch by holding down this button and pressing NUMBER 1 8 Display This displays information regarding the operation you are performing VALUE Dial This is used to modify values If you hold down SHIFT as you turn the VALUE dial the value will change in greater increments p 20 DEC INC This is used to modify values If you keep on holding down one button while pressing the other the value change accelerates If you press one of these buttons while holding down SHIFT the value will change in bigger increments p 20 a v 1 gt Cursor Buttons Moves the cursor locati
318. ollowing the current location it will be lost as far as the pasted portion extends Insert The copied data will be inserted at the current location HINT You can cut paste and insert between different samples After copying press EXIT to return to the SAMPLE Top screen Select a different sample access the SAMPLE Edit screen and then paste or insert Zero Insert This operation inserts silent space at the current location It can also be used to lengthen a sample to a precise number of measures and beats In the SAMPLE Edit Zero Insert window specify the length of the silent region that you want to insert This setting is made in terms of a number of samples Data in the V Synth is handled as 44 1 kHz data meaning that one second contains 44 100 data samples HINT For example if you wish to insert one second of silence you would specify 44100 and execute Zero Insert uote If the amount of remaining memory is small it may not be possible to execute Copy Paste Insert or Zero Insert In such cases delete unneeded samples from memory p 60 LR Mix The stereo sample will be mixed to L converting it into a monaural sample If this is set to monaural less wave memory will be used This will also decrease the number of voices Trim Trimming If the beginning and end of the sample are values other than zero noise will be heard when you play the sample Trim sets the values at the beginning and end of t
319. on up down left right gt p 20 MODE Opens the Mode Menu window SHIFT This button is used in conjunction with other buttons to execute various functions EXIT Return to the PLAY screen or close the currently open window In some screens this causes the currently executing function to be aborted IE STRUCTURE Here you can turn each sound producing element section on or off 1 2 3 Switches the structure type the way in which the sections are connected OSC1 OSC2 MOD COSM1 COSM2 TVA These buttons switch the corresponding section on off Only the buttons of the structure type selected by 1 2 or 3 are active 13 Panel Descriptions E EFFECTS Here you can switch the onboard effects multi effects chorus reverb on off When an effect is on the indicator for its button will light MFX Switches multi effects on and off CHORUS Switches chorus on and off REVERB Switches reverb on and off IE osc1 osc2 Here you can adjust the oscillator section These knobs are active if the oscillator is on indicator lit The result of adjusting these knob will depend on the oscillator type that is selected PITCH This modifies the pitch TIME PW TIME This modifies the time PW This modifies the pulse width FORMANTY FAT FORMANT This modifies the formant FAT Adjusts the fatness of the sound when using an analog oscillator
320. operation which puts you in direct and intuitive control of the sound a touch operated display the Time Trip pad twin D Beam controllers that detect not only up down but also left right movement and highly sensitive knobs Most of the sound generator parameters can be assigned to these controllers for direct control Powerful time control functions The VariPhrase sound generator of the V Synth provides a Time Trip function that can bring the waveform playback to a stop in real time and trace backward or forward from that point In addition VariPhrase waveforms LFO envelope arpeggiator and effects can all be made to operate in synchronization at the same tempo For example a waveform with movement such as a rhythm loop can easily be synthesized in units of individual notes Of course you can also synchronize to MIDI Clock messages from an external device The arpeggiator lets you program a pattern for each sound and also supports control changes New specially optimized preset sounds The new built in sounds created specifically for the V Synth give you a wide range of expression simply when played from the keyboard and are also optimized for performance from the Time Trip pad and D Beam controllers From the day you start playing the V Synth you can start taking advantage of the performance potential offered by its Time Trip pad and D Beam controllers E Use with other devices for even greater possibilities Open
321. ortamento sss nnns 23 Playing Arpeggios Arpeggiator sess eterne ettet nennen nenne 24 Holding AN Arpeggio iacente aa ugnu tta ee anie piede e igo a 24 Using an External MIDI Keyboard to Play Arpeggios a 24 Making Arpeeplal r Setlines uum S aun u asa ansa aaa 25 Creating an Original Arpeggio Pattern Pattern Edit aaa 25 Applying Various Effects to the Sound eterne nene 28 Applying an Effect by Touching Your Finger to the Pad Time Trip Pad 28 Applying an Effect by Passing Your Hand Over the D Beam D Beam Controller 29 Applying an Effect by Turning a Knob Assignable Controller a 30 Synchronizing Music and Video While You Play the V Synth V LINK sss 30 Enter V EINK Mode eer preter tone an 31 V LINK Functions that the V Synth Can Control and MIDI Messages 31 Creating a Patel uuu Ee bti Ebene RO ada 32 How t Mak the Patch Settings rare nier o dite reir dei reed ere e aea hart 32 Initializing Patch Settings PATCH Init u aa 33 Copying Patch Settings PATCH Copy uu am asya eren nens 33 Naming a Patch PATCH Name otn n ime de cd ie radon 34 Saving Patches PATCH Write conan aaron tecate iere dede pedes 34 Auditioning the Save Destination Patch Compare sese 35 Register
322. os You can also use the keyboard of an external MIDI instrument to play arpeggios 1 Use a MIDI cable to connect the V Synth s MIDI IN connector to the MIDI OUT connector of your external MIDI keyboard N Access the PATCH PLAY screen p 21 w Touch lt Y gt in the upper right of the screen A pulldown menu appears PATCH PLAY MadOrchestra Z 011 y CHPTXSEMZRXS 1 w 120 0 Trans c Zone Les J ll Mad0r DataTransfer Info v Beep PRTCH Name PATCH Write PATCH Init PATCH Copy PATCH Delete eos eoe TUR erect In the pulldown menu touch lt System gt m ie At the bottom of the screen touch lt Controller gt a In the left side of the screen touch the lt KBD gt tab The SYSTEM Ctrl KBD screen appears SYSTEM Ctrl KBD Y KBD Sens LIGHT eel HEAVY KBD Velocity After Sens Ame me 100 Local Sw Remote KBD Sw ON OFF Nu mm ES Init Write 7 Inthe Remote KBD Sw field touch the on off switch to turn it ON 8 Play your external MIDI keyboard Playing in Patch Mode Making Arpeggiator Settings 1 Access the PATCH PLAY screen p 21 2 At the bottom of the screen touch lt Common gt 3 In the left side of the screen touch the Arpeggio gt tab The PATCH Edit Com Arpeggio screen appears PATCH Edit Com Arpeggio jE eis ESAR bd Arpeggio Patch Tempo Octave Range P
323. ou play Value 200 200 Fat LFO Depth x Specifies how deeply the LFO will affect fat Value 63 63 SN In this screen you can make settings for the envelope that affects the fat For details on envelope settings refer to Making Envelope Settings p 48 Time PCM PATCH Edit OSC1 Time INIT PATCH 2 01 v SJ pen osc Type Time Time KF Time offset Time LFO Dp Velocity Env Env Curve Sent A Sens D Sens R Sem Depth Time KF Pitch ADSR Attack Decay Sustain Release ENVELOPE rS 27 common o 0502 m ET cosm2 TUR eee Time x This sets the range of change in playback speed time Value 63 63 How the Time parameter is related to playback speed Time 40 20 0 20 40 FWD Reverse Stop Normal 2xspeed 4x speed playback speed ZERO 2x speed Reverse Stop Normal 2x speed playback speed BWD 4x speed 2x speed Reverse Stop Normal playback speed Time KF Time Key Follow Specifies the amount by which the time value will be affected by the key you play Value 200 200 Time Offset Specifies the basic speed for a time value of 0 Value BWD Specifies a backward direction ZERO Specifies a pause FWD Specifies a forward direction Time LFO Depth x Specifies how deeply the LFO will affect time Value 63 63 D In this screen you can make settings for the envelope that af
324. ouch Screen Perform this adjustment if the touch panel no longer responds as you expect 1 In the CALIBRATION MENU screen touch TOUCH SCREEN gt The T SCREEN CALIBRATION screen appears T SCREEN CALIBRATION Touch the center of symbol indicated by the square symbol in the screen in the following order left gt top gt right gt bottom When you have touched all four points the screen will close and the sensitivity of the touch screen will be calibrated EE Other Functions 99 Other Functions Adjusting the Sensitivity of the Time Trip Pad Perform this adjustment if the Time Trip pad no longer responds as you expect 1 Inthe CALIBRATION MENU screen touch TIME TRIP PAD gt The TT PAD CALIBRATION screen appears TT PAD CALIBRATION PAD CALIBRATION 2 On the Time Trip pad touch the points indicated by the square symbol in the screen in the following order left gt top right bottom When you have touched all four points the screen will close and the sensitivity of the Time Trip pad will be calibrated 100 Adjusting the Sensitivity of the D Beam Controller Perform this adjustment if the D Beam controller is functioning incorrectly such as responding even though you have not operated it 1 In the CALIBRATION MENU screen touch lt D BEAM gt The D Beam CALIBRATION screen appears D BEAM CALIBRATION
325. p 29 Indicators L R If the D Beam controller is on these will light when you move your hand over the controller ON OFF TIME TRIP TIME PITCH ASSIGNABLE Switches the D Beam controller on off The effect to be controlled can be selected by pressing the relevant button TIME TRIP Apply the Time Trip effect TIME Apply the Time Control effect PITCH Apply the Pitch Control effect ASSIGNABLE Apply the effect that is specified for each sound TIME TRIP PAD By touching the pad surface with your finger you can apply a variety of effects to the sound Indicator This will light when you touch the Time Trip Pad TIME TRIP Switches to the Time Trip effect ASSIGNABLE Switches to the effect that is specified for each patch HOLD Switches hold on off for the effect controlled by the Time Trip pad EJ v unk Enables or disables control of an externally connected V LINK device g ASSIGN ABLE CONTROL You can assign a variety of parameters and functions to the two knobs C1 C2 and use them to modify the sound in realtime gt p 30 ARPEGGIO Here you can control the arpeggiator TEMPO Adjusts the tempo of the arpeggios ON OFF Switches the Arpeggiator on off HOLD Switches the Arpeggiator hold on
326. p End to the end of the sample If you set Loop Start and Loop End to locations within the sample the sample will play back from the beginning and then the region between Loop Start and Loop End will play back repeatedly Wave Loop Loop Wave Start Start End End gt oa Mee y MEMO The data in the V Synth is handled as 44 1 kHz data which means there are 44 100 data samples per second The shortest possible loop that can be set is 16 data samples note Loop range settings are ignored when the Playback Mode p 43 is set to STEP or EVENT Creating and Editing Samples Sample Mode Original Tempo Setting The Original Tempo is the reference tempo of the sample used when synchronizing it to the master tempo Example A sample whose original tempo is 100 If the master tempo is set to 200 and the sample is synchronized the sample will play back at double the speed at which it was recorded If you set the master tempo to 50 and synchronize the sample it will play back at half the speed at which it was Sign 4 ie 4 cal Meas ej Beat e J5 120 0 gt The exact original tempo can be calculated from the time signature number of measures and number of beats for the sample length between Loop Start and Loop End This means that you must first specify the loop region and then set the original tempo von If you wish to play back a loop while simultaneously synchronizing
327. parameter to a positive value If you want it to be slowed down set this to a negative value Value 63 63 Mono Poly Specifies whether the patch will play monophonically or polyphonically The monophonic setting is effective when playing a solo instrument patch such as sax or flute Value ET Only the last played note will sound e Two or more notes can be played simultaneously Legato Legato Switch Legato is valid when the Mono Poly parameter is set to monophonic This setting specifies whether the Legato function will be used ON or not OFF Value OFF ON HINT With the Legato Switch parameter ON pressing a key while continuing to press a previous key causes the note to change pitch to the pitch of the most recently pressed key sounding all the while This creates a smooth transition between notes which is effective when you wish to simulate the hammering on and pulling off techniques used by a guitarist D Beam Bender PATCH Edit Com DBeam Bend OSE tele v Octave Shift AES 91 gt gt gt Bender common uu E MOD eos eoe TVA erect Octave Shift Adjusts the pitch of the patch s sound up or down in units of an octave 3 octaves Value 3 3 D Beam D Beam Type Specifies the effect that will be controlled by the D Beam controller Value OFF The D Beam controller will not be used Time Trip The D Beam controller will control
328. patch as part of the patch settings This means that you can create a patch designed specifically for that arpeggio pattern or vice versa About the Pattern Edit Window 1 Access the PATCH Edit Com Arpeggio screen p 25 2 Touch lt Pattern Edit gt The Pattern Edit window will appear Pattern input area PATCH Edit Com Arpeggio E E estra rece Pattern Edit State Note CC 2 gt 16 lla HIHHTAHHHEHHIEH UIUTUTUTUYUTUTUTUTUTUTUTUTUTUT Value ww 32 64 E 127 Te Controller Controller s ria EMEN Point Ctrl 1 oe EE ctrl 2 Cursor State Specifies the status of each line NOTE Note pitch CTRL Control change Note CC Note Control Change Specifies the note number or control change number assigned to each line If Status is NOTE this will be a note number C 1 G9 If Status is CTRL this will be a control change number 0 127 Pattern Input Area This area is where you input or edit notes or control changes The symbols have the following meaning O Note Tie O Control change Value Shows the velocity of the note or the value of the control change selected in the pattern input area 25 Patch Mode ing in WWE Pla y Playing in Patch Mode O 32 64 96 127 Tie Cir When inputting notes When you touch one of these buttons a note with the velocity shown on that button will be input at the cursor location within the patt
329. r monophonic wind instruments such as sax trumpet or flute If you encode the sample using this type you will be able to control the formant p 45 and use the robot voice function p 43 Even if you encode using SOLO you can still play the sample polyphonically BACKING This is suitable for decay type instruments It is particularly suitable for phrases that include instruments with a clear attack such as drums percussion and guitar chords EN SEMBLE This is suitable for sustain type instruments It is particularly suitable when there are smooth changes in tone such as choir or strings Li If the data is encoded using BACKING or ENSEMBLE it will not be possible to use the formant control or robot voice functions Oncea sample has been encoded editing that sample except for some operations will cause the encoded data to be discarded If you then access the SAMPLE Encode screen in this state LITE will always be selected as the encoding type Select the appropriate encoding type and then re encode the sample Depending on the sample encoding with SOLO may cause the sound to be different than you expect such as changes in pitch being incorrect by one octave If this occurs re encode the sample using BACKING or ENSEMBLE If a sample that contains large amounts of reverb or delay is encoded using SOLO it may not sound as you expect If this occurs re encode the sample using BACKI
330. ral Delay Time 0 1300 ms note Adjusts the delay time from the direct sound until the delay sound is heard Delay Feedback 98 98 Adjusts the proportion of the de 2 lay sound that is fed back into the effect Negative settings will invert the phase Low Damp Freq 50 4000 Hz Adjusts the frequency below which sound fed back to the ef fect will be cut The Low Damp function damps the low frequency band of the delay sound quicker than other bands which makes for a clearer delay effect Low Damp 36 0 dB Degree of Low Damp Gain Hi Damp Freq 2000 20000 Hz Adjusts the frequency above which sound fed back to the ef fect will be cut High Damp by attenuating the higher frequencies first makes the delay sound more natural Hi Damp Gain 36 0 dB Degree of High Damp Delay Level 0 127 Volume of the delay sound Ps Low Freq 50 4000 Hz Frequency of the low range Ps Low Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the low range Ps Hi Freq 2000 20000 Hz Frequency of the high range Ps Hi Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the high range Hi Damp Gain 36 0 dB Degree of High Damp 30 Cho Fig Delay Chorus Flanger Delay This effect connects either Chorus or Flanger and Delay in series Delay Level 0 127 Volume of the delay sound Ps Low Freq 50 4000 Hz Frequency of the low range Ps Low Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the low range Ps Hi Freq 2000 20000 Hz Frequency o
331. ral Information 02H Sub ID 2 Identity Reply 41H D number Roland 53H 01H Device family code 00H 00H Device family number code 00H 01H 00H 00H Software revision level F7H EOX End of Exclusive 158 Data Transmission ODataSeti DT1 12H Status Data byte Status FOH 41H dev 00H 53H 12H aaH bbH FH ccH ddH eeH ffH sum Byte Explanation FOH Exclusive status 41H ID number Roland dev Device ID dev 00H 1FH 7FH 00H Model ID 1 V Synth 53H Model ID 2 V Synth 12H Command ID DT1 aaH Address MSB upper byte of the starting address of the data to be sent bbH Address upper middle byte of the starting address of the data to be sent ccH Address lower middle byte of the starting address of the data to be sent ddH Address LSB lower byte of the starting address of the data to be sent eeH Data the actual data to be sent Multiple bytes of data are transmitted in order starting from the address ffH Data sum Checksum F7H EOX End Of Exclusive Theamount of data that can be transmitted at one time depends on the type of data and data will be transmitted from the specified starting address and size Refer to the address and size given in Parameter Address Map p 159 Data larger than 256 bytes will be divided into packets of 256 bytes or less and each packet will be sent at an interval of about 20 ms MIDI Implementation
332. rb Master Level Adjusts the volume of the sound that has passed through reverb Value 0 127 MFX PATCH Edit Effect MFX INIT PATCH 2 011 v Multi Effects MX Parametric EG 66 4 Band EQ MFX CHO TOTAL Gain dB REV e LOW MDI MID 2 HIGH List AY y CY Fe AREE SERES Es Ha 200 EI zoea 8000 EE cain O amp O 6 m dB E of 0 7 e 0 7 a m 0sc1 D MoD som eme TUR Effect MFX Type Use this parameter to select from among the 41 available MFX For details on MFX parameters refer to MFX Parameters p 116 Value 00 Thru 41 In this setting screen you can edit the parameters of the MEX that is selected by the MFX Type setting For details on the parameters that can be edited refer to MFX Parameters p 116 When you touch lt List gt the MFX List window will appear allowing you to select the MFX from the list CHO PATCH Edit Effect Chorus NIT gsr v Routing Ch gt Ti arus y MFX MEN chorus 1 w CHO Chorus _ Flanger Rate Depth Feedback eye s s 0 30 10 E Hz ta Pre corres Lowrreq High Freq Diy Time LEF HPF _ THRU THRU 2 0 THRU THRU ON Ems mm 0sC1 D MOD E eon TUR Effect CHO Type Chorus Type Use this parameter to select from among the 8 available chorus For details on chorus parameters refer to Chorus Parameters
333. recorded as is 1 Specify the Grid and End Point of the arpeggio pattern that you will be creating Move the cursor to each value box and set the value 2 Touch lt Real Rec gt The V Synth will be in realtime input standby mode and the metronome will sound a guide rhythm Value Controller Grid End Point Ctrl 1 EE sz ctrl 2 EN KE 3 3 If you want to adjust the tempo turn ARPEGGIO TEMPO Turn the knob toward the right to make the tempo faster or toward the left to make it slower 4 In time with the guide rhythm sounded by the metronome play the V Synth s keyboard and operate the controllers You can repeatedly record over the pattern length number of steps you specified in step 1 On each pass you can add new notes and control changes to build up the pattern von The notes specified pitches and control changes in a single pattern cannot exceed a total of 16 All further seventeenth and later notes having a new pitch or control changes will not be recorded 5 When you are finished with realtime input touch lt Stop gt The metronome guide will stop sounding 6 Press ARPEGGIO ON OFF to turn on the arpeggiator and play the keyboard to hear your realtime recorded pattern Creating a Pattern by Inputting One Step ata Time Step Rec This method lets you create a pattern in a way similar to step Playing in Patch Mode Erasing a
334. recording the sound of the speaker Increasing this value will pro duce the effect of the mic being further away from the center of the speaker cone Mic Level 0 127 Volume of the microphone Direct Level 0 127 Volume of the direct sound Level 0 127 Output Level JC 120 The sound of a Roland JC 120 CLEAN TWIN The sound of a standard built in type vacuum tube amp MATCH DRIVE The sound of a recent vacuum tube amp widely used in blues rock and fusion BG LEAD The sound of a vacuum tube amp repre sentative of the late 70 s and the 80 s MS1959 I The sound of the large vacuum tube amp stack that was indispensable to the British hard rock of the 70 s with input I connected MS1959 II The same amp as MS1959 I but with in put II connected MS1959 I II The same amp as MS1959 I but with inputs I and II connected in parallel SLDN LEAD The sound of a vacuum tube amp us able in a wide variety of styles METAL 5150 The sound of a large vacuum tube amp suitable for heavy metal METAL LEAD A metal lead sound with a distinc tive mid range OD 1 The sound of the BOSS OD 1 compact effects processor OD 2 TURBO The sound of the BOSS OD 2 com pact effects processor with the Turbo switch on DISTORTION Distortion sound FUZZ Fuzz sound Specifications of each Speaker Type The speaker column indicates the diameter of each speaker unit in inches and the number of units
335. reen will close von If you press EXIT without performing the Eject operation on your computer a WARNING window like the following will appear DISCONNECT USB Disconnection Will Be Done Before EJectins Rre You Sure CANCEL Touch lt EXECUTE gt to close this window only if you are unable to EXECUTE perform the Eject operation on your computer Canceling the USB Connection Once you have connected the V Synth and your computer in Storage mode you must cancel the USB connection on your computer before you do either of the following actions Disconnect the USB cable Turn off the V Synth s power while the USB cable is connected 1 Selectthe V Synth drive icon on your desktop and either choose Eject from the Special menu or drag the icon into the trash The V Synth drive icon will disappear from the desktop and the USB connection will be cancelled Examples of Using Storage Mode Backing Up Patch and Wave Data Project from the V Synth When using USB in Storage mode the data within the V Synth may be damaged if you operate your computer incorrectly or if your computer crashes As a precaution against such occurrences we recommend that you create a backup as described below Backing Up the V Synth s Internal Data onto Your Computer 1 Use a USB cable to connect the V Synth to your computer as described in Connecting the V Syn
336. reo MONORAL MIX Mix the signals input to L and R and sample in monaural MONORAL L Sample the L input signal in monaural MONORAL R Sample the R input signal in monaural Creating and Editing Samples Sample Mode Input Source Select the input from which the sound will be sampled Value ANALOG INPUT jacks OPTICAL OPTICAL IN connector COAXIAL COAXIAL IN connector RESAMPL Select this when you wish to resample The sound that is output to MAIN OUT L MONO and R will be sampled Trigger Mode Specifies how sampling will be started Value MANUAL Sampling will begin when you touch lt START gt MIDI Sampling will begin when an external sequencer start message system realtime message FA is received LEVEL Sampling will start when the input signal exceeds the level specified by the Trigger Level setting NOTE Sampling will begin when you play the keyboard or note message is received Trigger Level Specifies the input level at which sampling will begin when the Trigger Mode is set to LEVEL The trigger level is shown by the H and 4 in the level meter located at the right of the screen Value 2 00 dB yon If Trigger Mode is set to other than LEVEL this parameter has no effect Pre Trigger After the selected trigger to start sampling has been received previously received data for the length of time specified here will be included in the sampled data When the Trigger Mode is set to
337. rfere with its proper ventilation Before cleaning the unit turn off the power and unplug Use with other stands is capable of resulting in instability the power cord from the outlet Quick Start p 31 This unit for use only with Roland keyboard stand KS 12 causing possible injury Whenever you suspect the possibility of lightning in your e Always grasp only the plug on the power supply cord when plugging into or unplugging from an outlet or this 9 und NRE AAPP area pull the plug on the power cord out of the outlet Should you remove screws make sure to put them in a safe place out of children s reach so there is no chance of them being swallowed accidentally IMPORTANT NOTES In addition to the items listed under IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS and USING THE UNIT SAFELY on pages 2 4 please read and observe the following Power Supply Noise may be produced if wireless communications devices such as cell phones are operated in the vicinity of this unit Such noise could occur when receiving or initiating a call or while conversing Should you experience such problems you should relocate such wireless devices so they are at a greater distance from this unit or switch them off Do not use this unit on the same power circuit with any device that will generate line noise such as an electric motor or variable lighting system Before connecting this unit to other devices turn off
338. right Zoom This expands or shrinks the displayed sample In any screen that displays the sample you can touch the following buttons to expand or shrink the displayed sample Shrink vertically Expand vertically Shrink horizontally Expand horizontally W Zoom bar pope Zoom bar oe Actual length of wave The vertical zoom bar indicates the magnification of the sample in the vertical direction The horizontal zoom bar indicates the magnification of the sample in the horizontal direction and shows the current location As the display is magnified the zoom bar will become narrower Editing the Specified Region of the Sample You can specify a region of the sample and edit the region by cutting or copying Basic Operation 1 Access the SAMPLE Edit screen p 64 2 Specify the region that you want to edit Edit Start Edit End or the Current location p 65 3 Touch V in the upper right of the screen A pulldown menu appears Cut Truncate Copy Clear BHD pu 2 Start Dua Sala Sign 4 Qr End 90002751 Meas a Trim current 29000000 e 126 8 gt Normalize Adjust Adjust f zerox f zerox f zoom f zi A SHEE 4 In the pulldown menu touch the editing function that you want to execute Zero Insert egion A window appears asking you to confirm the operation SAMPLE Edit Cut
339. ription COSM Type HPF 0 127 Cutoff frequency of the high pass filter LPF 0 127 Cutoff frequency of the low pass filter LPF KF 200 200 Key follow setting for cut off frequency of low pass filter Sub 100 100 Sub detune Octave 2 1 0 Octave setting Width Width 1 0 127 Bandwidth Width KF 200 200 Key follow setting for bandwidth Dyn Env 63 63 Envelope depth for the in put sound Width LFO Depth 63 63 Amount of LFO applied to 3 bandwidth For details on envelope settings refer to Making Envelope Settings p 48 Detune Detune 2 0 127 Detune Dyn Env 63 63 Envelope depth for the in put sound Detune LFO 63 63 Amount of LFO applied to Depth 4 detune For details on envelope settings refer to Making Envelope Settings p 48 LFO For details on LFO settings refer to Making LFO Settings p 49 Parameter Value Description COSM Type Filter Type BANJO AC GTR Type of filter guitar RE GTR Size Size 1 0 127 Body size Size KF 200 200 Key follow setting for gui tar body Size LFO Depth 3 63 63 Amount of LFO applied to guitar body For details on envelope settings refer to Making Envelope Settings p 48 Balance Balance 2 0 127 Volume balance between the direct sound and the ef fect sound Balance LFO 63 63 Amount of LFO applied to Depth 4 the volume balance
340. rt up your computer 3 Connect the V Synth and your computer using a USB cable USB port Computer j USB cable E V Synth 4 Turn on the power of V Synth 5 If you are using a PC card insert that PC card into the PC CARD slot 6 Press MODE to access the V SYNTH MODE MENU window 7 Touch lt USB gt The USB Storage screen appears USB Storage Access yore If the USB Mode p 76 is set to MIDI you will be unable to select lt USB gt in the V SYNTH MODE MENU window Set the USB Mode to Storage 8 Touch lt Internal gt or PC Card to establish the connection with your computer lt Internal gt Mounts the internal memory as an external drive on your computer lt PC Card gt Mounts the PC card as an external drive on your computer nore You cannot select PC Card unless a PC card is inserted in the PC CARD slot 9 When the USB connection is established a new drive icon will appear on your desktop If you have selected Internal a drive icon named V SYNTH will appear If you selected PC Card it will show the volume label that you assigned when formatting the card If you formatted the card on the V Synth the volume label will be PC CARD 10 O
341. rve Envelope Velocity Curve 0 7 Velocity Sens Envelope Velocity Sensitivity 63 63 Velocity A Sens Envelope Attack Time Velocity Sensitivity 63 63 Velocity D Sens Envelope Decay Time Velocity Sensitivity 63 63 Velocity R Sens Envelope Release Time Velocity Sensitivity 63 63 ADSR Attack Envelope Attack Time 0 127 note ADSR Decay Envelope Decay Time 0 127 note ADSR Sustain Envelope Sustain Level 0 127 ADSR Release Envelope Release Time 0 127 note Env Depth Envelope Depth 63 63 Env Time KF Envelope Time Key Follow 200 200 Pulse Width ANALOG Pulse Width 63 63 PW KF Pulse Width Key Follow 200 200 PW LFO Depth Pulse Width LFO Depth 63 63 Velocity Curve Envelope Velocity Curve 0 7 Velocity Sens Envelope Velocity Sensitivity 63 63 Velocity A Sens Envelope Attack Time Velocity Sensitivity 63 63 Velocity D Sens Envelope Decay Time Velocity Sensitivity 63 63 Velocity R Sens Envelope Release Time Velocity Sensitivity 63 63 ADSR Attack Envelope Attack Time 0 127 ADSR Decay Envelope Decay Time 0 127 ADSR Sustain Envelope Sustain Level 0 127 ADSR Release Envelope Release Time 0 127 Env Depth Envelope Depth 63 63 Env Time KF Envelope Time Key Follow 200 200 103 MEN Appendices Parameter List Parameter Value Fat ANALOG Fat 0 127 Fat KF Fat Key Follow 200
342. rview of the V Synth USB Mode USB Storage In this mode you can connect the V Synth to your computer and exchange patch or wave data Calibration Mode CALIBRATION MENU TOUCH TIME TRIP PANEL PAD Coli e In this mode you can adjust the response of the touch screen and D Beam controller Factory Reset Mode Factory Reset Cancel Execute In this mode you can reset to default factory settings Demo Play Mode DEMO Play PLAY ALL SONGS OMNIA MUTANTUR 03 Patch Preview 2 In this mode you can play the built in demo songs Demo Song New Toys Amin Bhatia O 2002 Roland Corporation Basic Touch Screen Operation The V Synth features a touch screen The touch screen lets you perform a variety of operations by lightly touching the screen nhs The touch screen responds to a light touch Pressing the touch screen with too much force or with a hard object may damage it Be careful not to apply excessive force and touch it only with your finger Enabling Disabling the Beep Tone You can specify whether or not a beep tone will be heard when you touch a valid point on the touch screen MEMO At the factory setting the beep tone will be sounded 1 In the upper right of the screen touch lt W gt A pulldown menu appears DataTransfer PRTCH Name 881 PATCH Write PATCH Init COSM2 FS PATCH Copy PATCH Delete 2 In the pulldown menu tou
343. s RPN Data entry MSB LSB MSB LSB Notes 00H 00H mmH IH Pitch Bend Sensitivity mm 00H 18H 0 24 semitones ll ignored processed as 00H Up to 2 octave can be specified in semitone steps 00H 01H mmH IH Channel Fine Tuning mm Il 20 00H 40 00H 60 00H 4096 x 100 8192 0 4096 x 100 8192 cent 00H 02H mmH IH Channel Coarse Tuning mm 10H 40H 70H 48 0 48 semitones ll ignored processed as 00H 7FH 7FH pes RPN null RPN and NRPN will be set as unspecified Once this setting has been made subsequent Data Entry messages will be ignored It is not necessary to transmit Data Entry for RPN Null settings Parameter values that were previously set will not change mm Il ignored Ge Program Change Status 2nd byte CnH ppH n MIDI channel number 0H FH ch 1 16 pp Program number 00H 7FH prog 1 prog 128 Not received when the Receive Program Change parameter SYSTEM Com MIDI USB is OFF Ge Channel Pressure Status 2nd byte DnH vvH n MIDI channel number 0H FH ch 1 16 vv Channel Pressure 00H 7FH 0 127 Pitch Bend Change Status 2nd byte 3rd byte EnH 1H mmH n MIDI channel number 0H FH ch 1 16 mm ll Pitch Bend value 00 00H 40 00H 7F 7FH 8192 0 8191 154 HChannel Mode Messages Notreceived in when the Receive Switch parameter SYSTEM Com Part MIDI is OFF AII Sounds Off Controller number 120 Statu
344. s your aims CHORUS Applies a chorus effect to give the sound depth and spaciousness REVERB Applies a reverb effect to add ambience to the sound Controller Section The controller section consists of the keyboard pitch bend modulation lever time trip pad D Beam controller C1 C2 knobs arpeggiator and pedals connected to the rear panel When you manipulate these controllers they send performance data to the sound generator section causing the V Synth to create sound Polyphony The maximum polyphony of the V Synth depends on the OSC and COSM types used by the patch MEMO Changing the effect type or switching effects on off does not affect the available polyphony About Multitimbral Performance The V Synth allows up to 16 part multitimbral operation and can be played multitimbrally by performance data sent from an external device You can use the V Synth to play the sounds of a song you created on your sequencer or as part of an ensemble From the keyboard you can play only the patch that is assigned to part 1 The PATCH Information window shows you the patch that is assigned to each part p 98 A sound module that allows you to control multiple sounds independently in this way is called a multitimbral sound module Overview of the V Synth Memory Memory Structure V Synth Internal Memory Project Patch 512 Wave Preset Memory Project Patch 512
345. s 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 78H 00H n MIDI channel number 0H FH ch 1 16 When this message is received all notes currently sounding on the corresponding channel will be turned off OG Reset All Controllers Controller number 121 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 79H 00H n MIDI channel number 0H FH ch 1 16 When this message is received the following controllers will be set to their reset values Controller Reset value Pitch Bend Change 0 center Polyphonic Key Pressure 0 off Channel Pressure 0 off Modulation 0 off Breath Type MSB 0 min Breath Type LSB 0 min Expression 127 max However the controller will be at minimum Hold 1 0 off Sostenuto 0 off Soft 0 off Hold 2 0 off General Purpose Controller 1 MSB 0 min General Purpose Controller 2 MSB 0 min General Purpose Controller 3 MSB 0 min General Purpose Controller 4 MSB 0 min General Purpose Controller 1 LSB 0 min General Purpose Controller 2 LSB 0 min General Purpose Controller 3 LSB 0 min General Purpose Controller 4 LSB 0 min General Purpose Controller 5 0 min General Purpose Controller 6 0 min General Purpose Controller 7 0 min General Purpose Controller 8 0 min RPN unset previously set data will not change AII Notes Off Controller number 123 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 7BH 00H n MIDI channel number 0H FH ch 1 16 When AII Notes Off is received all notes on the corresponding channel wil
346. s called bulk dump Use this operation when you want to connect another V Synth and play it using the same settings or to save your data on an external MIDI device as a precaution against possible loss of sound data or system settings To transmit data to an external MIDI device connect the external MIDI device and V Synth as shown in the diagram MIDI IN e 9999090000 0 O 000000000 D MIDI OUT AV wass re aS N 5 amp GXGOGOC jololola V Synth 1 Touch V5 in the upper right of the screen A pulldown menu appears MadOrchestra 2 91 Zone DataTransfer Info PITCH TIME FORMT 9 9 V Beep LFO1 LFO2 LFOS PRTCH Name PRTCH Write PRTCH Init PRTCH Copy PRTCH Delete HINT To halt during transmission touch lt ABORT gt In the pulldown menu touch Data Transfer gt The Data Transfer window appears PRTCH PLRY MadOrchestra Z 011 v Data Transfer Source E W FROM To E WORK MEM siz A TEMP cancer Execute In Source select the type of data that you want to transmit lt ALL gt Patch setup system lt SETUP gt Setup lt SYSTEM gt System lt PATCH gt Patch If you selected PATCH specify the patch that is to be sent lt WORK gt Tra
347. s on envelope settings refer to Making Envelope Settings p 48 43 OSFHDHIIE Creating a Patch Creating a Patch Pulse Width ANALOG PATCH Edit OSC1 Pulse Width INIT PATCH see gt Z Env Env Depth Time KF Curve Sens A Sens D Sens R Senz Fat T gt o p p gt 254 E s I eoe 0 se o o EA ADSR Attack Decay Sustain Release ENVELOPE RG i7 common ose osc2 m T E TUR eee Pulse Width x Specifies the amount by which the wave shape will be modified Value 63 63 PW KF Pulse Width Key Follow Specifies the amount by which the pulse width value will be affected by the key you play Value 200 200 PW LFO Depth Pulse Width LFO Depth x Specifies how deeply the LFO will affect pulse width Value 63 63 E In this screen you can make settings for the envelope that affects the pulse width For details on envelope settings refer to Making Envelope Settings p 48 Fat ANALOG PATCH Edit OSC1 Fat INIT PATCH Z 011 v nu Env Curve Sens A Sens D Sens R Sens Pth Time KF E oO 9 ww ENVELOPE ADSR Attack Decay Sustain Release O ELE common oso 0502 moD co E TUR eee Fat x Emphasizes the low frequency region of the sound Value 0 127 Fat KF Fat Key Follow Specifies the amount by which the fat value will be affected by the key y
348. s that the V Synth Can Control and MIDI Messages You can assign the following functions to the V Synth s controllers to control a V LINK compatible video device V LINK function Transmitted MIDI message Playback Speed CC 10 Panpot Dissolve Time amount time the CC 5 Portamento Time video clips overlap Audio Volume of audio play CC 7 Volume back Color Cb color difference sig CC 72 Release nal Color Cr color difference signal CC 71 Resonance Brightness CC 74 Cutoff VEX1 Visual Effects 1 CC 1 Modulation VFX2 Visual Effects 2 CC 91 Reverb VFX3 Visual Effects 3 CC 94 Celeste VFX4 Visual Effects 4 CC 95 Phaser Output Fade CC 73 Attack T Bar CC 11 Expression Dual Stream CC 64 Hold 1 Time Trip CC 92 Tremolo CC 93 Chorus Palette1 8 Selecting a palette CC 0 Bank Select 00H 07H Clip1 8 Selecting a video clip Program Change 00H 07H 31 Patch Mode ing in www Play Creating a Patch With the V Synth you have total control over a wide variety of settings Each item that can be set is known as a parameter When you change the values of parameters you are doing what is referred to as Editing This chapter explains the procedures used in creating patches and the functions of the patch parameters How to Make the Patch Settings Start with an existing patch and edit it to cre
349. s the grade of the effect THRU the low pass filter THRU no sound filter is used The higher the value is set the Mod XoverHPF THRU 50 800 Adjusts the cutoff frequency of more natural sounding can be Hz the high pass filter THRU no obtained however this increas filter is used es the delay from the source Mod Level 0 127 Volume of the chorus or flanger sound as well 135 MEE Appendices 38 Phonograph This effect reproduces the sound of an analog record played ona record player This includes the various noises with the characteristic of records and the uneven rotation of older turntables Kw A O Phonograph O Parameter Value Description PS Coarse 12 12 semi Specifies the pitch shift amount Parameter Value Description tone in semitone steps Input Mode MONO STE Use this setting to select either a PS Fine 100 100 cent Adjusts the pitch shift amountin REO stereo or monaural record play 2 cent steps 1 cent 1 100 of a er for the effect semitone Signal Dist 0 127 Degree of distortion PS Balance DRY100 0WET Volume balance between the di Frequency 0 127 Sets the frequency response of DRYO0 100WET rect sound DRY and the effect Range the record player sound WET Lowering the value degrades Phaser Manual 0 127 Specifies the center freque
350. s to adjust the level 10 Touch lt START gt to start sampling The way in which sampling will start depends on the Trigger Mode setting in the SAMPLING General screen as follows If MANUAL is selected sampling will start after a count of the number of measures specified by the metronome Count In setting If MIDI is selected sampling will wait for the sequencer to start system realtime message FA Sampling will begin when the sequencer start message is received If LEVEL is selected sampling will wait for an input signal Sampling will begin when the input signal exceeds the level specified by Trigger Level p 61 If NOTE is selected Sampling will begin when you play the keyboard or note message is received HINT If you have selected MIDI or LEVEL you can touch lt START gt once again to begin sampling without waiting for the sequencer to start or the input signal to be received MEMO In the SAMPLING window Remain Time indicates the remaining time in seconds available for sampling note If memory becomes full sampling will be halted If this occurs delete unneeded samples from memory p 60 11 When you are finished sampling touch lt STOP gt The display will indicate COMPLETED Touch lt PREVIEW gt to hear the sound that you sampled and check whether the sample was recorded as you wish 12 Operations from this point will depend on what you want to do lt Ca
351. sample will be reversed between Edit Start and Edit End If you want the sample to play backwards execute Reverse to reverse the sample from the beginning Region The region of the sample between Edit Start and Edit End can be stored in internal memory as a separate sample The original sample will remain unchanged Perform the following procedure 1 Select the region that you want to extract as a separate sample and execute Region 2 In the SAMPLE Edit Region window select the sample number to which you want to paste the extracted region of the sample and touch lt OK gt 3 Assign a name to the new sample and touch lt OK gt MEMO Tf in step 2 you select a sample number that already has a sample the sample data between Edit Start and Edit End will be added to the end of the selected sample Loop Region Settings When the loop switch p 65 is ON you can specify the region that will be played back as a loop The region of the sample between Loop Start and Loop End will be played back repeatedly In the SAMPLE Loop FWD screen that appears when you touch lt Loop FWD gt specify the loop region for forward playback In the SAMPLE Loop BWD screen that appears when you touch lt Loop BWD gt specify the loop region for backward playback SAMPLE Loop FWD hd 2 Beat Immediately after sampling or loading a sample Loop Start will be set to the beginning of the sample and Loo
352. se with a cart stand tripod bracket 7 Do not block any of the ventilation openings Install in or table except as specified by the accordance with the manufacturers instructions manufacturer or sold with the apparatus 8 Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators When a cart is used use caution when heat registers stoves or other apparatus including moving the cart apparatus combination to amplifiers that produce heat avoid injury from tip over 9 Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or 13 Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when grounding type plug A polarized plug has two blades with unused for long periods of time one wider than the other A grounding type plug has two 14 Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel Servicing blades and a third grounding prong The wide blade or the is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any third prong are provided for your safety When the provided way such as power supply cord or plug is damaged liquid plug does not fit into your outlet consult an electrician for has been spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus replacement of the obsolete outlet the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture does not operate normally or has been dropped For the U K WARNING THIS APPARATUS MUST BE EARTHED IMPORTANT THE WIRES IN THIS MAINS LEAD ARE COLOURED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE FOLLOWING CODE GREEN AND YELLOW EARTH B
353. sential for the safe operation of the unit Protect the unit from strong impact Do not drop it Do not force the unit s power supply cord to share an outlet with an unreasonable number of other devices Be especially careful when using extension cords the total power used by all devices you have connected to the extension cord s outlet must never exceed the power rating watts amperes for the extension cord Excessive loads can cause the insulation on the cord to heat up and eventually melt through w USING THE UNIT SAFELY Z WARNING N CAUTION Try to prevent cords and cables from becoming entangled Also all cords and cables should be placed so they are out AN of the reach of children Before using the unit in a foreign country consult with your retailer the nearest Roland Service Center or an authorized Roland distributor as listed on the Infor mation page gt DO NOT play a CD ROM disc on a conventional audio CD player The resulting sound may be of a level that could cause permanent hearing loss Damage to speakers or other system components may result Never handle the power cord or its plugs with wet hands j when plugging into or unplugging from an outlet or this Y N CAUTION unn Before moving the unit disconnect the power plug from the outlet and pull out all cords from external devices The unit should be located so that its location or position does not inte
354. so set the panning and level of each delay sound 13 Reverse Delay Adds the reverse of the input sound as the delay sound Reverse x lt Parameter Value Description Threshold 0 127 pecify the input level at which the delay will begin to apply Parameter Value Description Rvs Dly Time 0 650 ms note Specifies the delay time from the Delay 1 5 0 1300 ms note Specifies the delay time from the original sound until the delay original sound until each delay sound is heard sound Delay 1 2 3 4 5 is Rvs Feedback 98 98 Adjusts the proportion of the re heard verse delay sound that is fed Fbk Dly Time 0 1300 ms note Adjusts the delay time for the back into the effect Negative feedback sound settings will invert the phase Feedback 1 98 98 Adjusts the proportion of the de Low Damp Freq 50 4000 Hz Adjusts the frequency below lay sound that is fed back into which sound fed back to the ef the effect Negative settings fect will be cut will invert the phase The Low Damp function damps Delay 1 5 Level 0 127 Adjusts the volume of each de the low frequency band of the lay sound Delay 1 2 3 4 5 delay sound quicker than other Delay 1 5 Pan L63 63R Adjusts the pan of each delay bands which makes for a clearer sound Delay 1 2 3 4 5 delay effect Low Damp Freq 50 4000 Hz Adjusts the freq
355. ss to the sound Six chorus sounds with different delay times are overlaid An equalizer is provided before Pre and after Post the hexa chorus Parameter Value Description Pre Dly Time 0 50 0 ms Adjusts the delay time from the direct sound until the chorus sound is heard Pre Dly Dev 0 50 0 ms Specifies the differences in Pre Delay time for each of the chorus sounds Rate 1 0 05 10 0 Hz Specifies the modulation fre note quency of the chorus sound Depth 0 127 Specifies the modulation depth of the chorus sound Depth Devia 0 127 Specifies the difference in mod tion ulation depth between each of the chorus sounds 126 Parameter Value Description Pan Deviation L63 63R Specifies the difference in stereo position between each of the chorus sounds 0 All of the chorus sounds will be panned to the center L20 R20 each chorus sound will be placed in 30 degree inter vals relative to the center posi tion Chorus Level 2 0 127 Volume level of the chorus sound Pre Low Freq 50 4000 Hz Frequency of the low range Pre Pre Low Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the low range Pre Pre Hi Freq 2000 20000 Hz Frequency of the high range Pre Pre Hi Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the high range Pre Ps Low Freq 50 4000 Hz Frequency of the low range Ps Low Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the low range Ps Hi Freq 2000 20000 Hz Frequency of the high range
356. ster W u u ya uuu 73 System mode O 18 73 T T SCREEN CALIBRATION srities ei 99 Template Name u eeren ghe toe epa isi ener e dec das MEM O scitote ertet edito tees aba ia Tempo Tempo Sync Temporary area Thess ecce en enr Me Mel uM DA I D AM Fhreshold arco shen macht abet iene asta sae he hase Eb n DLE Threshold level O MO Add Time KE AR n n e den A metet cede re reta eee tenet TIME TRIP A reir enne tenen tide 12 28 Time Trip Beat Keep sss 42 TIME TRIP PAD lt Time trip pad 28 Time trip pad hold switch a 38 Timetrip pad mode ttem hne 38 Time Trip Sw 42 Time trip switch Time Velo SENS iced eda ec OD det en TOTAL Gain n EIU D M Transmit active sensing switch sss 77 Transmit bank select switch 77 Transmit edit data switch sss 76 Transmit program change switch TRANSPOSE eiecti tere e tenen ee eei retener 13 22 A 22 Trigger level Trigger mode Trimming se A sniegodaschcaetbcea clei the skduen Since aoha Rog kbaad ence M X 38 SB COMMCGUOR cie rete petere nter o SB MIDI driver SB Mode u ua sess hes ettet a to ce Re uya SB Setup SB Storage SB MIDI Thru 5w SB MIDI thru switch eese 76 V VATEUE il liinda te ee e VAL OW Sta ea sassa denne ege ee te oce sed age eed A eret ess
357. t OFF lt lt OFF gt gt Fade Time LFO Fade Time 0 127 Thirty second note Sixteenth note y Eighth note triplet A Dotted sixteenth note Eighth note dy Quarter note triplet D Dotted eighth note Quarter note ds Half note triplet J Dotted quarter note J Half note og Whole note triplet J Dotted half note Whole note eis Double note triplet Dotted whole note ar Double note iS For details on the parameters of each COSM section refer to COSM Parameters p 111 105 MEE Appendices Parameter List TVA Group p 47 Parameter Value TVA Switch OFF ON TVA Level 0 127 Level KF Level Key Follow 200 200 Lvl LFO Dp Level LFO Depth 63 63 Pan L64 0 63R Pan KF Pan Key Follow 200 200 Pan LFO Dp Pan LFO Depth 63 63 Velocity Curve Envelope Velocity Curve 0 7 Velocity Sens Envelope Velocity Sensitivity 63 63 Velocity A Sens Envelope Attack Time Velocity Sensitivity 63 63 Velocity D Sens Envelope Decay Time Velocity Sensitivity 63 63 Velocity R Sens Envelope Release Time Velocity Sensitivity 63 63 ADSR Attack Envelope Attack Time 0 127 note ADSR Decay Envelope Decay Time 0 127 note ADSR Sustain Envelope Sustain Level 0 127 ADSR Release Envelope Release Time 0 127 note Env Time KF Envelope Time Key Follow 200
358. t Example2 gt Getting the data RQ1 of PATCH MFX in PATCH 003 According to the Parameter Address Map p 159 the start address of PATCH 003 is 20 02 00 00H and the offset address of PATCH MFX is 00 02 00H Therefore the start address of PATCH MFX in PATCH 003 is 20 02 00 OOH 00 02 00H 20 02 02 OOH As the size of PATCH MEX is 00 00 01 04H the system exclusive message should be sent is FO 41 10 0053 11 20 02 02 00 00 00 01 04 2 F7 1 2 3 4 5 address data checksum 6 1 Exclusive Status 2 ID Roland 3 Device ID 17 4 Model ID V Synth 5 Command ID RQ1 6 End of Exclusive Then calculate the checksum 20H 02H 02H 00H 00H 00H 01H 04H 32 2 2 0 0 0 1 4 41 sum 117 sum 128 0 quotient 41 remainder checksum 128 41 remainder 87 57H This means that FO 41 10 00 53 11 20 02 02 00 00 00 01 04 57 F7 is the message should be sent lt Example3 gt Getting Temporary Patch Part 1 data RQ1 cf This operation is the same as Data Transfer function in Utility mode with PATCH TEMP Source parameter options According to the Parameter Address Map p 159 the start address of Temporary Patch Part 1 is assigned as following 10 00 00 00 Temporary Patch Part 1 The offset address of Patch is also assigned as follows 00 00 00 Patch Common 00 ii 00 Patch Oscillator Zone 1 00 T 00 Patch Envelope Zone 1 00 i 00 Patch LFO Zone 1
359. t the envelope depth set this to 0 Value 0 7 ZL aaa Velocity Sens Envelope Velocity Sensitivity Keyboard playing dynamics can be used to control the depth of the envelope If you want the envelope to have more effect for strongly played notes set this parameter to a positive value If you want the pitch envelope to have less effect for strongly played notes set this to a negative value Value 63 63 Velocity A Sens Envelope Attack Time Velocity Sensitivity This allows keyboard dynamics to affect the attack time of the envelope If you want attack time to be speeded up for strongly played notes set this parameter to a positive value If you want it to be slowed down set this to a negative value Value 63 63 Velocity D Sens Envelope Decay Time Velocity Sensitivity This allows keyboard dynamics to affect the decay time of the envelope If you want decay time to be speeded up for strongly played notes set this parameter to a positive value If you want it to be slowed down set this to a negative value Value 63 63 Velocity R Sens Envelope Release Time Velocity Sensitivity The parameter to use when you want key release speed to control the release time value of the envelope If you want release time to be speeded up for quickly released notes set this parameter to a positive value If you want it to be slowed down set this to a negative value Value 63 63
360. t the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected Consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV technician for help This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation Unauthorized changes or modification to this system can void the users authority to operate this equipment This equipment requires shielded interface cables in order to meet FCC class B Limit NOTICE This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference Causing Equipment Regulations AVIS Cet appareil num rique de la classe B respecte toutes les exigences du R glement sur le mat riel brouilleur du Canada 179 Information When you need repair service call your nearest Roland Service Center or authorized Roland distributor in your country as shown below EGYPT Al Fanny Trading Office 9 EBN Hagar A1 Askalany Street ARD E1 Golf Heliopolis Cairo 11341 EGYPT TEL 20 2 417 1828 REUNION Maison FO YAM Marcel 25 Rue Jules Hermann Chaudron BP79 97 491 Ste Clotilde Cedex REUNION ISLAND TEL 0262 218 429 SOUTH AFRICA That Other Music Shop PTY Ltd 11 Melle St Braamfontein Johannesbourg SOUTH AFRICA P O Box 32918 Braamfontei
361. tandard settings or to the factory settings 1 Access the System Edit screen p 73 2 Touch Init located in the lower right of the screen HINT If you want the factory settings to be in effect the next time the V Synth is powered up touch Write to save the settings 73 MU Settings Common to All Modes System Mode Settings Common to All Modes System Mode Functions of System Parameters This section explains what the different System parameters do and also how these parameters are organized Settings Common to the Entire System Common Master SYSTEM Com Master h Master Master Tune Master Key Shift Master Level 9 7 Patch Remain Powerup Mode OFF xiii Tont common romer U LINK Master Tune Adjusts the overall tuning of the V Synth The display shows the frequency of the A4 note center A Value 415 3 466 2 Hz Master Key Shift Shifts the overall pitch of the V Synth in semitone steps Value 24 24 Master Level Adjusts the volume of the entire V Synth Value 0 127 Patch Remain Patch Remain Switch Specifies whether currently sounding notes will continue sounding when another patch is selected ON or not OFF Also when this is ON changes produced by incoming MIDI messages such as Volume CC 7 or Pan CC 10 as well as tonal quality and volume changes produced by the various controllers will be inherited Value OF
362. tave tuning 1 byte form ffH Channel Option byte 1 bits 0 to 1 channel 15 to 16 bit 2 to 6 Undefined ggH Channel byte 2 bits 0 to 6 channel 8 to 14 hhH Channel byte 3 bits 0 to 6 channel 1 to 7 ssH 12 byte tuning offset of 12 semitones from C to B 00H 64 cents 40H 0 cents equal temperament 7FH 63 cents F7H EOX End Of Exclusive Data Transmission This instrument can use exclusive messages to exchange many varieties of internal settings with other devices The model ID of the exclusive messages used by this instrument is 00H 53H OData Request 1RQ1 11H This message requests the other device to transmit data The address and size indicate the type and amount of data that is requested When a Data Request message is received if the device is in a state in which it is able to transmit data and if the address and size are appropriate the requested data is transmitted as a Data Set 1 DT1 message If the conditions are not met nothing is transmitted Status data byte status FOH 41H dev 00H 53H 11H aaH bbH ccH F7H ddH ssH ttH uuH vvH sum Byte Remarks FOH Exclusive status 41H ID number Roland dev device ID dev 10H 1FH 7FH 00H model ID 1 V Synth 53H model ID 2 V Synth 11H command ID RQ1 aaH address MSB bbH address ccH address ddH address LSB ssH size MSB ttH size uuH size vvH size LSB sum checksum F7H EOX End Of Exclusive The size of data th
363. ten permission of ROLAND CORPORATION CAUTION The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK n 5 PES DO NOT OPEN presence of uninsulated dangerous voltage within the product s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons ATTENTION RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE NE PAS OUVRIR CAUTION TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is DO NOT REMOVE COVER OR BACK intended to alert the user to the presence of important NO USER SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE operating and maintenance servicing instructions in the REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL literature accompanying the product INSTRUCTIONS PERTAINING TO A RISK OF FIRE ELECTRIC SHOCK OR INJURY TO PERSONS IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS WARNING When using electric products basic precautions should always be followed including the following 1 Read these instructions 10 Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched 2 Keep these instructions particularly at plugs convenience receptacles and the 3 Heed all warnings point where they exit from the apparatus 4 Follow all instructions 11 Only use attachments accessories specified by the 5 Do not use this apparatus near water manufacturer 6 Clean only with a dry cloth 12 Never u
364. th of the wow and flutter Parameter Value Description Comp Sw OFF ON Turns the comp limiter on off Comp Thresh 60 0 dB Sets the volume level at which old 1 the compression begins Comp Attack 0 127 Sets the time after the sound vol ume is crossed the compressor threshold until compression be gins Comp Release 0 127 Specifies the time from when the volume drops below the com pressor threshold until com pression is no longer applied Comp Ratio 1 5 1 2 1 4 1 Sets the source sound output 100 1 sound compression ratio Comp Gain 60 12 dB Output gain Enhan Sw OFF ON Turns the enhancer on off Enhan Sens 0 127 Sensitivity of the enhancer Enhan Frequen 0 127 Sets the lower limit of the fre cy quencies to which the enhance ment effect is added Enhan Mix Lev 0 127 Level of the overtones generated el by the enhancer Enhan Level 0 127 Volume of the enhancer sound EQ Low Freq 50 4000 Hz Frequency of the low range EQ Low Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the low range EQ Mid Freq 50 20000 Hz Frequency of the middle range EQ Mid Q 0 5 0 7 1 0 2 0 Gain of the middle range 4 0 8 0 Set a higher value for Q to nar row the range to be affected EQ Mid Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the middle range EQ Hi Freq 2000 20000 Hz Frequency of the high range EQ Hi Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the high range NSSw OFF ON Turns the noise suppressor on off NS Threshold 0 127 Adjusts the level at
365. th to your computer p 91 p 93 2 Using your computer copy the V Synth s prj folder onto a drive e g hard disk of your computer 3 Cancelthe USB connection p 92 p 94 Loading Backup Data from Your Computer into the V Synth 1 Use a USB cable to connect the V Synth to your computer as described in Connecting the V Synth to your computer p 91 p 93 2 Using your computer copy the prj folder that you previously saved on your computer to the prj folder overwriting it within the V Synth 3 Cancelthe USB connection p 92 p 94 Connecting to Your Computer via USB USB Mode Loading an Audio File WAV AIFF format from Your Computer into the V Synth Import WAV AIFF format audio files created by another device can be loaded into the V Synth and used in the same way as data you ve sampled on the V Synth 1 Use a USB cable to connect the V Synth to your computer as described in Connecting the V Synth to your computer p 91 p 93 2 From your computer copy drag amp drop the audio file saved on your computer into the prj folder within the V Synth i Cancel the USB connection p 92 p 94 P gt Use the Import menu Import Files p 85 in the V Synth s Disk mode to import the file you copied in step 2 5 Use the Sample mode s Preview function p 65 to verify that the imported data will sound correctly 6 Use the Sample mode s S
366. the V Synth to Your Computer 1 2 3 Make sure that the power of the V Synth is turned off Start up your computer Connect the V Synth and your computer using a USB cable USB Connector Computer E USB cable a m J V MI 4 5 6 7 V Synth Turn on the power of V Synth Ifyou are using a PC card insert that PC card into the PC CARD slot Press MODE to access the V SYNTH MODE MENU window Touch lt USB gt The USB Storage screen appears USB Storage PC Card Access nore If the USB Mode p 76 is set to MIDI you will be unable to select lt USB gt in the V SYNTH MODE MENU window Set the USB Mode to Storage 91 MU Connecting to Your Computer via USB USB Mode Connecting to Your Computer via USB USB Mode 8 Touch Internal or PC Card to establish the connection with your computer Internal Mounts the internal memory as an external drive on your computer PC Card Mounts the PC card as an external drive on your computer ore You cannot select PC Card unless a PC card is inserted in the PC CARD slot 9 When the USB connection is established the driver installation will begin A dialog box of Found new hard
367. the individual sounds that are divided by zone Common group settings except for Structure Type e Effect group settings for MFX Chorus and Reverb type and effect settings Splitting the Keyboard to Play Different Sounds Split A patch that contains settings to play different patches in each keyboard zone is called a split patch Here s how to create a split patch 1 Access the PATCH PLAY screen and select the patch whose settings you wish to modify p 21 If you want to create all your patches from the ground up rather than the patches that have already been prepared carry out the Initialize operation p 33 2 Touch lt Y gt in the upper right of the screen A pulldown menu appears MadOrchestra 2 01 DataTransfer PATCH Name PATCH Write PATCH Init PATCH Copy PATCH Delete 3 In the pulldown menu touch lt Zone gt The PATCH Zone window appears PATCH PLAY INIT PRTCH Z 013 PATCH Zone Creating a Patch 4 In the lower part of the screen touch lt Split gt Creating a Drum Patch Drum A window like the followi 2 ptr pay eee ee ET By dividing the keyboard into sixteen zones and assigning a Pra r percussion instrument sound to each zone you can create a patch that lets you play drums Such a patch is called a drum patch too UN You can think of a drum patch as a group containing various MI 700000 0 n n AN oi x percussion instrument sounds Since per
368. the power to all units This will help prevent malfurictions and or damage to Do not expose the unit to direct sunlight place it near devices that speakers or other devices Placement Using the unit near power amplifiers or other equipment containing large power transformers may induce hum To alleviate the problem change the orientation of this unit or move it farther away from the source of interference This device may interfere with radio and television reception Do not use this device in the vicinity of such receivers radiate heat leave it inside an enclosed vehicle or otherwise subject it to temperature extremes Excessive heat can deform or discolor the unit When moved from one location to another where the temperature and or humidity is very different water droplets condensation may form inside the unit Damage or malfunction may result if you attempt to use the unit in this condition Therefore before using the unit you must allow it to stand for several hours until the condensation has completely evaporated Do not allow objects to remain on top of the keyboard This can be the cause of malfunction such as keys ceasing to produce sound IMPORTANT NOTES Maintenance For everyday cleaning wipe the unit with a soft dry cloth or one that has been slightly dampened with water To remove stubborn dirt use a cloth impregnated with a mild non abrasive detergent Afterwards be sure to wipe the unit thorou
369. the song progresses and more If you mainly use the V Synth as a standalone keyboard instrument you may really not need to know much at all about MIDI However the following MIDI related information is provided so you can play the V Synth using an external MIDI device or master other advanced techniques About MIDI Connectors The V Synth is equipped with the three types of MIDI connectors each which works differently MIDI THRU OUT IN MIDI IN Connector This connector receives MIDI messages that are transmitted from external MIDI devices The V Synth can receive these messages to play notes or select sounds etc MIDI OUT Connector This connector transmits MIDI messages to external MIDI devices The V Synth s MIDI OUT connector is used for sending the performance data of the keyboard controller section as well as data used for saving various settings and patterns MIDI THRU Connector MIDI messages received at MIDI IN are re transmitted without change from this connector to an external MIDI device Use this in situations such as when you use multiple MIDI devices simultaneously 152 MIDI Channels and Multi timbral Sound Generators MIDI transmits many types of data over a single MIDI cable This is made possible by the concept of MIDI channels MIDI channels allow messages intended for a given instrument to be distinguished from messages intended for another instrument In some ways MIDI channels are similar
370. thel ttolled Ps Low Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the low range Ps Hi Freq 2000 20000 Hz Frequency of the high range Rat 05 10 0 Hz F f modulat J che 00 Hz idas E REAA Ps Hi Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the high range Depth 0 127 Depth of modulation Ps Low Freq 50 4000 Hz Frequency of the low range Ps Low Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the low range Ps Hi Freq 2000 20000 Hz Frequency of the high range Ps Hi Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the high range 120 09 Dynamic Processor Stereo Dynamic Processor A comp limiter enhancer 3 band equalizer and noise suppressor are connected in series Comp Limiter is able to use as a compressor which controls inconsistencies in sound levels by suppressing high sound levels while lifting weaker signals or as a limiter that prevents the signal from reaching exceedingly high levels Enhancer regulates the high end overtones clarifying the sound and the sound contour 3 Band Equalizer works in three frequency ranges Low Mid and High You can set the frequencies and boost or cut the level Noise Suppressor leaves the original sound unmodified but mutes only the noise during the silent intervals Parameter Value Description NS Release 0 127 Sets the transition time from when the noise suppression starts to the point where the vol ume reaches 0 10 Tape Echo Simulator This virtual tape echo gives you real tape delay so
371. times indicate a device other than the V Synth Be careful not to accidentally delete the registration for another device If you delete the registration for another device you will have to reinstall the driver for that device 147 MEE Appendices Troubleshooting 10 A dialog box will ask you to confirm deletion of the device Verify the contents of the dialog box and click OK Delete each unwanted occurrence of Composite USB Device USB Device or USB composite device indications with an or symbol 11 Turn off the power of the V Synth then delete the driver 12 Restart Windows Then install the driver once again If the problem still occurs after you have taken the above measures please refer also to the Readme file for the USB driver The Readme file is on the CD ROM Problems Related to the USB Driver Macintosh Problem Cause Action A message of Drivers need ed for the USB device V Synth are not available Would you like to look for these drivers over the inter net is displayed It is possible that the V Synth s USB MIDI driver has not been correctly installed in your computer Correctly install the USB MIDI driver as described in Readme file on the included CD ROM It is possible that there is a conflict with the driver function extension of another USB device We are aware of a problem that causes the V Synth to not be recognized corre
372. tor Value MIX Add OSC1 and OSC2 RING Use OSC2 to apply ring modulation to OSCI FM Use OSC2 to apply FM frequency modulation to OSC1 ENV RING Use the envelope of OSC2 to control the volume of OSC1 OSC SYNC Synchronize the output waveform of OSCI to the output waveform of OSC2 nore OSC SYNC is valid only when OSC2 is an analog oscillator Original Level Modulator Original Level Specifies the volume for the original sound of OSC1 Value 0 127 MEMD This can be set if Modulator Type is set to RING or FM Attack Modulator Attack Time Specifies the attack time of the OSC2 envelope Value 0 127 MEMO This can be set if Modulator Type is set to ENV RING Release Modulator Release Time Specifies the release time of the OSC2 envelope Value 0 127 MEM This can be set if Modulator Type is set to ENV RING Applying Various Effects to Each Note You Play COSM1 COSM2 COSM Switch Switches the COSM on off Value OFF ON COSM Type PATCH Edit COSM1 Type INIT PATCH 2 01 Drive Type Output Level EA COSM Type Use this parameter to select from among the 15 available COSMs For details on COSM parameters refer to COSM Parameters p 111 Value THRU OD DS W SHAPE AMP SPEAKER RESONATOR SBF1 2 COMB DUAL TVF DYN TVF COMP LIMITER F SHIFT LO FI LFO PATCH Edit COSM1 LFO INIT PATCH 2 01 onset 100 J o RENI
373. ttings must be made separately Set the matrix control Source to PAD X or PAD Y and specify the parameter to be controlled in Destination For details on these settings refer to Matrix Ctrl p 38 By setting matrix control Source to TRIP R you can apply the Time Trip effect and the matrix control effect simultaneously In this case turn TIME TRIP on While you play the keyboard to produce sound place your fingertip on the Time Trip pad and move your finger in the following way If TIME TRIP is on The effect will be applied when you move your finger in a circle on the Time Trip pad TIME TRIP PAD TIME TRIP D ASSIGN ABLE O If you are using matrix control as well the effect will be applied when you move your finger from the circumference of the Time Trip pad toward the center TIME TRIP PAD TIME TRIP D ASSIGN ABLE O Playing in Patch Mode If ASSIGNABLE is on The effect will be applied when you move your finger up down left right on the Time Trip pad TIME TRIP PAD TIME TRIP O ASSIGN ABLE HINT By pressing TIME TRIP PAD HOLD you can cause the effect to be held even after you take your finger off the Time Trip pad
374. tually play set this parameter to 0 To have the arpeggio sound using the notes you play and notes 1 octave higher set this parameter to 1 A setting of 1 will make the arpeggio sound using the notes you play and notes 1 octave lower Value 3 3 Pattern Edit Press this when you want to create an original arpeggio pattern iS For details on creating an arpeggio pattern refer to Creating an Original Arpeggio Pattern Pattern Edit p 25 KBD Velo Arpeggio Keyboard Velocity Specifies the loudness of the notes that you play If you want the velocity value of each note to depend on how strongly you play the keyboard set this parameter to REAL If you want each note to have a fixed velocity regardless of how strongly you play the keyboard set this parameter to the desired value 1 127 Value REAL 1 127 Duration Arpeggio Duration Modifies the length of the notes to adjust the groove feel of the arpeggio A setting of 100 will produce the most pronounced groove feel Value 0 100 Motif Arpeggio Motif Sets the order in which notes of the chord will sound Value UP Notes you press will be sounded beginning from low to high DOWN Notes you press will be sounded from high to low UP amp DOWN Notes you press will be sounded from low to high and then back down from high to low RANDOM Notes you press will be sounded in random order NOTE ORDER Notes you press wil
375. uency below Low Damp 36 0 dB Degree of Low Damp which sound fed back to the ef Gain fect will be cut Hi Damp Freq 2000 20000 Hz Adjusts the frequency above The Low Damp function damps which sound fed back to the ef the low frequency band of the fect will be cut delay sound quicker than other High Damp by attenuating the bands which makes for a clearer higher frequencies first makes delay effect the delay sound more natural Low Damp 36 0 dB Degree of Low Damp Hi Damp Gain 36 0 dB Degree of High Damp Gain Balance DRY100 0WET Volume balance between the di Hi Damp Freq 2000 20000 Hz Adjusts the frequency above DRY0 100WET rect sound DRY and the effect which sound fed back to the ef sound WET fect will be cut Ps Low Freq 50 4000 Hz Frequency of the low range High Damp by attenuating the Ps Low Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the low range higher frequencies first makes Ps Hi Freq 2000 20000 Hz Frequency of the high range the delay sownd more natural Ps Hi Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the high range Hi Damp Gain 36 0 dB Degree of High Damp Ps Low Freq 50 4000 Hz Frequency of the low range Ps Low Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the low range Ps Hi Freq 2000 20000 Hz Frequency of the high range Ps Hi Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the high range 123 MEN Appendices 14 Vocal Echo This effect simulates a karaoke echo Parameter Value Description Phaser Manual 0 127 Specifies the center frequency at which t
376. uereis aite iced aiden neti 150 Message BOXES auaasr aaa a a shaaashiso 151 About MIDI u UI tad 152 MIDI Implementation 1 J J J J I 153 Specificato NS tt 172 dir A PO nn G P 173 Installing the PC Card Protector 179 Main Features With this synthesizer every component involved in sound creation has been taken to the next stage of evolution The V Synth brings together the ideal combination of sound generators together with an interface that dynamically links your sensitivities with the sound It s a powerful synthesizer that only Roland could have produced The sounds of the V Synth have a living character that goes beyond the limits of previous synthesizers E The ideal combination of sound generators Flexible sound generator structure The sound generator section consists of OSC MOD COSM and TVA blocks and allows you to flexibly change the way in which these blocks are connected Sections other than the TVA provide multiple types and can be combined freely Since each section can be switched on off in real time from the panel it s always easy to understand how the sound is structured Versatile oscillators using VariPhrase technology Since the oscillators have independent envelopes and LFOs they themselves have the functionality of synthesizers You can choose from three types analog PCM an
377. umbers subsequent patches waves will be automatically renumbered forward CANCEL EXECUTE HINT If you want to cancel the procedure at this point touch lt CANCEL gt 3 Touch lt EXECUTE gt to execute the operation Importing Individual Patch or Wave Files Import Files You can import individual patch or wave files or folders into the work area of the V Synth won The data will be imported into unused patch wave numbers Importing is not possible if there are no empty patches or waves 1 Access the DISK UTILITY MENU screen p 83 2 Touch Import Files gt The Disk Import Files screen appears DISK Import Files mum 66 7MB Free Int Internal pr jx 122items Patch Current Int internal pr 3 Touch lt Patch gt if you want to import a patch or touch Wave if you want to import a wave 85 Gw Disk Related Functions Disk Mode Disk Related Functions Disk Mode 4 Touch lt Preset gt if you want to import from preset memory Initia lizing a Disk Fo rma t touch lt Int gt if you want to import from internal memory or touch lt Card gt if you want to import from a PC card You can initialize format a disk erasing all data from it 5 From the file list select the file folder that you want to 1 Access the DISK UTILITY MENU screen p 83 import i nan 2 Touch lt Format gt ere you can use the following functions
378. und This simulates the tape echo part of Roland s RE 201 Space Echo Parameter Value Description Mode S M L S M S L M L S M L Sets the combination of play back heads to be used The RE 201 had three playback heads to make different delay times Short Medium and Long delay at once For example to use the short and middle heads select S M Repeat Rate 1 0 127 Sets the tape speed This corresponds to the delay time in a contemporary delay ef fect Intensity 2 0 127 Sets the repeat times of the de layed sound This is analogous to a contempo rary delay s feedback setting Bass Treble 100 100 These are the echo sound s bass and treble adjustments When set to 0 they make no change to the sound Head S Pan Head M Pan Head L Pan L63 63R These are the pan left right set tings for each of the heads for Short Medium and Long delay time This parameter does not appear on the original RE 201 Tape Distortion 0 5 Adds the distortion characteris tic of tape The distortion gets more intense as the value is increased W F Rate 0 127 Frequency of the wow and flut ter modulation The wavering of multiple pitch es that appears from tape wear and irregularities in rotation is called wow and flutter W F Depth 0 127 Modulation dep
379. und to the original sound to create time varying change modulating the sound Parameter Value Description Shift Mode 4STAGE Sets the number of stages in the 8STAGE phase shift circuit four 4STAG or eight SSTAGE Setting this to eight stages 8STAGE increases the number of the frequency points that sound is canceled giving a sharper effect Level 4 stage Freq Level 8 stage Freq Manual 0 127 Specifies the center frequency at which the sound is modulated Rate 1 0 05 10 0 Hz Specifies the frequency of mod note ulation Depth 2 0 127 Specifies the depth of modula tion Phase NORM INV Sets the phase of both left and right swelling NORM The left and right phase will be the same INV The left and right phase will be opposite Resonance 0 127 Specifies the amount of feed back for the phaser Higher settings will give the sound a stronger character Mix Level 0 127 Volume of the phase shifted sound relative to the direct sound Ps Low Freq 50 4000 Hz Frequency of the low range Ps Low Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the low range Ps Hi Freq 2000 20000 Hz Frequency of the high range Ps Hi Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the high range 25 Rotary The Rotary effect simulates the sound of the rotary speakers often used with the electric organs of the past Since the movement of the high range and low range rotors can be set independently the unique type of modu
380. usts the frequency above which sound fed back to the ef fect will be cut High Damp by attenuating the higher frequencies first makes the delay sound more natural Hi Damp Gain 36 0 dB Degree of High Damp Delay Level 0 127 Volume of the delay sound Ps Low Freq 50 4000 Hz Frequency of the low range Ps Low Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the low range Ps Hi Freq 2000 20000 Hz Frequency of the high range Ps Hi Gain 15 15 dB Gain of the high range 3 3 Voca l M ulti Parameter Value Description A limiter de esser enhancer 3 band equalizer and delay are Tow Ramp S ss s Ms d c et connected in series fect will be cut A limiter holds down high signal levels to prevent distortion The Low Damp function damps A de esser cuts the sibilant sounds of a voice producing a gentler tie l w frequency and of the delay sound quicker than other sone bands which makes for a clearer delay effect Low Damp 36 0 dB Degree of Low Damp Gain Hi Damp Freq 2000 20000 Hz Adjusts the frequency above which sound fed back to the ef fect will be cut en High Damp by attenuating the Parameter Value Description higher frequencies first makes Limtr Mode LIMITER DE Selects whether the effect will the delay sound more natural ESSER function as a limiter or as a de Hi Damp
381. velope Settings p 48 LFO For details on LFO settings refer to Making LFO Settings p 49 115 MEN Appendices MFX Parameters cS Explanations for each MFX Type are given on the following MEX Multi Effects provides 41 types of effect This section explains pages the features of each MFX and the functions of the parameters 01 Parametric EQ Para EQ p 117 MEMD 02 Graphic EQ Graph EQ p 117 Parameters marked by 1 3 can be selected as a destination 03 Resonant Filter ResoFilt p 117 parameter for matrix control Destination MFX1 MEX3 These 04 Isolator and Filter Isolator p 118 correspond as follows 05 Distortion OD DS OD p 118 1 Destination MFX1 06 Amp Simulator Gtr Amp p 119 2 Destination MFX2 07 Auto Wah Auto Wah p 120 3 Destination MFX3 08 Humanizer Humanizer p 120 09 Dynamic Processor Dynamic p 121 10 Tape Echo Simulator TapeEcho p 121 11 Stereo Delay St Delay p 122 12 Multi Tap Delay TapDelay p 123 13 Reverse Delay RvsDelay p 123 14 Vocal Echo VocalEcho p 124 15 Band Pass Delay BP Delay p 124 16 Analog Delay gt Chorus AD gt Cho p 125 17 Digital Chorus DigiCho p 125 18 Space Chorus SpaceCho p 126 19 Hexa Chorus Hex Cho p 126 20 Analog Flanger Ana Flgr p 126 21 BOSS Flanger BOSSFlgr p 127 22 Step Flanger StepFlgr p 127 23 Analog Phaser Ana Phsr p 128 24 Digital Phaser Dig
382. ven as hexadecimal for each 7 bits From the preceding table since 12H 18 and 34H 52 18 x 128452 2356 lt Example3 gt What is the decimal expression of the nibbled value 0A 03 09 0D From the preceding table since 0AH 10 03H 3 09H 9 0DH 13 10 x 16 3 x 16 9 x 16 13 41885 lt Example4 gt What is the nibbled expression of the decimal value 1258 16 1258 16 48 c LO 16 4 14 Onda 4 Since from the preceding table 0 00H 4 04H 14 0EH 10 0AH the result is 00 04 0E OAH 168 Examples of Actual MIDI Messages lt Example1 gt 92 3E 5F 9n is the Note on status and n is the MIDI channel number Since 2H 2 3EH 62 and 5FH 95 this is a Note on message with MIDI CH 3 note number 62 note name is D4 and velocity 95 lt Example2 gt CE 49 CnH is the Program Change status and n is the MIDI channel number Since EH 14 and 49H 73 this is a Program Change message with MIDI CH 15 program number 74 lt Example3 gt EA 00 28 EnH is the Pitch Bend Change status and n is the MIDI channel number The 2nd byte 00H 0 is the LSB and the 3rd byte 28H 40 is the MSB but Pitch Bend Value is a signed number in which 40 00H 64 x 12 80 8192 is 0 so this Pitch Bend Value is 28 00H 40 00H 40 x 12 80 64 x 12 80 5120 8192 3072 If the Pitch Bend Sensitivity is set to 2 semitones 8192 00 00H will cause the pitch to change 200 cents so in this case
383. ware will appear near the Windows task tray Installation is completely automatic Please wait for it to be completed 10 When installation is completed open My Computer and you will see a new drive icon In Windows Me 2000 98 98SE a drive icon named Removable Disk will appear In Windows XP the drive icon will be named V SYNTH if you selected Internal If you selected PC Card it will show the volume label that you assigned when formatting the card If you formatted the card on the V Synth the volume label will be PC CARD 11 Once the V Synth is connected you can transfer files by operating your computer o es not perform the following actions while Access the access indicator in the USB Storage screen is blinking Doing so may cause your computer to freeze and may also damage the files in the drive Do not disconnect the USB cable Do not remove the PC card while it is being accessed Do not suspend standby hibernate restart or shut down your computer Do not turn off the power of V Synth Switching the Connected Drive When USB connected here s how to switch between Internal the V Synth s internal memory and PC Card the PC card inserted in the V Synth 1 In the V Synth s USB Storage screen make sure that Access the access indicator is not blinking 2 In My Computer right click the Removable Disk icon and execute Eject 3 In the V Synth s USB Storage
384. warnings or alerts to danger The symbol alerts the user to items that must never be carried out are forbidden The specific thing that must not be done is indicated by the design contained within the circle In the case of the symbol at left it means that the unit must never be disassembled The symbol alerts the user to things that must be carried out The specific thing that must be done is indicated by the design contained within the circle In the case of the symbol at left it means that the power cord plug must be unplugged from the outlet OS ALWAYS OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING 7 Before using this unit make sure to read the instructions below and the Owner s Manual Do not attempt to repair the unit or replace parts within it except when this manual provides specific instructions directing you to do so Refer all servicing to your retailer the nearest Roland Service Center or an authorized Roland distributor as listed on the Information page Never use or store the unit in places that are Subject to temperature extremes e g direct sunlight E in an enclosed vehicle near a heating duct on top of heat generating equipment or are x Damp e g baths washrooms on wet floors or are v Humid or are Exposed to rain or are Dusty or are Subject to high levels of vibration This unit should be used only with a rack or stand that
385. which the 2 noise suppressor will begin to take effect When the signal drops below the specified level it will be muted Echo Level 0 127 Volume of the echo sound 121 MEN Appendices 11 Stereo Delay This is a stereo delay Depending on the length of the delay you set you can get long echoes thick sounds or spatial sounds When Mode parameter is MONO or ALTERNATE Parameter Value Description Feedback 98 98 Adjusts the proportion of the de lay sound that is fed back into the effect Negative settings will invert the phase Low Damp Freq 50 4000 Hz Adjusts the frequency below which sound fed back to the ef fect will be cut The Low Damp function damps the low frequency band of the delay sound quicker than other bands which makes for a clearer delay effect Low Damp Gain 36 0 dB Degree of Low Damp Hi Damp Freq 2000 20000 Hz Adjusts the frequency above which sound fed back to the ef fect will be cut High Damp by attenuating the higher frequencies first makes the delay sound more natural Hi Damp Gain 36 0 dB Degree of High Damp Parameter Value Description Balance DRY100 0WET DRYO0 100WET Volume balance between the di rect sound DRY and the delay sound WET Mode MONO STE REO ALTER NATE Switches stereo monaural or al ternate MONO This is a single i
386. xclusive messages set this parameter to match the Device ID number of the other MIDI device Value 17 32 Clock Source The LFO cycle or multi effects changes can be synchronized to a clock tempo When this is used by the patch this Clock Source setting determines the clock which will be used Value INTERNAL The Patch Tempo will be used EXTERNAL Synchronize to the clock of an external sequencer Rx PC Receive Program Change Switch Specifies whether Program Change messages will be received ON or not OFF Value OFF ON Rx Bank Receive Bank Select Switch Specifies whether Bank Select messages will be received ON or not OFF Value OFF ON 75 MU Settings Common to All Modes System Mode Settings Common to All Modes System Mode Rx Sys Ex Receive System Exclusive Switch Specifies whether System Exclusive messages will be received ON or not OFF Value OFF ON Tx Edit Transmit Edit Data Switch Specify whether changes you make in the settings of a patch will be transmitted as system exclusive messages ON or will not be transmitted OFF Value OFF ON Clock Out Specifies whether MIDI clock will be transmitted ON or not OFF Value OFF ON USB Setup Touch lt USB Setup gt and a window like the following will appear SYSTEM Com MIDI USB v SYSTEM Com USB Setting These parameters are reflected after pressing 0K USB Mode E USB MIDI Thru Sw O
387. xecute appears Clean up a disk by deleting unwanted files p 85 Path of the selected file folder Import Files Disk free space DISK Load Project mmm 66 7MB Free Vv 1 titem Import individual patch or wave files p 85 Format Internal Initialize format a disk p 86 Tools List of files stored Copy or move a file or folder p 87 on the disk Current Int Internal or i Path of the current project Disk to which the function to be executed will apply p For details on operations in the Disk Utility screens refer to the explanations on the following pages 5 Verify the contents of the screen and touch lt OK gt to execute When the operation is completed the display will briefly indicate COMPLETED HINT To cancel the operation touch Cancel 6 Press EXIT to exit Disk mode uote Never turn off the power of the V Synth while performing an operation in Disk mode Doing so may destroy the files 83 fr Disk Related Functions Disk Mode Disk Related Functions Disk Mode Sorting the Files Displayed in the File List In each Disk Utility screen you can change the order of the files displayed in the file list 1 In the upper right of the disk utility screen touch lt W gt A pulldown menu like the following appears DISK Load Project mur 166 7MB Free v Beep Internal pr Ep Y Sort
388. xecute gt The selected sample will be deleted 6 If you want to continue deleting other samples repeat steps 4 and 5 7 Press EXIT The SAMPLE Delete List window closes Resampling The V Synth is able to resample samples from its internal memory This is called resampling In actuality the sounds that are output from the rear panel MAIN OUT L MONO R jacks are sampled For example you could sample multiple samples played simultaneously and record them as a single sample You can conserve voices in this way Pre Gain INPUT o Sampling ce OUTPUT oun Effect Before you enter Resampling mode make settings so that you can play the sample s you wish to resample The resampling procedure is essentially the same as the Sampling Procedure described in the preceding section However please be aware of the following points You must set the Input Source in the SAMPLING General screen to RESAMPL To adjust the sampling level adjust the setup Pre gain p 61 and the pre effect Output Level p 61 Setup Settings SAMPLING General SAMPLING General y REMAIN TIME SEXIES STEREO MIN MONORAL MONORAL CE S seo Gre baad e SEEE Type P od LEER i 0 Input CUE OPTICAL j COAXIAL E RESAMPL a s wn FE G fadle Trigger Level Pre Trigger Pre Gai EIER O mse kael Sampling Type Select the type of sampling Value STEREO L R Sample in ste
389. ynth s panel What is the Time Trip function One of the advantages of VariPhrase is that the playback location and speed of the wave can be changed in real time The Time Trip function takes advantage of this ability to manually control the playback location and speed of the wave In patches that use VariPhrase switch the Time Trip Pad function to TIME TRIP to use this function While playing the keyboard touch the Time Trip pad and the currently sounding wave will stop at the current playback location Then as you move your finger from that point in a circle the wave playback will advance in the direction of conventional playback clockwise or the reverse counterclockwise Unlike scratching ona turntable this lets you control the playback without affecting the pitch so you can play the sound at the pitch you specify from the keyboard You can use the D Beam controller to produce similar results 1 Access the PATCH PLAY screen p 21 2 Choose the function that you want to control from the Time Trip pad and press the TIME TRIP PAD button for that function TIME TRIP PAD TIME TRIP O ASSIGN ABLE HOLD O TIME TRIP Apply the Time Trip effect ASSIGNABLE Apply the effect that is specified by each patch If ASSIGNABLE is on the effect is applied via matrix control This means that matrix control se
390. yte BnH 42H vvH OH FH ch 1 16 00H 7FH 0 127 0 63 OFF 64 127 ON n MIDI channel number vv Control value OEffect 1 Reverb Send Level Controller number 91 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 5BH vvH n MIDI channel number 0H FH ch 1 16 vv Reverb Send Level 00H 7FH 0 127 OEffect 3 Chorus Send Level Controller number 93 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 5DH vvH OH FH ch 1 16 00H 7FH 0 127 n MIDI channel number vv Chorus Send Level ORPN MSB LSB Controller number 100 101 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 65H mmH BnH 64H 1H n MIDI channel number 0H FH ch 1 16 mm upper byte MSB of parameter number specified by RPN 11 lower byte LSB of parameter number specified by RPN lt lt lt RPN gt gt gt Control Changes include RPN Registered Parameter Numbers which are extended When using RPNs first RPN Controller numbers 100 and 101 they can be sent in any order should be sent in order to select the parameter then Data Entry Controller numbers 6 and 38 should be sent to set the value Once RPN messages are received Data Entry messages that is received at the same MIDI chamnel after that are recognized as changing toward the value of the RPN messages In order not to make any mistakes transmitting RPN Null is recommended after setting parameters you need 153 MENS Appendices MIDI Implementation This device receives the following RPN

User manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents